INFANTRY Drill Regulations, United States Army. EVERY STUDENT OF THE NEW DRILL I^EQULATIONS Should have a copy of the Special Edition of the Infantry Drill, containing the Interpretations of the Drill, BY Lieut. JOHN T. FRENCH, Jr., 4TH Arl, U.S.A., Recorder of the Tactical Board. Price, bonnd in Bristol Board, 50 cts., in Leather, $1. Sent by mail, prepaid. A liberal discount is made on orders for fifty or more We also furnish the New Drill Regulations withou Interpretations. Bound in Bristol Board, 30 cts. ; ir leather, 75 cts. Drill Regulations for Cavalry and Artillery, ii leather, each $1.00. MANUAL OF "cUARD DUTY. We also publish the New Manual of Guard Dut approved by the War Department, and which supe; sedes all previous publications. Bound in Bristol Board 25 ct Bound in Leather 50 ct Sen^ by mail^ prepaid^ on receipt of price. Address ARMY AND NAVY JOURNAL. 93-101 Nassau St.. New York. INFAJVTRy Drill Kegijlations, UNITED STATES ARMY. Adopted Oct. 3, 1891. NEW YORK : ARMY AND NAVY JOURNAL, Bennett Building, 93-101 Nassau Street. B. APPLETON AND COMPANY. 1896. Copyrighted 1891 by W. C. & F. P. Church, Army and Navy Journal, 93-101 Nassau Street, New York. , 3f,U Un 3i.' I ?'/ 1 ^3 i ^-1 ' hr--4 1^ ‘!:^ War Department, Washington^ October 3, 1891. A board of officers consisting of Lieut. Col. John C. Bates, Twen- tieth Infantry ; Lieut. Col. George B. Sanford, Ninth Cavalry ; Maj, Henrv C. Hasbrouck, Fourth Artillery ; Maj. John C. Gilmore, Assistant Adjutant-General ; Capt. Joseph T. Haskell, Twenty-third Infantry ; Capt. Edward S. Godfrey, Seventh Cavalry ; and Capt. James M. Lancaster, Third Artillery, with First Lieut. George Andrews, Twenty-fifth Infantry, as recorder at first, and later, First Lieut. John T. French, jr.. Fourth Artillery, having prepared a system of Drill Regulations for infantry which has been approved by the President, it is herewith published for the information and government of the Army, and for the observance of the militia of the United States. With a view to insure uniformity throughout the Army, all infantry exercises and maneuvers not embraced in this system are prohibited and those herein prescribed will be strictly observed. Redfield Proctor, Secretary of Wa/r, \n I Digitized by the Internet Archive in 20iywith funding from University of Illinois Urbana-Champaign Alternates https://archive.org/details/infantrydrillregOOunit_0 INFANTRY DRILL EEGULATIOl^S. DEFINITIONS. Alignment — A straight line, upon which several men or bodies of troops are formed, or are to be formed. Base — The unit on which a movement is regulated ; as, base file, company, or battalion. Center — The middle point or element of a command ; a.s, the center file, company, etc. Column — A formation in which the elements are placed one behind another, whether these elements are files, fours, platoons, companies or larger bodies. Deploy — To extend the front ; as, to pass from column into line. Depth — The space from head to rear of any formation, including the leading and rear elements. The depth of one man is taken as twelve inches. Disposition — The distribution of the fractions of a body of troops, and the formations and duties as- signed to each, for the accomplishment of a common end. Distance — An open space in the direction of depth. The distance between ranks in the same unit is measured from the breast of the man in rear to the back of the man in’front. The distance between two subdivisions in column is measured in like manner from guide to guide. Between two commands in column, one in rear of the other, each comprising several fractions, the dis- tance is measured from the rear guide of the com- mand that is in front to the leading guide of the fol- lowing command. 4 DEFINITIONS. Drill — The exercises and evolutions tau>^nt on the drill ground and executed in the precise and formal man- ner prescribed. Echelon — In the order in echelon the subdivisions are placed one behind another, extending beyond and un- masking one another, either wholly or in part. In battle formation, this term is also employed to designate the different elements or lines in the direc- tion of depth. Example : The first echelon, the firing line ; the second echelon, the support, etc. Evolution — A movement executed by several battalions for the purpose of passing from one formation to an- other. Facing Distance — Sixteen inches; i. e., the difference between the front of a man in ranks and his depth. File — Two men, a front rank man and the correspond- ing man of the rear rank, whether placed one behind the other or side by side. File Leader — The front rank man of a file. A file is said to be blank when it has no rear rank man. When troops are in one rank, the men are frequently termed files. File Closers — Officers, or non-commissioned officers posted two paces in rear of the line ; it is their duty to rectify mistakes and to insure steadiness and promptness in the ranks. Flank — The right or left of a command in line or col- umn ; also, the element on the right or left of a line. In speaking of the enemy, one says ‘‘his right flank;” “his left wing,” etc.; to indicate the flank or wing which the enemy would so designate. Flank ^tack — A movement made against the enemy’s flank. Flankers — Men so posted or marched as to protect the flank of a column. Flank March — A march, whatever the formation, by which troops move along the front of the enemj^’s position. DEFINITIONS. 5 Formation — Arrangement of the elements of a com- mand. The placing of all the fractions in regular order in line, in column or for battle. Front — The space in width occupied by a command, either in line or column. In estimating the extent of the front, the space occupied by one man is taken at twenty-eight inches, which includes the interval between files. Front also denotes the direction of the enemy. Guard Advance — A body of troops marching in front of a command to reconnoiter and to protect its march. Guard Rear — A body of t. -oops to protect the rear of a command. Guide — An officer, non-commissioned officer or private upon whom the command regulates its march. Head — The leading element of a column. Interval — An open space between elements of the same line. The interval between two men is measured from elbow to elbow ; between two companies, squads, etc., from the left elbow of the left man or guide of the group on the right to the right elbow of the right man or guide of the group on the left. Left — The left extremity or element of a body of troops. Line — A formation in which the different elements are abreast of each other. When the elements are in column the formation is called a line of columns. Maneuver — A movement made according to the nature of the ground with reference to the position and movements of the enemy. Order, Close — The normal formation in which soldiers are regularly arranged in line or column. Order, Extended — The formation in which the soldiers, or the subdivisions, or both, are separated by inter- vals greater than in close order. Pace — Thirty inches ; the length of the full step in quick time. 6 DEFINITIONS. In these regulations, intervals and distances that can be verified by pacing, are given in paces ; those less than one pace, in inches ; considerable distances, in yards. Ploy — To diminish front ; as, to ploy into close column. Point of Rest — The point at which a formation begins. Rank — A line of men placed side by side. Right — Ti^e right extremity or element of a body of troops. Scouts — Men detailed to precede a command on the march and forming for battle, to gather and report information concerning the enemy and the nature of the ground. Tactics — The art of handling troops in the presence of the enemy, i 6., applying on the battle field the movements learned at drill. Turning Movement — An extended movement around the enemy’s flank for the purpose of threatening or attacking his flank or rear. Wing — The portion of a command bet'wrien the center and the flank ; the battalion is the smallest body which is divided into wings. SIGNALS. 7 SIGNALS. ' The following signals are used alone or in conjunc- tion with verbal commands or trumpet calls. The whistle call to fix the attention may precede the sig- nal. In making the signals, the sword, rifle or head dress may be held in the hand ; when the sword is so used it is in prolongation of the arm. Forward — Raise the arm until horizontal, extended to the front ; at the same time move to the front. Right Oblique — Raise the arm until horizontal, ex- tended obliquely to the right ; at the same time move in that direction. Left Oblique — Same to the left. By the Right Flank — Raise the arm until horizontal, extended to the right ; at the same time move to the right. By the Left Same to the left. To the Rear — Face to the rear, raise the arm until horizontal, extended to the rear ; at the same time move to the rear. Change Direction to the Right or Left — Raise the arm until horizontal, extended toward the marching flank, carrying the arm horizontally to the front and right ; at the same time facing and moving in the direction to be taken. As Skirmishers — Raise both arms until horizontal, ex- tended laterally. Halt — Raise the arm vertically to its full extent. Assemble — Raise the arm vertically to its full extent and slowly describe small horizontal circles. Rally — Raise the arm vertically to its full extent and circle it very rapidly. Cease Firing. — A whistle call. This signal is also used to fix the attention. s GENERAL PRINCIPLES. GENERAL PRINCIPLES. 1. All details, detachments and other bodies of troops will habitually be formed in double rank. 2. Movements that may be executed toward either flank are explained as toward but* one flank, it being necessary to substitute the word “left” for “right,” or the reverse, to have the command and explanation of the corresponding movement toward the other flank. 3. In movements where the guide may be either right or left, it is indicated in the command, thus ; Guide {right or left). 4. Any movement may be executed either from the halt, or when marching, if not otherwise prescribed. 5. All movements, not specially excepted, may be executed in double time. If the movement be from the halt, or when marching in quick time, the command double time precedes the command march; if marching in double time the command double time is omitted. 6. There are two kinds of commands : HhQ preparatory command, such as forward, indi- cates the movement that is to be executed. The command of execution, such as march, halt or ARMS, causes the execution. Preparatory commands are distinguished by italics, those of execution by capitals. Where it is not mentioned in the text who gives the commands prescribed they are the commands of the instructor. The preparatory command should be given at such an interval of time before the comman d of execution as to admit of its being properly understood ; the com- mand of execution should be given at the instant the movement is to commence. GENERAL PRINCIPLES. 9 The tone of command is animated, distinct, and of a loudness proportioned to the number of men under instruction. Each preparatory command is pronounced in an ascending tone of voice, but always in such a manner that the command of execution may be more energetic and elevated. The command of execution is pronounced in a firm and brief tone. When giving commands to troops it is usually best to face toward them. 7. To secure uniformity, officers and noncommis- sioned officers are practiced in giving commands. 8. The signal and trumpet calls should be frequently used in instruction, in order that the officers and men may readily recognize them. 9. In the different schools, the posts of the officers and non-commissioned officers are specified, but as in- structors they go wherever their presence is necessary. 10 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. CLOSE ORDER. SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 10. The object of this school is the instruction of the individual recruit and afterward that of the squad. 11. Short and frequent drills are preferable to long ones, which exhaust the attention of both instructor and recruit. 12. Generally, sergeants and corporals are the in- structors under the supervision of an officer, but the captain occasionally requires the lieutenants to act as instructors. 13. The instructor will always maintain a military bearing and by a quiet, firm demeanor set a proper •example to the men. 14. The instructor explains each movement in as few Words as possible, at the same time executing it him- self. He requires the recruits to take by themselves the proper positions and does not touch them for the pur- pose of correcting them, except when they are unable to correct themselves ; he avoids keeping them too long at the same movement, although each should be understood before passing to another. He exacts by degrees the desired precision and uniformity. 15. After the movements have been properly executed in the order laid down, the instructor no longer con- fines himself to that order. 16. As the instruction progresses the recruits will be grouped according to proficiency, in order that all may advance as rapidly as their abilities permit. Those who lack aptitude and quickness will be separated from the others and placed'under experienced drill masters. SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 11 17. When the execution of a movement is improperly begun and the instructor wishes to begin it anew for the purpose of correcting it, he commands : jIs you were, at which the movement ceases and the former position is resumed. INDIVIDUAL INSTRUCTION Without ARMS. 18. For this instruction a few recruits, usually not exceeding four, are placed in a single rank, facing to the front, and about six inches apart, arranged accord- ing to height, the tallest man on the right. 19. To teach the recruits how to assemble, the in- structor requires them to close the left hand and place the knuckles against the waist, above the hip, wrist straight, back of the hand to the front; he then places them on the same line so that the right arm of each man rests lightly against the left elbow of the man next on his right, and then directs the left hands to be replaced by the side. The men thus find themselves with an interval that allows for a free movement of the arms. 20. When the recruits have learned how to take their places, they are required to assemble without assistance. The instructor commands : fall in. They assemble rapidly, as above prescribed, at atten- tion, each man dropping the left hand as soon as the man next on his left has his interval. Position of the Soldier, or Attention. 21. Heels on the same line, and as near each other as the conformation of the man permits. Feet turned out equally and forming with each other an angle of about sixty degrees. Knees straight, without stiffness. Body erect on the hips, inclining a little forward ; shoulders square and falling equally. J2 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. Arms and hands hanging naturally, backs of the hands outward ; little fingers opposite the seams of the trou- sers ; elbows near the body. Head erect and square to the front; chin slightly drawn in, without constraint ; eyes straight to the front. The Rests. 22. Being at a halt, to rest the men : fall out ; or, «EST, or AT EASE. At the command fall out, the men may leave the ranks but will remain in the immediate vicinity. At the command fall in, they resume their former places. At the command rest, the men keep one heel in place, but are not required to preserve silence nor immobility. At the command af ease, the men keep one heel in place and preserve silence, but not immobility. 23. To resume the attention : 1. Squad, 2. atten- tion. The men take the position of the soldier and fix their attention. 24. 1. Parade, 2. rest. Carry the right foot six inches straight to the rear, left knee slightly bent ; clasp the hands in front of the center of the body, left hand uppermost, left thumb clasped by thumb and forefinger of right hand ; pre- serve silence and steadiness of position. To resume the position of the soldier : 1. Squad, 2, ATTENTION. To Dismiss the Squad. 25. Being in line at a halt : dismissed. Eyes Right or Left. 26. 1. Eyes, 2. right (or left), 3. front. At the command right, turn the head gently so as to SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER 13 bring the left eye in line with the center of the body, eyes fixed on the line of eyes of the men in, or supposed to be in the same rank. At the command front, turn the head and eyes to the front. The instructor sees that the movement does not de- range the squareness of the shoulders. Facings. 27. To the right or left : 1. Right (or Left), 2. face. Raise slightly the right heel and left toe and face to the right, turning on the left heel, assisted by a slight pressure on the ball of the right foot ; replace the right foot. The facings to the left are also executed upon the left heel. 28. To the rear. 1. About, 2. face. Raise slightly the left heel and right toe, face to the rear, turning to the right on the right heel and the ball of the left foot; replace the left foot beside the right. Salute with the Hand. 29. 1. Right (or Left) Hand, 2. salute. Raise the right hand smartly till the forefinger touches the lower part of the head-dress above the right eye, thumb and fingers extended and joined, palm to the left, forearm inclined at about forty- five degrees, hand and wrist straight. (TWO.) (Par. 48.) Drop the arm quietly by the side. (See Par. 485.) If uncovered, the forefinger touches the forehead above the eye. 1, Par. 29. 14 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. SETTING UP EXERCISES. 30. In order to retain a proper set-up and to keep the muscles supple, all soldiers in garrison should be frequently practiced in the following exercises : The arm, hand, trunk, leg and foot exercises should be alternated, the drill interrupted by frequent rests and varied by instruction in the facings, marchings, etc. While exercising one part of the body, care should be taken that the other parts remain quiet, as far as the conformation of the body will allow. At the command halt, given at any time, the exercise ceases, and the position of the soldier is resumed. The recruits being in single rank (Par. 30), the instruc- tor will place them three paces apart. First Exercise. 1. Arm, 2. exercise, 3. head, 4. up, 5, down, 6. raise. At the command exercise, raise the arms laterally un- til horizontal, palms upward. head: Raise the arms in a circular direction over the head, tips of fingers touching top of cap over the forehead, backs of fingers in contact their full length, thumbs pointing to the rear, elbows pressed back, up : Extend the arms up- ward their full length, palms touching, down: Force them obliquely back, and gradually let them fall by the sides. RAISE : Raise the arms laterally as prescribed for the second command. Continue by repeating, head^ up, down, raise. Second Exercise. 1. Arm, 2. exercise, 3. front, 4. rear. At the command exercise, raise the arms laterally, as in First Exercise, front : Swing the arms, extended SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER, 15 horizontally to the front, palms touching, heels on the ground, rear : Swing the arms extended well to the rear, inclining them slightly downward, .raising the body upon the toes. Continue by repeating, front, rear, till the men, if possible, are able to touch the hands be- hind the back. Third Exercise. 1. Arm, 2. exercise, 3. circle. At the command exercise, raise the arms laterally, as in first Exercise, circle : Slowly describe a small cir- cle, with each arm upward and backward, from front to rear, the arms not passing in front of the line of the breast. Continue by repeating circle. Fourth Exercise. 1. Arm, 2. exercise, 3. shoulder, 4. front, 5. rear. At the command exitrcise, raise the arms laterally, as in First Exercise, shoulder : Place the tips of fingers lightly on top of the shoulders, keeping upper arm hori- zontal. front ; Force the elbows to the front. rear : Force the elbows back as far as possible. Continue by repeating /ron^, rear. Fifth Exercise. 1. Hand, 2. exercise, 3. close, 4. open. At the command exercise, raise the arms laterally, as in First Exercise, close : Close the hands with force. open : Open the hands quickly, spreading the fingers and thumbs apart as much as possible. Continue by repeating close, open. Sixth Exercise. 1. Forearms vertical, i. raise, 3. up, 4. down. At the command raise, raise the forearms until nearly vertical, fingers extended and joined, palms toward 16 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. each other, up : Thrust upward with force, extending the arms to their full length, down : Force the arms obliquely back, and gradually let them fall by the sides. Continue by repeating raise, up, down. Seventh Exercise. 1. Forearms horizontal, 2. raise, 3. front, 4. rear. At the command raise, raise the forearms to the front, until horizontal, elbows forced back, hands tight- ly closed, backs down, front : Thrust the arms forci- bly to the front, turning the backs of the hands up, arms horizontal, rear : Bring the arms back quickly to the first position, forcing elbows and shoulders to the rear. Continue by repeating /ron^, rear\ Eighth Exercise. 1. Trunk, 2. exercise, 3. down, 4. back. At the command exercise, raise the hands and place them on the hips, fingers to the rear, thumbs to the front, elbows pressed back, down : Bend the trunk forward at the hips as far as possible, back : Raise and bend the trunk to the rear as far as possible. Exe- cute both motions slowly, without bending the knees. Continue by repeating down, hack. Ninth Exercise. 1. Trunk, 2. exercise, 3. right, 4. left, At the command exercise, place the hands on the hips, as in Eighth Exercise, right : Bend the trunk to the right, without twisting it or raising either heeL LEFT : Bend the trunk similarly to the left. Execute both motions slowly. Continue by repeating right, left. Tenth Exercise. 1. Trunk, 2. exercise, 3. circle right (or left). At the command exercise, place the hands on the hips. SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 17 as in Eighth Exercise, circle right: Bend the trunk to the right as in Ninth Exercise ; turn the trunk to the rear and bend to the rear, as in Eighth Exercise ; turn the trunk to the left and bend to the left, as in Ninth Exercise ; turn the trunk to the front and bend forward, as in Eighth Exercise. Continue by repeating eircle right. Eleventh Exercise. 1. Arms vertical, palms to the front, 2. raise, 3. down, 4. UP. At the command raise, raise the arms from the sides, extended to their full length, till the hands meet above the head, palms to the front, fingers pointed upward, thumbs locked, right thumb in front, shoulders pressed back. DOWN : Bend over till the hands, if possible, touch the ground. Keeping arms and knees straight, up : Straighten the body and swing the arms, extended to the vertical position. Continue by reneating down, up. Twelfth Exercise. 1. Arms forivard, palms down, 2. raise, 3. down, 4, UP. At the command raise, raise the arms to the front, extended to their full length, till the hands are in front of and at the height of the shoulders, palms down, fin- gers extended and joined, thumbs under forefingers. DOWN : Bend the trunk forward at the hips as far as possible, and swing the arms backward, knees and arms straight, u P : Straighten the trunk and swing the arms to the forward position. Continue by repeating downy {up. Thirteenth Exercise. 1. Leg, 2. exercise, 3. Half bend, 4:. down, 5. up. At the command exercise, place the hands on the hips as in Eighth Exercise, down : Lower the body. 18 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. separating the knees and bending them as much as pos- sible, heels on the ground, head and trunk erect, up : Raise the body, straightening and closing the knees. Continue by repeating dowUf up. Fourteenth Exercise. 1. Leg, 2. exercise, 3. Full bend, 4. down, 5. up. At the command exercise, place the hands on the hips as in Eighth Exercise, down : Lower the body, sepa- rating the knees and bending them as much as possible, head and trunk erect, heels raised, weight of body resting on the balls of the feet, up : Raise the body, straightening and closing the knees and lower the heels to the ground. Continue by repeating down, up. Fifteenth Exercise. 1. Leg, 2. exercise, 3. Left (or right), 4:. forward, 5. REAR, or 5. GROUND. At the command exei tise, place the hands on the hips as in the Eighth Exercise, forward : Move the left leg to the front, knee straight, so as to advance the foot about fifteen inches, toe turned out, sole nearly hori- zontal, body balanced on right foot, rear : Move the leg to the rear, knee straight, toe on a line with the right heel, sole nearly horizontal. Continue by repeat- ing forward, rear. When the recruit has learned to balance himself, the command /oTOard is followed by ground. Throw the weight of the body forward by rising- on the ball of the right foot, advance and plant the left, left heel thirty inches from the right, and advance the right leg quickly to the position of forward. Continue by re-| peating ground when the right and left legs are alterJ nately in the position of forward. Sixteenth Exercise. 1. Leg, 2. exercise, 3. up. At the command exercise, place the hands on the hips SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIEk. 19 as in Eighth Exercise, up : Raise the left leg to the front, bending and elevating the knee as much as pos- sible, leg from knee to instep vertical, toe depressed. UP : Replace the left foot and raise the right leg as pre- scribed for the left. Execute slowly at first, then gradually increase to the cadence of double time. Continue by repeating up when the right and left legs are alternately in position. Sevente\.nth Exercise. 1. Foot, 2. EXERCISE, 3. UP, 4. DOWN. At the command exercise, place the hands on the hips as in Eighth Exercise. UP: Raise the body upon the toes, knees straight, heels together, down : Lower the heels slowly to the ground. Continue by repeating' up, down. As soon as the exercises are well understood, they may be executed without repeating the commands. For this purpose the instructor gives the commands as prescribed, then adds : Continue the exercise, upon which the motions to be repeated are continuously exe- cuted until the command halt. Whenever there is a regular system of g; mnastic in- struction it may replace the setting up exercises for well trained soldiers. 20 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. THE STEPS. Quick Time. 31. The length of the full step in quick time is thirty inches measured from heel to heel, and the cadence is at the rate of one hundred and twenty steps per minute. 32. The recruits being confirmed in the position of the soldier, the instructor places himself eight or ten paces in front of them, and facing toward them executes the step slowly, at the same time explaining the princi- ples ; he then commands ; 1. Forward, 2. march. At the command forward, throw the weight of the body upon the right leg without bending the left knee. At the command march, move the left leg smartly, but without jerk, carry the foot straight forward 30 inches from the right, measuring from heel to heel, sole near the ground, knee straight and slightly turned out ; at the same time throw the weight of the body forward, and plant the foot without shock, weight of body rest- ing upon it ; next, in like manner, advance the right foo^, and plant it as above ; continue the march, keep- ing the face to the front. The instructor indicates from time to time the cadence of the step by calling one, two. three, four ; or, left, right, the instant the left and right foot, respectively, should be planted. The cadence is at first given slowly, and gradually increased to that of quick time. 33. To arrest the march : 1. Squad, 2. halt. At the command halt, giyen as either foot is coming to the ground, the foot in rear is brought up and planted without shock by the side of the other. Double Time. 34. The length of the full step in double time is 36 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 21 inches ; the cadence is at the rate of 180 steps per minute. 35. To march in double time : 1. Forward, 2. Double time, 3. march. At the command forward, throw the weight of the body on the right leg ; at the command double time, raise the hands until the forearms are horizontal, fingers closed, nails toward the body, elbows to the rear. At the command march, carry forward the left foot, leg slightly bent, knee somewhat raised, and plant the foot 36 inches from the right ; then execute the same motion with the right foot; continue this alternate movement of the feet, throwing the weight of the body forward and allowing a natural swinging motion to the arms. The recruits are also exercised in running, the principles being the same as for double time. When marching in double time e nd in running, the men breathe as much as possible through the nose, keeping the mouth closed. To Mark Time. 36. Being in march : 1. Mark Time, 2. march. At the command march, given as either foot is com- ing to the ground, continue the cadence and make a semblance of marching’, without gaining ground, by alternately advancing each foot about half its length, and bringing it back on a line with the other. To resume the full step : 1. Forward, 2. march. Short Step. 37. Being in march : 1. Short Step, 2. march. Take steps of fifteen inches. The full step is resumed at the commands ; 1. Forward, 2. march. The length of the short step in double time is eighteen inches. 22 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. S/cfe Step. 38. Being at a halt : 1. Right (or Left) Step^ 2. march. Carry the right foot twelve inches to the right, keep- ing knees straight and shoulders square to the front; as soon as the right foot is planted, bring the left foot to the side of it, and continue the movement, observing the cadence for each foot, as explained for quick time. The side step is not executed in double time. Back Step. 39. Being at a halt: 1. Backward^ 2. march. Step back with the left foot fifteen inches straight to the rear, measuring from heel to heel, then with the right, and so on, the feet alternating. At the command halt, bring back the foot in front to the side of the one in rear. The back step is used for short distances only and is not executed in double time. 40. The short step, side step and hack step may be executed from mark time and conversely. Change Step. 41. Being in march : 1. Change step, 2. march. At the command march, given as the right foot come« to the ground, the left foot is advanced and planted ; the toe of the right is then advanced near the heel of the left, the recruit again stepping off with the left. The change on the right foot is similarly executed, the command march being given as the left foot strikes the ground. Covering and Marching on Points. 42. The instructor selects two points on the ground and requires the recruits, in succession, to place them- selves so that the prolongation of the straight line through these points shall pass between their heels. SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 23 The instructor palaces himself in the rear of each re- cruit, points out the faults of his position, and causes him to cover accurately. When the recruits are able to cover the points, quickly and accurately, they are required, after covering, to march upon the points in quick and double time. The instructor remaining in rear of the recruit, observes his march ; when halted, the recruit corrects his covering, if necessary ; at the command fall out, he steps to one side. The other recruits are halted near the same point, and when all have arrived the instructor, selecting new points, continues the exercise. Two recruits should also be established by the instruc- tor, one covering the other, and the others required to cover them at considerable distances apart ; the recruits should then be faced about and the exercise repeated in the new direction. It should be demonstrated to the recruits that they cannot march in a straight line without selecting two points in the desired direction and keeping them cov- ered while advancing. 43. A distant and conspicuous landmark will next be selected as a point of direction ; the recruit will be re- quired to choose two intermediate points on the ground in line with the point of direction and to march upon it by covering these points, new points being selected as he advances. .INDIVIDUAL INSTRUCTION with ARMS. 44. The recruit should, as soon as possible, be taught the use of his rifle, its care and preservation. When fair progress has been made in the Individual Instruction without Arms, the recruit will be taught the manual of arms ; instruction without arms and that with arms alternating. 24 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. Part of each drill with arms should be devoted to marching. 45. The manual of arms is explained for double rank, but for the instruction of recruits it is first executed in single rank ; the instruction is given as herein pre- scribed, substituting the word ma?i for^Ze in the com- mands and explanations, and omitting reference to the rear rank. At the command /aZZ m, the recruits, usually not ex- ceeding* four, assemble (Par. 20), pieces at order arms. 46. To prevent accidents, the chambers will be opened (Par. 83), whenever the squad is first formed, and again just before being* dismissed. This rule is general. 47. The cadence of the motionsis thatof quick time; the recruits will at first be required to give their whole attention to the details of the motions, the cadence being gradually acquired as they becr'me accustomed to hand- ling their arms. The instructor will, at first, cause the men to execute the movements by themselves, without command, un- til they understand the details ; after this he will require them to execute the movements together at command. The movements relative to the cartridge fixing and unfixing bayonet, adjusting sight, breaking and form- ing stack, are executed with promptness and regularity, but not in cadence^ 48. Being at a halt, the movements are, for the pur- pose of instruction, divided into motions and executed in detail ; in this case the command of execution deter- mines the prompt execution of the first motipn and the commands, two, three, etc., that of the other mo- tions. To execute movements in detail, the instructor first cautions : By the numbers, all movements divided into motions are then executed as above explained until he cautions : Without the numbers, or commands move- ments other than those in the manual of arms. SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 25 MANUAL OF ARMS. General Rules. 49. 1st. In resuming* the carry from any position in the manual, the motion next to the last concludes with the left hand as high as the hollow of the right shoulder, fingers extended and joined, thumb close to forefinger, back of the hand to the front, elbow close to the body, right hand embracing the guard with thumb and forefinger ; the last motion consists in dropping the left hand by the side. 2d. In all positions of the left hand at the balance (center of gravity, bayonet unfixed), the thumb is ex- tended along the stock, except at the port amd charge bayonet. Bd. In all positions of the piece in front of the center of the body, the barrel is to the rear and vertical. 4th. The piece is habitually carried with the hammer at the safety notch. 50. The recruit being in the position of the soldier, the in- structor will first cause him to place his piece carefully in the following positions : — Position of Order Arms. The butt rests evenly on the ground, arms hanging natur- ally, elbows near the body, right hand holding the piece between the thumb and fingers, first two fingers in front, the others in rear and opposite the seam of the trousers ; this will incline PI. 2, Par. 50. the barrel forward and the toe pi. 3 , Par. 50. 26 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. of the piece will be about one inch to the right and two inches to the rear of the right toe. Position of Carry Arms, The piece is in the right hand, thumb and forefinger embracing the guard, the re- I maining fingers closed together and grasp- \ ing the stock just under the hammer, vrhich Irests on the little finger ; barrel nearly ver- Jtical and resting against the shoulder, /guard to the front; arm hanging nearly at its full length, near the body. The instructor sees that the piece at the carry is neither too high nor too low ; if too high the piece will be unsteady ; if too low, the right arm will become fatigued and the shoulder will be drawn down. On first bearing arms the recruits are liable to derange their positions by lowering a shoulder or hif. The instructor endeav- Pl. 4, Par. 50. ors to correct these faults. 51. Being at the order ; 1. Carry, 2. arms. Raise the piece vertically with the right hand, grasp it at the same time with the left, above the right, resume the carry, (two.) Drop the left hand. 52. Being at the carry ; 1. Order, 2. arms. Advance the piece, grasp it with the left hand, fore- arm horizontal, let go with right hand ; lower the piece quickly with the left, regrasp it with the right above the balance, hand near the thigh, butt about three inches from the ground, left hand steadying the piece near the right, fingers extended and joined, fore- arm and wrist straight and inclined downward, (two.) Lower the piece gently to the ground with the right hand, drop the left by the side and take the position of order arms. SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 27 53. Being at the carry: 1. Present^ 2. arms. Carry the piece with the right hand, in front of the center of the body, at the same time grasp it with the left hand at the bal- ance, forearm horizontal and resting against the body, (two.) Grasp the small of the s^ock with the right hand below and against the guard. 1. Carry, 2. arms. Resume the carry, (two.) Drop the left hand. 54. Being at the carry or order ; 1. Right shoulder, 2. arms. Raise the piece vertically with the right hand, grasp it with the left at the balance, and raise this hand till it is at the height of the chin ; at the same time embrace the butt with the right hand, toe be- tween the first two fingers, the other fingers under the plate, barrel same inclination to the front as at the order, (two.) Raise the piece and place it on the right shoulder, lock plate up, muz- zle elevated and inclined to the left, so that, viewed from the front, the line of the stock, from toe to guard, shall appear nearly parallel to the row of buttons ; slip the left hand down to the lock plate. (THREE.) Drop the left hand by the side. 55. Being at the right shoulder: 1. Carry, 2. ARMS. Carry the butt slightly to the left and lower the piece with the right hand ; grasp it with the left at the balance, hand at the height of chin, barrel to the rear, and PI. 5, Par. 53. 28 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. at the same inclination to the front as at the order, (TWO.) Resume the carry, (three.) Drop the left hand. 56. Being at the right shoulder : 1. Order, 2. arms. Take the first position of carry from right shoulder. (two.) Lower the piece with the left hand at the same time regrasping it with the right above the balance, and take the first position of order from carry, (three.) Take the position of order arms. 57. Being at the carry or order : 1. Port, 2. arms. Raise and throw the piece diagonally across the body, lockplate to the front; grasp it smartly with both hands, the right, palm down at the small of stock ; the left, palm up, at the balance, thumb clasping piece ; barrel sloping to the left and crossing opposite the middle of left shoulder ; right forearm horizontal ; forearms and piece near the body. 1. Carry, 2. arms. Resurr e the carry, (two.) Drop the left hand. Being at the port : 1. Order, 2. arms. Take the second and third positions of order from right shoulder. 58. Being at the right shoulder : 1. Port, 2. ARMS. Take the first position of carry from right shoulder, (two.) Take the position of port arms. 1. Right shoulder, 2. arms. Take the second and third positions of right shoulder from the carry. The Rests. 59. Fall out. Rest and At ease, are executed as with- out arms. PI. 7, Par. 57 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER- 29 On resuming the attention, take the p'^ition of order arms. 60. Being at the order : 1. Parade, 2. REST. Carry the right foot six inches straight to the rear, left knee slightly bent, carry the muzzle in front of the center of the body, barrel to the left ; grasp the piece with the left hand just above and with the right at the upper band. 1. Squad, 2. attention. Resume the order, the left hand quitting the piece opposite the right breast. fl. To dismiss the squad, with arms : U Port, 2. ARMS, 3. DISMISSED. 62. Being at the carry : 1. Fix, 2. BAYONET. Grasp the piece with the left hand, forearm horizontal ; carry it to the left side, butt p, q p aa striking the ground on a line • > ar. . with the heels, piece inclined to the front,, left wrist pressing bayonet scabbard against the thigh ; carry right hand to the shank of the bayonet; draw the bayonet and fix it on the barrel, glancing at the muzzle ; drop the right hand by the side. 1. Carry, 2. arms. Raise the piece with the left hand and resume the carry, (two.) Drop the left hand. 63. Being at the carry : 1. Unfix, 2. BAYONET. PI g p^j. Q 2 Carry the piece to the left side as in fix bayonet, and place the forefinger of the right hand against the clasp of the bayonet; unclasp the bayonet ; grasp it by the shank, wrest it from the bar- 30 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. rel ; glancing at the scabbard, return the bayonet, and drop the right hand by the side. The carry arms is executed as from fix bayonet. Bayonets are fixed and unfixed from the order, by the same commands as from the carry, the piece being shift- ed from the right to the left side. To return to the carry, or order; 1. Carry, 2. arms; or, 1. Order, 2. arms. In fixing and unfixing bayonet from the order, and in returning to the order, the hands change in front of the center of the body, the left hand grasping the piece above the right. 64. Being at the port : 1. Unfix, 2. bayonet. As from the carry, quitting the piece with the right hand and lowering it with the left. 65. The rod bayonet is fixed and unfixed from the order only without moving the piece, grasp the rough- ened end of the bayonet with the thumb and forefinger of the left hand, slip the right hand to the spring but- ton, thumb and forefinger resting on the roughened ends ; press the but- ton, draw out (or push in), the bayo- net, at the same time releasing the pressure on the spring, which will automatically catch the bayonet ; resume the position of order arms. 66. If marching, the bayonet is fixed and unfixed in the most expeditious and convenient manner. 67. Being at the carry : 1. Charge^ 2. BAYONET. Half face to the right, carrying the heel six inches to the rear and three Pi. 10, Par. 67. inches to the right of the left, turn- SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIEft. 31 ing the toes of both feet slightly inward ; at the same time drop the piece into the left hand at the balance, thumb clasping piece, elbow against the body, point of bayonet at the height of the chin, right hand grasping small of stock and supporting it firmly against the right hip, body inclining slightly forward. 1. Carry, 3. arms. Eesume the carry, at the same time racing to me front, (two.) Drop the left hand. 68. Being at the order ; 1. Charge, 2. bayonet. Eaise the piece with the right hand, grasp it with the left at the balance, and take the position of charge bayonet. 1. Order, 2. arms. Let go the piece with the right hand and lower it with the left to the first position of order from carry, at the same time facing to the front, (two.) Eesume the order. Positions Kneeling and Lying Down, 69. The movements of kneeling, lying down and rising are first taugbt with- out arms ; they are exe- cuted as with arms, except that in the position kneel- ing the right hand rests on the right thigh, and in moving to and from the Pl. ii, Par. 69. lying position the right hand is placed on the ground ; in the position lying down the forearms are against each other on the ground, left arm in front. 70. At the command Jcneel, lie down or rise, the hammer will first be lowered to tbe safety notch, if not already there. This rule is aeneral. 71. Being at the order: kneel. Each front rank man half faces to the right, carrying SCHOOL OF THE SOLOIER. ^^2 PI. 12, Par. 71. right foot so that the toe shall be about ten inches to the rear and ten ‘ inches to the left of left heel; kneel on right knee, bending the left, left toe slightly inclined to the right, right leg pointing directly to the right ; weight of body resting Oii right heel ; place left forearm across left thigh, hand hanging naturally ; the piece remains in the position of order arms, right hand grasping it above the balance. This is the x^osition of order kneeling. Each rear rank man steps off ob- liquely to the right with the left foot, planting the toe opposite the middle of the interval to his right and in line with the left heel of his front rank man, at the same time placing the butt of his piece against his left toe ; he then kneels as prescribed for the front rank. 72. Being at the order kneeling : rise. Kise and take the position of order arms ; the rear rank men covering their file leaders. 73. Being at the order kneeling: lie DOWN. Each front rank man places the right knee against the left heel, (two.) Draw back the left foot and place the knee on the ground ; place the left hand well forward on the ground and lie flat on the belly, thus in- clining the body about thirty-five degrees to the right ; the piece is lowered at the same time with the right hand, toe resting on the ground, barrel up, left hand at the bal- Pl. 13. Par. SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 33 ance, left elbow on the ground, right hand at the small of the stock, opposite the neck. This is the pasition lying down. The rear rank men move back one pace and lie down as prescribed for the front rank. 74. Being in position lying down: rise. Eeverse the second motion of lie down. (Par. 73.) (two.) Eise as from the order kneeling. (Par. 72.) 75. Being at the order standing : lie down. Eact^ front rank man takes the position of order kneeling, except that the right knee is placed against the left heel, (two.) Execute the second motion of lie down, (Par. 73.) The rear rank men step back one pace and lie down as prescribed for the front rank. 76. Being in position lying down : kneel. Execute the first motion of rise (Par. 74) and take the po- sition of order kneeling. To Load, 77. Being in line, standing at the carry or order : load. Each rear rank man steps off obliquely to the right with the left foot, planting the toe opposite the middle of the inter- val to his right and in line with the left heel of his front rank man ; the front rank men half face to the right ; both ranks then carry the right heel six inches to the rear and three inches to the right of the left heel, turning the toes of both feet slightly inward, at the same time raise the piece with the right hand, drop it into the left at the balance, muzzle at PI. 14, Par. 77. the height of the chin, left elbow against the body, small of the stock at the waist ; place the 34 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. right thumb on the head of the hammer, forefinger on the trigger, the other fingers against the small of the stock, and half cock the piece, lower the muzzle, barrel sloping downward at an angle of about twenty- five degrees, at the same time open chamber ; look toward the chamber, remove the cartridge shell if necessary; take a cartridge between the thumb and first two fingers, place it in the bore, pressing it home with the thumb ; close chamber with the right thumb, cast the eyes to the front, carry the right hand* to the small of the stock and raise the muzzle to the height of the chin. The last position is the position of locid. 78. If kneeling, the left forearm rests across the left thigh. If lying down the left hand steadies the piece, ^e resting on the ground. 79. Boxes are closed after executing the ordei or y)rder kneeling. 80. Being in the position of load: 1. Squad, 2. ready. Cock the piece with the right thumb, and return the thumb to the small of the stock. 81. The piece may be brought to a ready from any position by the same commands ; in executing it, first take the position of load. (Pars. 77 and 78.) 82. Being in position of load or ready : 1 . Order, 2, A R M s. Lower the hammer to the safety notch, and take the order as from charge bayonet ; the rear rank men then step back and cover their file leaders. If kneeling, lower the hammer to the safety notch and take the order kneeling. 83. To ascertain if any of the pieces are loaded, the instructor causes them to be brought to the port and commands: 1. Open, 2. chamber. Half cock the piece, open chamber, and return the hand to the small of the stock. Each man, as soon as his piece is examined, closes chamber with the right thumb, lowers the hammer to the safety notch, and returns the hand to the small of SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 85 the stock. If the instructor does not examine the pieces, he commands : 1. Close, 2. chamber ; at which cham- bers are closed, hammers lowered to safety notch and the port resumed. 84. Beinff in any position, pieces loaded : 1. Draw, 2. CARTRIDGE. Executed as prescribed for loading (Pars. 77 and 78), except that the cartridge is withdrawn and returned to the box or belt, and the hammer lowered to the safety notch. To Aim and Fire. 85. Being at the ready: AIM. Raise the piece with both hands and support the butt firmly against the hollow of the right shoulder, right thumb extended along the stock, barrel horizontal ; slip the left hand back to the guard, little finger resting against the bottom of the thumb piece of the cam latch; left elbow resting against the body and as far to the right as it can be placed with ease, right elbow as high as the shoulder; incline the head slightly forward and a little to the right, cheek resting against the stock, left eye closed, right eye looking through the notch of rear sight, so as to perceive the top of the front sight; second joint of forefinger resting lightly against the front of the trigger, but not pressing it. Each rear rank man aims through the interval at the right of his file leader, and inclines slightly forward, to advance the muzzle of his piece beyond the front rank. When lying down in double rank, the rear rank men do not aim nor fire. PL 15, Par. 85. 36 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 86. FIRE. Press the finger against the trigger; fire without de- ranging the aim and without lowering or turning the head. PI. 16, Par. 90. 87. LOAD. Lower the piece and load. (Par. 77.) 88. The exercise is con- tinued by the commands: Squad, 2. ready, 3. aim, 4. fire, LOAD. 89. To accustom the recruits in the position of aim, to wait for the com- mand 1. Recover, 2. arms. At the command recover, withdraw the finger from the trigger; at the command arms, take the position of ready. 90. In aim- kneeling, X left elbow ^**“***^^rests upon the left knee, PI. 17, Par. 90. point of elbow in front of knee cap. In aiming lying down, raise the piece with both hands and slip it through the left to the lock plate ; rest on both elbows and press the butt firmly against the right shoulder ; in recovering arms, the piece is held as in load. 91. When the recruits are thoroughly instructed in the adjustments of the sight, and the principles of aim- ing as laid down in the Firing Regulations for Small Arms, they will be required to aim, using the different lines of sight. For this purpose the instructor com- mands : l^At (so mamj) yards, 2. Squad, 3. ready, 4. aim. SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 37 At the first command, both ranks take the position for loading and adjust the sight with the right hand ; then raise the muzzle to the height of the chin. The instructor assures himself by careful inspection that each man sets his sight at the range indicated ; when satisfied that the subject is fully comprehended, he will exercise the men in aiming at a designated ob- ject. For this purpose he commands 1. At that tree {ov At ), 2. At (so many) yards, 3. Squad, 4. READY, 5. AIM. At the first command, fix the eyes on the object in- dicated ; at the second command, adjust the sight and immediately fix the eyes upon the object again. 92. In order not to mislead the men, the distance an- nounced in the command should be, as nearly as possi- ble, the true distance of the objective. By changing the objective, all the different lines of sight may be used ; the men should be practiced in aiming at objects above and below them. 93. The recruits are at first taught to load and fire without using cartridges ; after a few lessons, they should use dummy cart- ridges, and when well instructed the drill may close with a few rounds of blank cartridges. 94. No cartridges will be used, except when indicated in the first command, thus : 1. With dummy (blank or halt) cartridges, 2. LOAD. This rule is general. Rifle Salute. 95. Being at the carry ; 1. Rifle, 2. SALUTE. Carry the left hand smartly to the hollow of the right shoulder, forearm horizontal, palm of the hand down, thumb and fingers ^ extended and joined, forefinger against the __ piece, (two.) Drop the left hand by the side. pi. is, Par. 95 38 SCHOOL '/F THE SOLDIER. Inspection of Cartridge Boxes and Arms. 96. Being at the order : 1. Open, 2. boxes. Steady the piece by grasping it with the left hand near the muzzle, forearm horizontal ; open the box with the right hand and resume the order. In a similar manner each man, as his box is inspected, closes it and resumes the order. 97. Being at the order : 1. Inspection, 2. arms. At the command arms, bayonets are fixed and cart- ridge boxes opened. Each man, as the inspector approaches him, executes port arms and ojyen chamber. The inspector takes the piece (the man dropping the hands by the sides), inspects and hands it back to the man, who receives it with the left hand at the balance, resumes the port, closes chamber, brings the hammer to the safety notch,unfixes bayonet and returns to the order. With the ramrod bayonet, the piece is brought to the order and the bayonet is then unfixed. As the inspector returns the piece, the next man executes inspection arms, and so on through the squad. Should the piece be inspected without handling, the man closes chamber, brings the hammer to the safety notch, unfixes bayonet and returns to the order, when the inspector passes to the next man who immediately executes inspection arms. The inspection of arms begins on the right, after which the inspector may pass in rear and inspect boxes from left to right. Boxes are closed as soon as inspected. To Un sling and S/ing Knapsacks. 98. Arms being stacked : 1. Unsling, 2. knapsack. At the command unsling, the front rank moves back one step (Par. 39) to clear the stacks, and faces about; SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 39 the rear rank at the same time moves back three steps; all the men unhook the right hand strap. At the command Jcnapsack, remove the knapsacks, the four men whose pieces are in the same stack lean- ing their knapsacks, flaps outward, one against another in the form of a square. The knapsacks of the guides and file closers are placed each against the nearest pile. 1. Sling, 2. knapsack. At the command sling, each man takes his knapsack and, standing erect, holds it by the straps, the flap next to the knees ; at the command knapsack, places the knapsack on the back, the front rank facing about and stepping up to the stacks, the rear rank closing to fac- ing distance. Note. — The word knapsack will be used in tfie com- mands for all patterns of packs. STACK ARMS. 99. Stacks will not be made with the bayonet if the rifles have the stacking* swivel. 100. Three pieces only are used in making a stack ; pieces not so used are, in this connection, termed loose pieces. Preparatory to stacking arms, the squad must have counted fours (Par. 186), and must be in line at the order. With the Stacking Swivel. 101. 1. Stack, 2. ARMS. ' At the command stack, each even number of the front rank raises his piece with the right hand, grasps it with the left at the upper band, and rests the butt between his feet, barrel to the front, muzzle inclining* slightly to the front and opposite the center of the interval on his right, the thumb and forefinger raising the stacking swivel ; each even number of the rear rank then passes his piece, barrel to the rear, to his file leader, who grasps it between the bands with his right hand and 40 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. throws the butt twenty-eiglit indies in advance of h^s own and opposite the middle of the interval, the right hand slipping to the upper band, the thumb and fore- finger raising the stacking swivel, which he engages with that of his own piece ; each odd number of the front rank raises his piece with the right hand, barrel to the front, the left hand guiding the stacking swivel, which he holds near the stacking swivel of the other pieces. At the command arms, each odd number of the front rank engages the lower hook of his swivel with the free hook of the swivel of the even number of the rear rank; he then turns the barrel outward and downward, into the angle formed by the other two pieces, and rests the butt between his feet. The stacks being formea, the pieces of the odd numbers in the rear rank are passed to the even numbers in the front rank, who lay them on the stacks. The pieces of jthe guides and the file closers are laid on the stacks at the same time. ^ J The men having* quitted their pieces, take the position ! of the soldier. I The instructor may then rest or dismiss the squad, ' leaving the arms stacked. On assembling, the men take their places in rear of the stacks. 102. 1. Take, 2. arms. At the command take, the loose pieces are returned; ' each even number of the front rank then grasps his own piece with the left hand, the piece of his rear rank man with the right hand, grasping both between the bands ; each odd number of the front rank grasps his piece in the same way with the right hand. At the command arms, each odd number of the front rank disengages his own piece by turning it to the right; each even number of the front rank disengages his piece by turning it to the left ; the butts are then raised SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER, 41' from the ground, each even number of the front i*ank passes the piece of his rear rank man to him, and all resume the order With the Bayonet. 103. 1. Staclc, 2. ARMS. At the command stack, each even number of the front rank raises his piece with the right hand and grasps it with the left between the bands and holds the butt six inches above the space between his feet, barrel to the rear, muzzle inclining slightly to the front and opposite the center of the interval on his right ; each even num- ber of the rear rank then passes his piece, barrel to the right, to his file leader, who grasps it between the bands with his right hand and places the shank of the oayonet upon that of his own ; each odd number of the front rank raises his piece with the right hand, barrel to the front, and places the shank of his bayonet in the angle formed by the bayonets of the other two pieces ; the butts of all the pieces are about six inches from the ground. At the command arms, each even number of the front rank, with his right hand, passes the butt of the piece of his rear rank man twenty-eight inches in advance of his- own and opposite the middle of the interval, passing it between the butts of the other pieces ; the stack is then lowered, the front rank men resting the butts of their own pieces between their feet. The stacks being formed, the pieces of the odd num- bers of the rear rank are passed to the even numbers of the front rank, who lay them on the stacks. The pieces of the guides and file closers are laid on the stacks at the same time. The men having quitted their pieces take the posi- tion of the soldier. 104. 1. Take, 2. arms. At the command take, the loose pieces are returned ; 42 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. each even number of the front rank then grasps his own piece with the left hand, the piece of his rear rank man with the right hand, grasping both between the bands ; each odd number of the front rank grasps his own piece in the same way with the right hand. At the command arm,s, raise the butts from the ground and disengage the pieces; each even number of the front rank passes the piece of his rear rank man to him, and all resume the order. 105. Being in single rank, arms are stacked and taken on the same principles as in double rank ; at the pre- paratory command number three steps back and covers number two ; numbers two and three execute what has been explained for the even numbers of the front and rear rank respectively ; number three then resumes his place; number one uses his piece as explained for the odd number of the front rank. The piece of number four is passed as explained for the odd numbers of the rear rank. 106. The following positions of the piece are intended mainly for use in extended order and route marches. Whenever the commands for any of these positions are given, the piece will be shifted in the most convenient manner ; reducing the movements to regular motions and cadence is prohibited. 107. 1. Trail, 2. arms. The piece is grasped with the right hand, just above the balance, right arm slightly bent, barrel up, muzzle inclined slightly to the front. When it can be done without danger or inconven- ience to others, as on the firing line, the piece may be grasped at the balance and the muzzle lowered until the piece is horizontal. A similar position in the left hand may then be used. 108. 1. Left shoulder, 2. arms. The piece rests on the left shoulder, barrel up, muzzle elevated so as not to interfere with the men in rear, trig- ger guard in front of and near the shoulder, left hand SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 43 embracing the butt, heel between the first and second fingers, elbow down. 109. 1. Sling, 2. arms. The right arm is passed between the rifle and the sling which rests upon the shoulder, piece in rear of the shoulder and nearly vertical, muzzle up ; right hand steadying the piece. On route marches, the piece may be slung on the left shoulder. The gun sling should never be so tight- ly drawn that it cannot be readily adjusted. 110. 1. Secure, 2. arms. The piece is held in the right hand at the balance, barrel up, slop- ing downward and to the front; right hand supported against the front of the hip, upper arm against the stock. A corresponding position in the left hand may be used. 111. When the recruits are at first exercised in marching with arms, the instructor orders the pieces into position before putting the squad P3. 20, Par. 110. in march and before passing from quick to double time ; he also causes the recruits to be at quick time at the carry before ordering the halt. 112. When the marchings and manual of arms are 'horoughly understood, the following general rules 8 vern : ^"'t. If at the order, bring the piece to the right l^der at the preparatory command for marching in TLtime. 44 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 2d. If at the order or carry, bring the piece to the right shoulder at the command : Double time. 3d. A disengaged hand in double time is held as when without arms. 4th. If at the right shoulder, left shoulder, or trail, bring the piece to the order on halting ; the exe- cution of the order and halt commence at the same instant. 5th. When the facings, side step, back step, align- ments, open and close ranks, and loadings are executed from the order, raise the piece to the trail while in motion, and resume the order on halting. When this rule applies to other movements, it is therein stated. 113. In the battle exercises, or whenever circum- stances require, the regular positions of the manual of arms and the firings may be ordered without regard to the previous position of the piece ; such movements as are not in the manual will be executed without re- gard to motions or cadence. It is laid down as a prin- ciple that the effective use of the weapon is not to be impeded by the formalities of drill. THE SQUAD. 114. The movements are explained for double rank, with arms ; in the instruction of recruits, however, the movements are first executed in single rank, without arms ; the instruction is given as herein prescribed by substituting the word man iov file in the commands and explanations, and omitting reference to the rear rank and the position of the piece. 115. The recruits are divided into groups of about seven men, to represent squads, each under the coni- mand of a corporal, who is the instructor. (Par. 12.7 The object is to give the corporal the confidence^ifid Experience necessary to qualify him as .squad ence^acl d 1^^^ SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 45 while at the same time teaching the recruits the move- ments in close and extended order. The corporal, as squad leader, is posted as the left nan in the front rank. (See Par. 9.) The rear rank nan, who covers the corporal, steps into the front rank whenever the latter leaves his place ; this file remains blank until the corporal resumes his place in ranks. 116. When the guide is announced in the command, the man on the designated flank conducts the march, but in no other respect acts as guide. To accustom the recruits to their duties in all posi- tions their places will frequently be changed. 117. A double or single rank faced to a flank is called a column of files. (See, also. Par. 215.) 118. In line, the distance between ranks, from back to breast, is facing distance ; on rough ground, and when marching in double time, it is increased to 36 inches ; the rear rank clos es to facing distance upon halting. When the knapsack is worn, the distance is increased by the depth of the knapsack. To Size and Form the Squad. 119. Being in single rank at the order, the instructor faces the squad to the right, arranges the men*accord- ing to height, tallest man in front, and commands : 1. In two ranks form squads 2. march, 3. front. At the command march the first man faces to the left ; the second man places himself in the rear rank covering the first ; both place the left hand above the hip (Par. 19) ; the other men close in quick time, and form alternately in front and rear rank, as explained for the first two, each man facing to the left upon arriving at his proper place ; then dressing to the right. All the men having formed, the instructor com^ 46 • SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. mands : front. The men turn the head and eyes to the front and drop the left hand by the side. The squad having been sized, the men are cautioned to take the same relative positions, when the squad is formed thereafter. 120. To form the squad, the corporal places himself in front of where the center is to be formed, makes the signal for the assembly, or commands : fall in. The men assemble in their proper places in double rank ; arms at the order. Alignments. 121. The alignments are first taught by requiring the recruits to align themselves, man by man, upon two files established as a base. Being at the carry or order * 1. Two flies from the right (or left) three paces to tue front, 2. march, 3. NEXT, 4. FRONT. At the command march, the first two files on the right march three paces to the front, halt, exe- cute eyes right, and place the left hand above the hip (Par. 19); the instructor aligns them, sees that the rear rank men cover their file lead- ers, and then causes the remaining files to move up successively on this alignment, each by the com- mand n*ext. At the command next, the next file marches three paces to the front, each man shortening the last step so as to find himself about six inches in rear of the new align- ment, which must never be passed ; he then executes eyes right, places the left hand above the hip, and tak- ing steps of two or three inches, moves up, placing his arm lightly against the elbow of the man on his right, so that his eyes and shoulders shall be in line with those of the men on his right. The instructor sees that each man observes the principles of the alignment, and when the last file has SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 47 arrived on the line, verifies the alignment of both ranks from the right flank and orders up or back, such men as may be in rear or in advance of the line ; only the men designated move. At the command front, giv'en when the ranks are aligned, the men cast their eyes to the front and drop the left hand; all movement in the ranks must then cease. In dressing to the left, each man places himself so that his left elbow touches lightly the arm of the man on his left. 122. In the first drills, the basis of the alignment is established parallel to the front of the squad, and after- ward in oblique directions. In order to habituate the recruit to his interval in line, the left hand is placed above the hip in all align- ments in the School of the Soldier. 123. The recruits having learned to align them- selves, man by man, the instructor establishes the base files and aligns the squad by the commands : 1. Bight {ov left), 2. dress, 3. front. At the command dress, all the men except the base files, move forward and dress up to the line, as pre- viously explained. The rear rank men cover in file, at facing distance, and cast their eyes to the right. The instructor verifies the alignment and gives the command : Front, All the men then turn the head and eyes to the front and drop the left hand. 124. Alignments to the rear are executed on the same principles: 1. Bight (or left) backward, 2. dress, 3. front. The men step back, halt a little in rear of the line of the base files, and immediately dress up by steps of two or three inches. 125. To execute the alignments, using the side step, the instructor establishes the base files a few paces to the right or left of the squad and commands : 1. Bight (or left) step, 2. Bight (or left), 3. dress, 4. front. 48 SCHOOL OP THE SOLDIER. At the command dress, the men execute the side step, close toward the base files, and dress as already explained. 126. When the squad dresses quickly and well, tae guide alone is first established. In dressing, the first two or three files are accurately aligned as quickly as possible, to afford a base for the rest of the squad. MARCHINGS. To March in Line. 127. Being in line at a halt ; 1. Forward, 2. Guide {right or left), 3. march. The men step off, the guide marching straight to the front ; the rear rank men cover their file leaders and follow them at facing distance. The instructor sees that the men preserve the inter- val toward the side of the guide ; that they yield to pressure from that side and resist pressure from the opposite direction ; that by slightly shortening or lengthening the step, they gradually recover the align- ment, and by slightly opening out or closing in, they gradually recover the interval, if lost; that while habitually keeping the head to the front, they may occasionally glance toward the side of the guide to assure themselves of the alignment and interval, but that the head is turned as little as possible for this purpose. * To change the guide : Guide {left or right). 128. If the men lose step, the instructor commands : STEP. The men glance toward the side of the guide, retake the step and cast their eyes to the front. To March Backward. 129. Being at a halt: 1. Backward, 2. Guide {right or left), 3. march. SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 49 \ To March to the Rear. 130. Bein^ in march ; 1. To the Rear, 2. march, 3. Guide {right or left). At the command march, given as the right foot strikes the ground, advance and plant the left foot ; then turn on the balls of both feet, face to the right about and immediately step off with the left foot. If marching in double time, turn to the right about, taking four short steps in place, keeping the cadence, and then step off with the left foot. To March by the Flank, in Column of Files. 131. Being in line at a halt : 1. Right (or left), 2. FACE, 3. Forward, 4. march. If marching : 1. By the right (or left) flank, 2. march. At the command march, given as the right foot strikes the ground, advance and plant the left foot, then face to the right in marching and step off in the new direction with the right foot. In each file the front rank man is the guide ; the men cover in file and keep closed to facing distance. To halt the column of files : 1. Squad, 2. halt ; and to face it to the front ; 3. Left (or right), 4. face. Marching in Column of Files, to March in Line. 132. 1. By the right (or left) flank, 2. march, 3. Guide (right or left). To Change Direction in Column of Files. 133. Being in march : 1. Column right (or left) ; or, 1. Column half right (or half left), 2. march. The leading file wheels to the right, the pivot man shortening two or three steps and moving over a quar- ter, or an eighth of a circle, whose radius is about eighteen inches ; the other files follow the first and wheel on the same ground. 50 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. If at a halt : 1 . Forivard, 2. Column right (or left), 3. MARCH ; or, 2. Column half right (or half left), 3. MARCH. The Oblique March. 134. For the instruction of recruits, the squad being correctly aligned, the instructor will face the squad half rig:ht or half left, point out to the men their rela- tive positions and explain that these are to be main- tained in the oblique march. 135. Being in line at a halt, or marching : 1. Right (or left) oblique, 2. march. Each man half faces to the right, at the same time stepping off in the new direction. He preserves his relative position, keeping his shoulders parallel to those of the man next on his right, and so regulates his step as to make the head of this man conceal the heads of the other men in the rank ; the ranks remain parallel to their original front. The rear rank conforms to the foregoing, each man marching so as to cover his file leader upon resuming the original direction. At the command halt, the men halt, faced to the front. To resume the original direction : 1. Forward, 2. MARCH. The men half face to the left in marching and then move straight to the front. If marking time while obliquing, the oblique march is resumed by the commands : 1. Oblique. 2. march. The short step will not be used in the oblique march. 136. Id the oblique march, the guide is always with- out indication, on the side toward which the oblique is made. On resuming the direct march the guide is without indication on the side it was previous to the oblique. If the oblique be executed from a halt, the guide is announced on taking the direct march in line. These rules are general. SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 51 137. The column of files obliques by the same com- mands and means. To March in Double Time. 138. Being in line at a halt : 1. Forward, 2. Guide [right or left), 3. Double time, 4. march. To Pass from Quick to Double Time and the Reverse. 139. 1. Double time, 2. march. At the command march, given as the left foot strikes the ground, advance the right foot in quick time, and step off with the left foot in double time. To resume quick time ; 1. Quick time, 2. march. At the command march, given as either foot is com- ing to the ground, the squad resumes quick time. TURNINOS. To Turn and Halt. 140. Marching in line : 1. Squad right (or left), 2. MARCH, 3. FRONT. At the command march, the right file halts and the front rank man or pivot faces to the right ; the other files half face to the right in marching, and without changing the length or cadence of the step place them- selves successively upon the alignment established by the right file ; all dress to the right without command. The instructor verifies the alignment from the pivot flank and commands : front. The rear rank men conform to the movements of their file leaders. If at a halt, the movement is executed in the same manner ; if at the order and the movement is executed in quick time, the pieces are held at the trail while in motion. Squad half right (or half left) is executed in the same manner, except that the pivot makes a half face to the right. 52 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. To Turn and Advance. 141. Marching in line : 1. Right (or left) turn, 2. MARCH, 3. Forward, 4. march, 5. Guide {right ov left). At the second comniancl, the front rank man on the right, who is the guide, marches by the right flank, taking the short step without changing the cadence ; the other men half face to the right in marching, and moving by the shortest line successively place them- selves on the new line, when they take the short step. The rear rank men conform to the movements of their file leaders. When the last man has arrived on the new line, the fourth command is given, when all resume the full step. During the turn, the guide is without command on the pivot flank. The guide is announced on resuming the full step. If at a halt, the movement is similarly executed, and in quick time, unless the command double time be given. Right (or left) half turn is executed in the same man- ner, except that the guide makes a half face to the right. Should the command halt be given during the execu- tion of the movement, those men on the new line halt ; the others halt on arriving on the line ; all dress to the right without command. The instructor verifies the alignment from the pivot flank and commands : front. FIRINGS. 142. The post of the instructor is three paces in rear of the squad, but in actual firing he places himself where he can best make himself heard and at the same time observe the effect of the fire ; the objective should be in plain view and so designated as to be easily dis- tinguished by all. 143. The commands for firing are the same whether the squad be standing, kneeling or lying down. The SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 53 commands for kneeling or lying down precede the commands for firing. 144. At the preparatory command for firing, the squad being in line standing, the rear rank men close, as explained for loading (Par. 77) ; and the cartridge box if worn is slipped to the hip and opened ; it is closed and replaced after executing cease firing. Volley Firing. 145. The squad being in line fronting the object to be fired upon, pieces loaded : 1. Fire by squad, 2. At (such an object), 3. At (so many) yards, 4. Squad, 5. READY, 6. AIM, 7. FIRE, 8. LOAD. To fire another volley at the same objective with the same line of sight: 1. Squad, 2. ready, 3. aim, 4. FIRE, 5. LOAD. To fire another volley at the same objective but with a new line of sight : 1. At (so many) yards, 2. Squad, 3. ’ready, 4. AIM, 5. FIRE, 6. LOAD. To fire another volley at a new ob j ective and with a new line of sight : 1. At (such an object), 2. At (so many) yards, 3. Squad, 4. ready, 5. aim, 6. fire. 7. load. 146. The objective and range will be indicated in the preparatory commands for all kinds of fire, as illustrated in the preceding examples. If the objective be at a considerable angle to the front of the squad the instructor will change the front of the squad so as to face it. The commands are given at sufficient intervals to allow them to be executed as already prescribed. The command fire is given when the pieces appear to be steady. These rules are general. To Cease Firing. 147. CEASE FIRING. The men stop firing, draw cartridge or eject the empty 64 . SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. shell, lower the sight leaf and take the order, order kneeling or the position lying down, as the case may be. If standing the rear rank men then step back and cover their file leaders. 148. The command (or signal) cease firing, is always used to stop the firing and may be given at any time after the first preparatory command for firing, whether the firing has actually commenced or not. This rule is general. 149. 1. CEASE FIRING, 2. LOAD. The firing' will stop ; such pieces as are already loaded will be brought at once to the position of load ; the others will be loaded. This is intended to interrupt the firing, for the pur- pose of steadying the men, or to change to another method of firing. To Fire at Will. 150. 1. Fire ai will, 2. (such an object), 3. ^f(so many) yards, 4. Squad, 5. ready, 6. commence firiisIg. At the command commence firing esich. man independ- ently of the others takes careful aim at the object, fires, loads and continues the fire as rapidly as is consistent with taking careful aim at each shot. The men should be taught to load rapidly and to aim deliberately. SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 55 BAYONET EXERCISE. 151. The object of this drill is to make the soldier quick and proficient in handling his piece. It is intended merely to prescribe the manner of exe- cuting the movements laid down, but not to restrict the number of movements, leaving to the discretion of company commanders and the ingenuity of instructors the selection of such other exercises as accord with the object of the drill. As soon as the movements are executed accurately, the commands are given rapidly ; expertness in the bayonet exercise depending mostly on quickness of motion. 152. In taking' intervals and distances, the normal in- terval and distance when armed is four paces ; when unarmed, two paces. To Take Intervals. 153. Being in line at a halt : 1. To the right (or left) take intervals, 2. march. At the first command, the rear rank steps back four paces ; at the command march, the man on the left of each rank stands fast ; the other men face to the right and step off, each man halting faced to the front, when he has the proper interval. To Assemble. 154. 1. To the right (or left) assemble, 2. march. The front rank man on the right stands fast ; the other men close to their proper places. To Take Distances. 155. Being in line at a halt, and having counted fours : 1. Front take distance, 2. march. Number one of each four of the front rank moves SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 5d straight to the front; number two mov’’es off as soon as number one has advanced the specified distance ; numbers three and four move off m succession in like manner. The rear rank executes what has been pre- scribed for the front rank, number one moving off as goon as number four front rank has advanced four paces. The proper distance being attained : 1. Squad, 2. HALT. To Assemble. 156. 1. Assemble, 2. march. Number one of the front rank stands fast ; the other men move forward and close to*their proper places. 157. Intervals or distances having been taken and the squad being at the carry or order with bayonets fixed '. 1. Bayonet exercise, 2. guard. At the command guard, half face to the right, carry back and place the right foot about twice itslengthto the rear and three inches to the right, the feet at little less than a right angle, the right toe pointing squarely to the right, both knees bent slightly, weight of the body held equally on both legs ; at the same time throw the point of the bayonet to the front, at the height of the chin, barrel turned slightly to the left, grasping the piece lightly with both hands, the right at the small of the stock, the PI. 21, Par. 157. left between lower band and SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 57 lock plate ; the right hand in line with the left hip and at the height of the belt, both arms held free from the body and without constraint. 158. 1. Carry, 2. arms; or, 1. Order, 2. arms. Resume the carry or order as for charge bayonet. 159. Being' at the guard : advance. Move the left foot quickly forward, twice its length ; follow with the right foot the same distance. 160. RETIRE. Move the right foot quickly to the rear, twice its length ; follow with the left foot the same distance. 161. 1. Front, 2. pass. Advance the right foot quickly, fifteen inches in front of the left, keeping right toe squarely to the right ; ad- vance the left foot to its relative position in front. 162. 1. Rear, 2. pass. Carry the left foot quickly fifteen inches to the rear of the right ; place the right foot in its relative position in rear, keeping right toe squarely to the right. 163. 1. Right, 2. VOLT. Face to the right, turning on the nail of the left foot, at the same time carry the right foot quickly to its po- sition in rear. 164. 1. Left, 2. VOLT. Face to the left, turning on the ball of the left foot, at the same time carry the right foot quickly to its po- sition in rear. Right rear and left rear volts are similarly executed facing about on the ball of the left foot. The foregoing movements are first executed without arms- PARRIES. 165. 1. Right (or left), 2. parry. Move the point of the bayonet about six inches to the right. 58 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. GUARD. Bring the piece back to the position of guard. In the preliminary drill, after the parries and points, the position of guard is resumed, by command, after each movement. When the men have become proficient the instructor will cause them to resume the guard without com- mand. 166. 1. Right low, 2. parry. Move the point of the bayonet quickly opposite the left shoulder ; describe a semi circle from left to right, bring the point of the bayonet to the height of and in front of the right knee, barrel to the left, butt under right forearm, elbow two or three inches higher than the right shoulder. 167. 1. Left low, 2. parry. Lower the point of the bayonet and describe a semi- SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 59 circle by carrying the piece to the left, covering the left side of the body, barrel down, left forearm behind the piece, point of the bayonet at the height of and to the left of the left knee, righjb forearm above the line of the eyes, hand well to the left. 168. 1. Head, 2. parry. Raise the piece with .both hands about eight inches in front of and four inches above the head, barrel downward and supported between thumb and forefinger of left hand midway between upper and lower bands. 169. In the different parries the piece should be lowered, raised or inclined to the right or left so as to cover the point attacked; the thrusts and lunges should be executed on the same principles, taking timely advantage of an adversary’s failure to cover himself from attack. When a lunge is made at a foot soldier, the point of the bayonet is directed at his breast. In the case of a horseman, it is directed against his side or against the head or flank of his horse. The foot soldier should endeavor to gain the horseman’s left side, as the latter cannot use his arms on that side to advantage. PI. 25, Par. 168. POINTS. 170. THRUST. Thrust the piece quickly forward to the full length of the left arm, slipping it through the left hand to the guard ; give it a rotary motion so to bring the bar- 60 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDiE-R PI. 26, Par. 170. PI. 27 , Par. 171. rel up, and direct the point of the bayonet at the point to be attacked; at the same time straighten vigorously the right leg, throwing the weight forward on the left. The piece must be held so as to cover the point most ex- posed to the enemy’s attack. In the thrust from the head parry and from the right and left low parries the piece is not rotated. 171. LUNGE. Executed in the same manner as the thrust, ex- cept that the left foot is carried forward twice its length. 172. BUTT TO FRONT. Raise the piece nearly vertical, and bring it back, barrel in the hollow of right shoulder, (two.) Strike quickly, the butt to SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 61 PI. 28, Par. 172. the front, straight- en right leg, barrel resting on right shoulder. 173. BUTT TO RIGHT (or LEFT). The same as butt to front, except that in executing the first motion, the men make a right volt. In resuming the guard, the men make a left volt. 174. BUTT TO REAR. Turn to the right on both heels, keeping the feet nearly at right angles, right toe to the rear, barrel downward and horizontal, right hand oppo- site the neck, left hand near lower band, left leg straight. (TWO.) Strike to the rear. In resuming the guard, the men turn to the left on both heels and bring the left toe to the front. 175. To thrust or lunge from a parry, first give the command for the parry, then follow quickly with the command for the thrust or lunge. 62 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. Examples. 1. Right, 2. parry, 3. lunge, 4. guard. 1. Head, 2. parry, 3. thrust, 4. guard. 176. The execution of a parry and a thrust or a lung-e may be determined by one command of execution. Example. 1. Head, 2. parry and thrust, 3. guard. At the second command execute the parry, then l^rust quickly ; resume the guard at the third com- mand. 177. When the soldier is thoroughly familiar with the different steps, parries and points, the instructor combines several of them by giving the commands in quick succession, increasing the rapidity and number of movements in combination as the men acquire skill. Examples. 1. ADVANCE, head PARRY AND LUNGE. 1. RETIRE, LEFT PARRY AND THRUST. 1. FRONT PASS, RIGHT PARRY AND THRUST ; LEFT VOLT, HEAD PARRY AND THRUST. Excute each in the order named, and resume the guard without command. 178. Every movement to the front should be followed by an attack (thrust or lunge); every movement to the rear by a parry and a thrust, as indicated in the fore- going example. SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY, m SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 179. The company is grouped into squads, under the leadership and immediate control of the non-commis- sioned officers, who are held responsible for discipline and order, in camp and quarters, and are trained as leaders of groups for battle. 180. The four or squad consists of four files, a cor- poral and seven privates ; the corporal is the squad leader. 181. The term four is used in the commands and ex- planations of the close order drill ; the term squad in the extended order drill. 182. Two or three squads form a section under a sergeant as chief of section ; the section is used in the extended order drills ; it is not a subdivision for move- ments in close order. 183. The company is divided into two platoons, each platoon into two sections. Experienced privates are assigned as leaders of such squads as have no corporals. The squad leader is cov- ered in the rear rank by a reliable man who acts as leader in his absence. If any man of the front rank be absent he is replaced by his rear rank man. If the company consists of an odd number of fours, the right platoon will be the stronger ; if less than four sets of fours are present, the division into platoons is omitted ; if a platoon consists of an odd number of fours, the right section will be the stronger ; if a platoon con- sists of less than four sets of fours, the division into sections is omitted. The platoons and sections are numbered from right to left, when in line, and from head to rear when in column; these designations change when, by facing m SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. about, the right becomes the left of the line, or the head becomes the rear of the column. The squads are designated as righiy left or center squad of first (or such) section. Posts of Officers, Non-Commissioned Officers and Field Music. PLATOON PLATOON 3‘>LT 201J 57*5 i$TLr MU9 WS 184. The captain is two paces in front of the center of the company. The first lieutenant is chief of the first platoon and is two paces in rear of its center. The second lieutenant is chief of the second platoon and is two paces in rear of its center. When there is a third lieutenant he is posted on the left of the second lieutenant. The first sergeant is two paces in rear of second file from the right of the first platoon ; he is not attached to a section. The second sergeant is in the front rank on the right of the first platoon ; he is right guide of this platoon and also of the company, and chief of the first section. The third sergeant is in the front rank, on the left of the seconct platoon ; he is left guide of this platoon and also of the company, and is chief of the fourth section. The fourth sergeant is two paces in rear of the second file from the left of the first platoon ; he is left guide of the first platoon, and chief of the second section. The fifth sergeant is two paces in rear of the second file from the right of the second platoon ; he is right guide of the second platoon, and chief of the third section. The field music, when not united in the battalion, is SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 65 in the line of file closers, on the right of the first lieuten- ant and conforms to the movements of the file closers. On the march, when required to play, it marches at the head of the column. Absent officers and non-commissioned officers are gen- erally replaced by the next in rank or grade. Instruction or Officers and Non-Commissioned Officers. 185. The captain is responsible for the theoretical and practical instruction of his officers and non-commis- sioned officers. He requires them to study and recite these regulations so that they can explain thoroughly every movement before it is put into execution. To Size the Company. 186. The men fall in in a single rank ; the first sergeant faces them to the right and arranges them according to height, tallest man in front ; the corporals place them- selves according to height, the tallest as the seventh man, the others as every eighth man in rear. The sergeant commands : 1. In two ranks form company, 2. MARCH. At the command march, the man in front faces to the left, the second man places himself in the rear rank covering the man in front ; the remaining men close and form alternately in the front and rear rank, each facing to the front upon arriving in his place. The sergeant then commands : 1. Count, 2. fours. Beginning on the right the men of each rank count one, two, three, four, and so on to the left. The sei% geants do not count. If the four on the left consist of less than four men, they are assigned to other fours and placed in the line of file closers, each in rear of the four to which assigned; if the left four consists of m ore than three and less than six men, the number is increased to six or seven by taking the required number of men from a like number 66 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. of fours, at the rate of one from each, number three or numbers two and three being blank files. The company is then divided into platoons and sec- tions ; the sergeants take their posts. The company being sized, the fours habitually form in the same order. To Form the Company. 187. In all formations under arms the men fall in at the order with bayonets unfixed. Whenever a company falls in without arms, the men form as when under arms. At the sounding of the assembly, the first sergeant takes his position in front of where the center of the company is to be, and facing it, makes the signal for as- sembly, or commands : fall in. The second sergeant places himself facing to the front, where the right of the company is to rest, and at such a point that the center of the company will be six paces from and opposite the first sergeant ; the fours form in their proper places on the left of the second sergeant, superintended by the other sergeants, who then take their posts. Fours of less than six men should be increased or broken up as provided for the left four (Par. 186). The first sergeant brings the company to the right i shoulder and calls the roll ; each man answers “ Here ” and comes to the order as his name is called ; the first sergeant then faces about, salutes the captain, reports the result of the roll call, and without command takes his post, passing around the right flank. The lieutenants take their posts and draw sword as soon as the first sergeant has reported. This formation will be used in the field and as far as practicable in camp and garrison. 188. When the company becomes reduced in number and the fours broken up, the men fall in without regard SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 67 to fours, but in their relative order, closing- to the right so as to leave no blank files, the corporals placing them- selves as number four, front rank. The sergeants su- perintend the formation and take their posts ; the first sergeant calls the roll, has the company count fours, forms the left four according to Par. 186, and, if the company be large enough, he divides it into platoons and sections ; he then reports and takes his post as explained. Alignments. 189. The alignments are executed as prescribed in the School of the Soldier. At each alignment the captain steps back two paces in prolongation of the line before giving his commands. This rule applies also to chiefs of subdivisions in col- umn, in company and battalion drill. At the command front, guides take their posts if not already there. This applies also to guides of platoons in company drill, and, in battalion, to guides of subdi- visions in column. To Open Ranks. 190. Being at a halt, at the carry or order : 1. Open ranks, 2. march, 3. front. At the first command, the right and left guides step three paces to the rear to mark the new alignment of the rear rank ; the first and second lieutenants place themselves on the right and left of the front rank ; the third lieutenant covers the second, in the rear rank ; the other file-closers step back three paces in rear of the line of the guides ; the captain goes to the right flank, and sees that the guides are on a line parallel to the front rank ; then places himself facing to the left, three paces in front of the right of the company and commands: march. At this command the lieutenants take post three paces in front of the company, opposite their posts in line. Should a non-commissioned officer be chief of platoon, he remains in the line of file-closers 58 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. .opposite the center of his platoon ; the front rank presses to the right ; the rear rank men step backward, halt a little in rear of the line established by the guides, and then dress to the right on that line ; the file-closers dress to the right. The captain aligns the officers and the front rank ; the right guide, the rear rank ; the captain verifies the alignment of the rear rank and of the file-closers ; the officers and file-closers cast their eyes to the front as soon as their alignment is verified. At the command front, the men cast their eyes to the front, the guides resume their posts in the front rank, and the captain takes post facing to the front, three paces in front of the right guide. To Close Ranks. 191. Being at a halt : 1. Close ranks, 2. march. At the command march, the lieutenants face about and resume their posts in line ; the rear rank closes to facing distance, each man covering his file leader ; the file-closers close to two paces from the rear rank ; the captain takes his post. 192. The company executes the halt, rests, facings, settings up, steps, marchings, turnings, manual of arms, firings, resumes attention, kneels, lies down and rises, as explained in the School of the Soldier, substituting in the commands, company for squad. The same rule applies to platoons, detachments, de- tails, etc. , substituting their designation for squad in the commands. While marching, the arms swing naturally, the hands moving about three inches in front and rear of the seam of the trousers. In executing the turn and halt, the captain goes to the pivot flank of his company ; the guide at the pivot halts or stands fast and resumes his place at the com- mand front. SCHOOL OF the COMPANY. 69 193. In the different firings, at the first command for loading or firing, the captain piaces himself three paces in rear of the file-closers, opposite the center of the company. After the command cease firing, the cap- tain returns to his place in line. Enlisted men in the line of file closers do not execute the loadings and firings. Guides and enlisted men in the line of file closers exe- cute the manual of arms during the drill unless spe- cially excused, when they remain at the order. During ceremonies they execute all movements. Guides in front marking the line stand at the order. A non-commissioned officer as guide, or in command of a subdivision or detachment, carries his rifle as the men do. These rules are general. To Dismiss the Company. 194. Being in line at a halt, the captain directs the first sergeant ; Dismiss the company. The officers fall out, the first sergeant salutes, steps in front of the com- pany and commands : 1. Port, 2. arms, 3. dismissed. Marching m Line to Effect a Slight Change of Direction. 195. The captain commands : Incline to the right (or left). The guide advances gradually the left shoulder and marches in the new direction ; all the files advance , the left shoulder and conform to the movements of the guide, lengthening or shortening the step, according as the change is toward the side of the guide, or the side opposite. Being in Line to March by the Flank. 196. 1. Fours right (or left), 2. march. The front rank of each four wheels ninety degrees to 70 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 0 7^s B B B H PI. 31, Par. 196. the right on a fixed pivot, the pivot man turning strictly in his place ; the man on the marching flank maintains the full step, moving on the arc of a circle wuih the pivot man as the center; the men dress on the marching flank, shorten their steps according to their distance from it, and keep their intervals from the pivot. The rear rank men cover their file leaders and con- form to their movements. Upon the completion of the wheel, the front rank of each four takes the full step, marching in a direction parallel to the former front of the company; the rear rank shortens the step until it gains the distance of forty-four inches ; the front rank of the second four is forty-four inches from the rear rank of the first four, and so on to the rear of the column ; the right and left guides place themselves forty-four inches in front and rear respectively of the left file of the leading and rear fours ; the file closers face to the right and maintain their relative posi- tions. 197. The captain in column of fours, twos, and files is by the side of the leading guide on the flank opposite the file closers ; he takes this position at the command march. The leading and rear guides in column of fours, twos, and files are in front and rear respectively of the leading or rear file on the side opposite the file closers. The file ciosers march two paces trom me flank of SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 71 the column and see that all the fours maintain accurately their distances. In all changes by fours from line into column and column into line, or from column of fours to twos, files or the reverse, and in all wheels about by fours, either in line or column, the captain and guides take their proper places in the most convenient way as soon as practicable. All wheels by fours, except in changing direction, are executed on a fixed pivot. These rules are general. Being in Line to Form Column of Fours and Halt. 198. 1. Fours right (or left), 2. march, 3. Company, 4 . HALT. The command halt is given as the front ranks com- plete the wheel ; the rear ranks fall back to forty-four inches, and all dress toward the marching flank. 199. In column of fours, the ranks dress toward the side of the guide. In all wheelings by fours, the forward march is taken upon the completion of the movement, unless the com- mand halt be given. These rules are general. Marching in Column of Fours to Change Direction. 200. 1. Column right {pv left), 2. march. The leading rank of four wheels on a movable pivot, executed as prescribed in Par. 196, except that the pivot man takes steps of ten inches in quick time and twelve inches in double time, gaining ground forward so as to clear the wheeling point ; the wheel completed, the leading rank takes the full step, the man on the side of the guide follows forty-four inches in rear of the guide, the other ranks move forward and wheel on the same ground. If the change of direction be toward the side of the guide, he shortens his step and wheels to 7 ? SCHOOL OP THE COMPANY. the right as if on the pivot flank of a rank of four ; if the change be to the side opposite the guide, he wheels as if on the marching flank of a rank of four. Column half right {ov half left), is similarly executed, each rank of four wheeling forty -five degrees. To Put the Column of Fours in March and Change Direction at the Same Time. 201. 1. Forward, 2. Column right (or left ) ; or, 3. Column half right {oY half left), 3. march. Being in Line to Form Column of Fours and Change Direction. 202. 1 . Fours right (or left), 2. Column right (or lefty, or, 2. Column half right (or half left), 3. MARCH. Execute fours right and then change direction. (Par. 200). MUS 7‘^LT At us Being in Line, to March in Columns of Fours to the Front. 203. 1. Right (or left) forward, 2. Fours right (or PJ. 32, ¥aT.*m. ~~ . left), 3. MARCH. At the command march, the right guide places him- self in front of the left file of the right four ; the right four moves straight to the front, shortening the first three or four steps, the rear rank falls back to forty- four inches ; the other fours wheel to the right each on a fixed pivot (Par. 196) ; the second four when its wheel is two-thirds completed, wheels to the left on a mov- SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 73 able pivot (Par. 200), and follows the first ; the other fours, having wheeled to the right, move forward and each wheels to the left on a movable pivot, so as to* follow the second. k2PS Being in Column of Fours, to Change the File Closers from On& Flank of the Column to the Other. 204. 1. File closers on left (or right) flank, 2. march. At the first command, the file closers close into the fiank of the column, and at the command march, dart through the column. The captain and guides change to their proper positions. To Oblique m Column of Fours, y and to Resume the Direct March. // CAPT. ^ 205. 1. Right (or left) oblique, 2. march. Each four obliques as prescribed for the squad (Par. 135). The leading guide is the guide of the column when the oblique is toward his flank ; when the oblique is toward the opposite flank the guide of the front rank of the leading four is the guide of the column. To resume the direct march : 1, Forward, 2. MARCH. MUS cm PI. 33, Par. £05, 74 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. To March the Column of Fours to the Rear, 206. Fours right {ov left) about, 2. march. Each four wheels 180 degrees to the right (Par. 196). The man on the marching flank of the rear rank of each four preserves his distance ; the man on the pivot flank closes up to his file leader, covers him during the wheel, and on its completion falls back to his proper distance. The file closers do not pass through the column, but gain the space to the right or left necessary to preserve their interval from the flank. To Form Line from Column of Fours . 207. To the right or left : 1. Fours right (or left), 2. march, 3. Guide {right or lefty, or, 3. Company, 4. HALT. At the command march, the fours wheel to the right. The rear rank of each four closes to facing distance during the wheel, and, if in double time, takes the dis- tance of 36 inches, should the line advance on the com- pletion of the wheel. The guide is announced, or the command halt is given, the instant the fours unite in line. If the line be formed toward the side of the file closers, they close in to the flank of the column at the first! com- mand, and at the command march dart through the column, between the rear rank of one four and the front rank of the succeeding four. 208. On right or left : 1. On right (or left) into line, 2. MARCH, 3. Company, 4. halt, 5. front. At the command march, the leading four wheels to the right on a movable pivot and moves forward, dress- ing to the right, the guide places himself on its right; each of the other fours marches a distance equal to its front, beyond the wheeling point of tiie four next pre- ceding, wheels to the right and advances as explained for SCHOOL OF THE COIVIPANY. 75 the first four ; the rear guide places himself on the left of the rear four after it halts. The rear rank of each four closes to facing distance as the front rank com- mences to wheel. a 7^ PI. 34, Par. 208. At the command halt, given when the leading four has advanced company distance in the new direction, 76 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. it halts and dresses to the right ; the other fours sua cessively halt and dress upon arriving in line. The command front is given w^hen the left four com. pletes its dressing. If the movement be executed toward the side opposite the file closers, each follows the four nearest him, pass- ing in front of the following four. 209. In movements where it is prescribed that the lead- ing four, or subdivision, moves company or subdivision distance to the front and then halts, it maybe haltec at a less distance when necessary. This ride is general. 210. To the front : 1. Right (or left) front into line, 2. MARCH, 3. Comxmny, 4. halt, 5. front. At the command march, the leading four mo^es straight to the front, dressing to the left ; the guide in front places himself on its left ; the other fours oblique to the right till opposite their places in line, when each marches to the front. At the command halt, given when the leading four has advanced company distance, it halts and dresses to the left; the other fours halt and dress to the left upon arriving in line ; the rear ranks close to facing distance upon halting ; the guide in rear places himself on the right of the front rank upon the arrival of the last four in line ; the command front is given when the last four completes its dressing'. If the movement be made toward the side of the file closers, they dart through the column as the oblique commences. If marching in double time, or in quick time, and the command be double time, the captain commands. Guide left, immediately after the command march ; the leading four moves to the front in quick time, its rear rank closing to facing distance ; the other fours oblique in double time, each taking the quick time and dressing to the left upon arriving in line ; the rear rank on ar- riving in line closes to facing distance. SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 77 CAPT PL 35. Par. 210, 78 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY, BeJng in Line, to Face to the Rear and to March to the Rear. 211. 1. F ours right {ov left) about, 2. march, 3. Com. party, 4. halt ; or, 3. Guide {right or left). The fours wheel about (Par. 206); the file closers dart through the nearest intervals. 212. The company at a halt, may be marched a few paces to the rear by the commands : 1. Company, 2. About, 3. FACE, 4. Forward, 5. Guide {right or left), 6. MARCH ; or, if in. march, by the commands: 1. To the rear, 2. march, 3. Guide {right or left). The guides step into the rear rank now become the front rank ; the file closers on facing ab<^ut maintain their relative positions. Obstacles. 213. Marching in line, to pass obstacles : 1. (So many) fours from right (or left) to rear, 2. march. At the command march, the designated fours execute left forward, foursleft,on the four that remains in line next on their left. The guide closes on the fours that remain in line. The fours that have broken to the rear are formed in line at the commands : 1. Rear fours right (or left) front into line, 2. Double time, 3. march. The guide, at the command march, hastens to the point where the flank of the company will be when the movement is completed. Being in Column of Fours, to Form Column of Twos or Files. 214. This movement is always executed toward the file closers ; it is used only for the purpose of reducing the front of the column to enable it to pass a defile or other narrow place, immediately after which the col- umn of fours should be reformed. 1. Right (or left) by ticos, 2. march. the first command the rear rank of each four closes to ^ .Cing distance. SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 79 At the command march, the two files on the right of each four move forward; the two files on the left mark time till disengaged, when they oblique to the right and follow the right files. The distance between ranks in col- umn of twos is facing distance ; the guides take the same distance in front and rear of the column. CApr ggg C APT PI. 36, Par. 214. Being in Column of Fours at a Halt, to Form Column of Files. 215. Right (or left) hy file, 2. march. At the first command the rear rank of each four closes to facing distance. At the command ywarcA, the right file of the leading four moves forward, followed in succession by the files on its left ; when the left file of the leading four is about to commence to oblique the right file of the second four moves to the front, and so on to the rear of the column, the men keeping closed as nearly as possible to facing distance ; the guides take the same distance. If marching, the leading file continues the march, the others halt without coming to the order, and resume the march at the proper time. Column of files from column of twos is similarly ex- ecuted. 216. A column of twos or files changes direction, is halted, and put in march by the same commands as a column of fours. The march in column of twos or files is always in quick time. 217. A column of fours, twos, or files may be faced to the rear, or to a fiank, and marched a short distance, but no other movements should be executed until the column is again faced to the original front. The offi- cers and non-commissioned officers face with the col- umn and retain their positions. 80 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. Being in Column of Twos or Files, to Form Column of Fours, CART 2'>S 218. This movement is always ex^ edited away from the file closers. Marching in column of twos: 1. firs Form fours, 2. Left (or right) oblique, ^ 3. MARCH. At the command march, the leading two of each four take the short step ; j»r 5 the rear two oblique to the left until ^ they uncover the leading two, when they move to the front ; the fours T>i or. r» 010 having united, the rear ranks fall F . 37, Far. 218. back to forty-four inches, and all resume the full step. Having Formed Column of Files from Column of Twos or Fours, to Form Column of Fours. 219. 1. Form fours, 2. Left (or right) oblique, 3. MARCH. At the command march, the leading file of the first four halts, the rear rank man falling back to forty-four inches as soon as the file in rear has obliqued ; the other files of the first four oblique to the left and place themselves successively on the left of the leading file, the rear rank taking the distance of forty-four inches from the front rank ; the other fours success’vely form as explained for the first, the leading file of each halting at forty-four inches from the corresponding file of the four next in front. Column of twos is formed from column of files on the same principles. MOVEMENTS BY PLATOONS. 220.. In movements by platoons each chief repeats such commands as are to be immediately executed by his platoon. Each chief gives the commands pre- scribed so as to insure the execution of movements by his platoon at the proper time. SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 81 In column whenever a subdivision is dressed its chief, after commanding front, places himself two paces in front of its center; in movements where the subdivi- sions are not dressed, he takes this position as soon as the column is formed. These rules are general, 3eing in Line, to Form Column of Platoons to the Right or Left. 221. 1. Platoons right (or left), 2. march. Executed by each platoon. (Par. 140.) At the first command, the chiefs of platoons caution ; Platoon right; and at the command march, take their places two paces from the pivots of their platoons, verify the alignment, and command : front. 222. Whenever a company is formed in column of platoons or line of platoons in columns of fours, the fourth and fifth sergeants place themselves as guides of 82 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. their platoons as soon as practicable ; they return to their posts in the line of file closers when the company unites in line or column of fours, unless they mark an alignment. 223. The position of the captain in column of platoons is on the side of the guide, three paces from the flank of the column, abreast of the leading platoon. 224. The column of platoons is put in march, halted, obliques, and resumes the direct march by the same commands as the company in line. Being in Line, to Form Column of Platoons, and Move Forward Without Halting. 225. 1. Platoons, 2. Right (or left) turn, 3. march, 4. Forward, 5. march, 6. Guide {right or left). Executed by each platoon (Par. 141). The fifth com- mand is given when both platoons have completed the turn. 226. The guide of the second platoon preserves the trace, step and a distance equal to the front of the platoon. This rule is general. Being in Column of Platoons, to Change Direction. 227. Being in march : 1. Column right (or left), 2, MARCH. At the first command, the chief of the first platoon commands : Right turn. At the command march, the first platoon turns to the right (Par. 141), its chief adding : 1. Forward, 2. MARCH, on the completion of the turn. The second platoon marches squarely up to the turn« ing point and then changes direction by the same com- mands and means as the first. Column half right (or half left) is similarly executed ; each chief gives the preparatory command : Right (or left) half turn. SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 83 228. In changing direction in column of subdivisions, each chief, on the completion of the movement by his subdivision, announces the guide on the side it was pre- vious to the turn. This rule is general. To Put the Column of Platoons in March and Change Direction at the Same Time. 229. 1. Forward, 2. Guide right {ov left), 3. Column right (or left) ; or, 3. Column half right (or half left), 4. MARCH. Being in Column of Platoons, to Face to the Rear and to March to the Rear. 230. 1. Fours right (or left) about, 2. march, 3. Company, 4. halt ; or, 3. Guide right (or left). If one platoon be smaller than the other, the guide of the second platoon regains the trace and distance on the march. To Form Line from Column of Platoons. 231. Before forming line to, or on the right or left, the captain requires the guide of the second platoon on the flank toward which the movement is to be executed to cover ; if marching, he announces the guide on that flank, if not already there. 232. To the right or left : 1. Platoons right (or left), 2. MARCH, 3. FRONT. Executed by each platoon (Par. 140). Each chief of platoon obliques to the left until he clears the marching flank, and takes his post. The captain verifies the alignment and commands ? FRONT. 233. To the right or left and continue the march: ^ Platoons, 2. Right (or left) turn, 3. march, 4. Guide {right or left), 5. Forward, 6. march. Executed by each platoon (Par. 141). The sixth com- mand is given when both platoons have completed the turn. 84 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. CAPl Each chief of platoon obliques to the left until he clears the marching flank, and takes his post. 234. On right or left : 1. On right (or left) into line, 2, march, 3. front. The chief of the first platoon commands : Right turn. The first platoon turns to the right ; when the guide has advanced platoon distance, the platoon is halted by its chief, who passes around the right flank to his post. The second platoon marches straight to the fronfc ; its chief commands : 1. Right turn, 2. march, when his platoon is opposite the right of its place in line ; the platoon turns to the right and when the right file has arrived on the line the platoon is halted by its chief, who passes around the left flank to his post. The captain verifies the alignment and commands : FRONT. SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 85 aSJr • I I I I I I A MUS l^S PI. 40, Par. 234. CAPT 86 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY, Being in Line, to Form Column of Platoons to the Front. 235. Being at a halt: 1. Right (or left) by platoons. 2. MARCH, 3. Guide left (or right). l^LJ PI. 41, Par. 235. At the first command, the chiefs of platoons pass in double time to their places in front of their platoons, SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 87 the chief of the right platoon commands ; Forward; the chief of the left ; Right oblique. At the command march, the right platoon moves for- ward. The chief of the left platoon commands : march, when his platoon is disengaged ; the platoon obliques to the right, the chief commanding : 1. Forward, 2. MARCH, 8. Guide left, when the left guide arrives in the trace of the guide of the leading platoon. If marching, the chief of the left platoon commands : 1. Second platoon, 2. Mark time, 3. march, adding •. 1, Right oblique, 2. march, when his platoon is dis- engaged ; the movement is completed as from a halt. Being in Column of Platoons, to Form Company to the Front 236. Being at a halt : 1. Form company, 2. Right (or left) oblique, 3. march, 4. front. At the second command, the chief of the first platoon commands : 1. Forward, 2. Guide left ; the chief of the second commands : Right oblique. The first platoon advances platoon distance, when its chief commands : 1. Platoon, 2. halt, 3. Left, 4:. dress, and passes around the left flank to his post. The second platoon obliques to the right, its chief commanding : 1. Forward, 2. march, 8. Guide left, when the platoon is opposite its place in line ; on arriving near the line, j the chief halts the platoon, commands; 1. Left, 2. DRESS, and passes around the right flank to his post. The captain superintends the alignment from the left flank. If marching in quick time, the chief of the leading platoon commands ; Guide left, and the movement is completed as just explained. If marching in quick time and the command be double time, the captain commands : Guide left (or right) im- mediately after the command march ; the chief of the leading platoon cautions it to advance in quick time and 88 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. commands : Guide left ; the chief of the second platoon commands : Double time, and when the platoon is abreast of the leading platoon commands : 1. Quick time, 2. march ; the platoons having united, the chiefs pass around the flanks to their posts. If marching in double time, the chief of the first platoon, at the first command of the captain, commands: Quick time. Being in Column of Platoons, to March by the Flank. 237. 1. Fours right (or left), 2. march, 3. Guide {right or left). The right and left guides of each platoon place them- selves as in Par. 196, each chief of platoon on the left of his leading guide ; the leading guide of the platoon on the flank announced is the guide of the com- pany ; the leading guide of the other platoon marches abreast of him and preserves the interval necessary to form front into line. The position of the captain is on the side opposite the file closers, three paces from the flank and abreast of the chiefs of platoons. Marching by the flank of platoons, the right platoon is the first, the left the second. To March Again in Column of Platoons. 1. Fours right (or left), 2. march, 3. Guide {right or left). Being in Line, to Advance in Line of Platoons in Columns of Fours. 238. 1. Platoons, 2. Right (or left) forward, 3. Fours ^ight (or left), 4. march, Guide {right or left). At the first command, the chiefs pass quickly around the flanks and place themselves in front of their pla- toons. At the command march, each platoon executes the movement as prescribed for a company (Par. 203). SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. To form again in line: 1. Platoons^ 2. Right (or left) frontinto line^ 3. march, 4. Company, 5. halt, 6. front. CAPT 2‘>LT 5«S t^LT Z^S - y TTorri ~T“ 1 ' ' ' * 9 ^ . L .. L .. L .. L . \ . . .. L ,. L .. L ... L ., L ' 2«5 3017 20LT 5THS 4^s ysTS PI. 42, Par. 238. Each platoon forms front into line; the chiefs of pla- toons return to their posts by dropping to the rear or by passing around the heads of their platoons, according as the front into line is executed toward the side of the tile closers or toward the side opposite. The command halt is given when the leading fours have advanced platoon distance. If the movement be executed in double time, the captain commands; Guide left (or right) after the com- mand march. Being in Column of Fours, to Form Front into Line of Platoons in Columns of Fours. 289. 1. Right (or left) front into line of platoons in columns of fours, 2. march. 90 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. The first platoon is marched platoon distance to the front and halted; the second executes column half rights and having gained its interval (Par. 237), column half left, and is halted abreast of the first platoon. Being in Column of Fours to Form on Right or Left into Line of Platoons in Columns of Fours. 240. 1. On right (or left) into line of platoons in columns of fours, 2. march. The first platoon executes column right, advances platoon distance and twelve paces in the new direction and is halted; the second is marched be 3 "ond the first and when opposite its place executes column right and is halted abreast of the first platoon. Marching in Line of Platoons in Columns of Fours, to Form Column of Fours to the Right or Left. 241. 1. Platoons, 2. Column right (or left), 3, march. The chiefs pass around the heads of their platoons as they are about to unite in column of fours. Being in Column of Platoons, to Form Column of Fours. 242. 1. Platoons, 2. Right (or left) forward, 3. Fours right (or left), 4. march. The chiefs pass around the heads of their platoons as they are about to unite in column of fours. Being in Column of Fours, to Form Column of Platoons. 243. 1. Platoons, 2. Right (or left) front into line, 3. MARCH, 4. Company, 5. halt. At the second command, each chief places himself near the head of his platoon. At the command march, each platoon executes right front into line, (Pars. 210 and 189.) SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 91 The command halt is given when the leading four has advanced platoon distance. If marching in double time, or in 5 t«s quick time, and the command be double time, the captain commands: Guide left isizca (or right) after the command march, cimzi Marching in Column of Fours, to March in Line of Platoons in Columns of Fours to the Right or Left. 244. 1. Platoons, 2. Column right (or left), 3. MARCH, 4. Guide {right or left). Each platoon changes direction to the right, and each chief takes his place by the side of his leading guide. Route Step. 245. The column ^ of fours is the hab- 3®s ' itual column of route. The rate is three to three and a half miles per hour. Marching in quick time : 1 . Route . step, 2. MARCH. The men carry their pieces at will, keepingthe muzzle elevated; they are 20LT CAPT / / / IsrlT / ! / '^rs not required to pre- 47^ i serve silence nor ^ keep the step. The ranks cover and Pi. 43, Par. 24^ . preserve their distance. If from a halt: 1. Forward, 2. Route step, 3. march. 92 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. To resume the cadenced step: 1 Company ^ 2. atten- tion. At the command attention, the pieces are brought to the right shoulder and the cadenced step in quick time is resumed. The company marching in line or in column of pla- toons may also march in the route step, the rear rank' falling back to thirty-six inches. The company in route step changes direction by the same commands as in the cadenced step. Upon halting while marching in route step, the men come to the rest at the order. 246. To march at ease: 1. At ease, 2. march. The company marches as in the route step, except that silence is preserved. The march at ease will be frequently used in the fore- going movements. To resume the cadenced step: 1. Company, 2. atten- tion. If halted while marching at ease, the men remain at ease at the order. At ease, either marching or at a halt, and at the rest, officers carry the sword at will; marching at route step, at will or in the scabbard. 247. The company having been formed, the right may become the left; the flanks the center, and the reverse. Whenever the flanks become the center, the second and third sergeants take the posts in the line of file closers prescribed for the fifth and fourth sergeants, each with his own platoon; the fourth and fifth ser- geants take the posts prescribed for the third and second sergeants. The first sergeant always remains with the original first platoon ; when in line, in rear of the second file from the outer flank, taking the correspond- ing position when the platoons unite in column of fours. 248. The captain holds the file closers responsible for the fours near them and requires them to correct errors. SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 93 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 249. In this school the senior officer present is the instructor ; in the text he is designated as major. 250. Captains repeat such of the commands as are to be immediately executed by their companies ; as, for- ward, fours right, march, halt, etc.; they do not repeat the major’s commands in executing the manual, nor those commands which are not essential to the execu- tion of a movement by their companies ; as, deploy column, etc. In any movement, each captain gives his command so as to insure its execution by his company at the proper time. 251. When the formation will admit of the simulta- neous execution of movements by the companies, the major may have them execute mo vements in the School of the Company by prefixing, when necessary, the com- mand : Companies (or platoons) to the "commands therein prescribed ; e. g., 1. Companies, 2. Right for- ivard, 3. Fours right, 4. march. 1. Companies, 2. Right hy platoons, 3. march. 1. Companies, 2. Right front into line, 3. march, etc. When line, line of columns, or column of subdivisions is formed, the major announces the guide, ff the march is to be continued. Instruction of Officers, 252. The major is responsible for the instruction of his battalion. The officers are assembled for theoretical and prac- tical instruction. The instruction of officers embraces the Drill Regula- tions and such other instruction as pertains to their du- ties in peace and war. Each captain should be required to drill the battalion. 94 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. Formation of the Battalion. 253. The battalion is composed of two or more com- panies, not exceeding six ; the movements explained herein are on the basis of a battalion of four compa- nies. For drill and ceremonies the companies may be equal- ized by transferring the men from the larger to the smaller. The companies are arranged according to the rank of captains, the senior commanding the right company, the second in rank the left, and the third the center or right center. The following table shows the order of companies iq line from right to left. Companies whose captains are absent are posted ii line according to the relative rank of the officers pres.^ ent in command of them. A company whose captain is absent for a few days only, or is in command of the battalion, retains its place according to his rank unless otherwise directed. After the battalion is formed no cognizance is taken of the relative order of the companies. In whatever direction the battalion faces, the com- panies are designated numerically from right to left in SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 95 line, and in line of columns, and from head to rear in column, first company, second company, etc. In like manner the companies to the right of the cen- ter in line constitute the right wing; those to the left, the left wing; when the number of companies is un- even, the original right wing contains the odd com- pany. The left company right wing and right company left-wing are designated respectively right and left center companies. When a new formation necessitates a change of des- ignation the change takes effect upon the completion of the movement. In designating their companies the captains use the letter designation : as Company “ ” etc. When a battalion is composed of fractions of several regiments, the companies of each regiment are arranged as already explained ; the fractions are then arranged in line from right to left, according to the rank of the senior officer present in each, the senior on the right. Color Guard. , 254. If the color be with the battalion, the original right center company is the color company ; the color guard remains with it unless otherwise directed ; it is posted as follows : In line, the color bearer is between the guides of the right and left center companies ; the other members of the guard are in his rear, in the line of file closers. The color guard takes the same position relative to the color company when in column at full distance or in mass. In column of fours, the color bearer is between the wings, abreast of the guide of the color company, in front or in rear of the file next the file closers; the other members of the guard retain their places in the line of file closers. The color guard retains the same relative position, both in line and in column of fours, when marching with the color company only. 9g SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. Ih formin"* line of columns the color guard remains with the flank of the company it was with before the movement commenced. If by movements of the battalion the original left of the color company is changed so as not to be the center of the battalion, the color bearer and guard will take post between the wings, whether on the left or right of the color company, or at its head or rear in column of fours. Posts of Field and Staff. 255. In line, the major is posted twenty paces in front of the center of the battalion ; the adjutant and sergeant major are opposite the right and left of the battalion, six paces in rear of the file closers. The staff officers, except the adjutant, in the order of rank, the senior on the right, take post at one pace apart, six paces to the right and in line with the front rank of the battalion. The non-commissioned staff officers, except the sergeant major, take post similarly on the left of the front rank. In column, the major is on the side of the guide, twenty paces from and opposite the center. MAJOR 9 I si jr^CAPT . SKAPT colorWard' PI. 44, Par. 255. I^^CAPT staff The adjutant and sergeant major are on the side of the guide, opposite and six paces from the head and rear of the column, each in his own wing. The other staff and non-commissioned staff officers take post, in SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 97 column of subdivisions, in their respective wings, on a line equal to the front of the column, in order of rank, senior on the right, six paces in front of the captain of the leading company or six paces in rear of the file closers of the rear company. In column of fours the^^ take post similarly in front of the leading or in rear of the rear company. "When the column faces to the rear the staff and non-commissioned staff officers face about individually and maintain their relative positions. in line of columns, the major is twenty paces in front of the center; the adjutant and sergeant major are abreast of and six paces outside of the leading guides. The other staff and non-commissioned staff officers are in the same relative order as in line, one pace to the right and left, respectively, of the adjutant and sergeant major. If the line or line of columns face to the rear, the staff and non-commissioned staff officers face about individually and move up abreast of the front rank or leading guides, keeping their relative positions, except that in line the adjutant and sergeant major take the corresponding positions as when facing* to the former front, each in his own wing. The field and staff officers are mounted. In making the about, an officer, mounted, habitually turns to the left about. Post of the Band and Field Music. 256. The band is posted with the left of its front rank, twenty-four paces to the right of the front rank of the battalion. In column, it marches with its rear rank twenty-four paces in front of the leading company, or its front rank twenty-four paces in rear of the rear company, according as the battalion is facing. In line of columns, the band retains its line position, marching abreast of the leading guides. 4 98 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. To Form the Battalion. 257. The companies having been formed on their pa- rade grounds, adjutant's call is sounded, at which the adjutant proceeds to the point where the base company is to form ; the sergeant major reports to him and is posted on the line facing the adjutant at nearly com- pany distance ; the adjutant and sergeant major then draw swords. The right center or center company is the first estab- lished, and is conducted by its captain so as to arrive from the rear, parallel to the line ; the right and left guides of the company precede it on the line by about twenty paces, taking post facing each other, at order arms, under the direction of the adjutant and sergeant major. The line is prolonged in the right wing by the right and left guides, who precede their companies on the line b}’' about twenty paces and establish themselves facing the guides first posted, at a little less than com- pany distance apart, the one nearest the guide of the preceding company being about five paces in his rear ; the adjutant assures the position of the guides, placing himself in rear of the right guides as they successively arrive. The line is similarly prolonged in the left wing by the company guides, the sergeant major assuring them in their positions, placing himself in rear of the left guides. When the right center company arrives near the line the captain halts it, places himself facing to the front near the left guide, and dresses the company to the left; the breasts of the men opposite the right and left guides rest respectively against their left and right arms ; the companies of the right wing successively form from left to right with an interval of three paces between guides when in line, each company being halted near the line and dressed to the left, as explained for the center com- pany ; the companies of the left wing form successively) from right to left and are dressed to the right. 258. Captains, when dressing their companies in line SCHOOL OF THE BATTALI 'iN. 99 place themselves on the line, on the flank toward which they dress, facing to the front. Each captain after dressing his compftiy, commands : FRONT, and takes his post. These rules are general, 259. At all formations of the battalion a non-comis- sioned officer in command of his company takes his post on the right of the right guide, at the command guides posts, and, except in formations for ceremonies, when the major commands carry arms after receiving the re- port of the adjutant, he takes the post prescribed for the captain. 260. Before sounding the adjutant's call the band takes a position designated by the adjutant, and marches at the same time as the companies to take its position in line. The major takes post facing the line, at a distance in front of the center of the battalion about equal to half its front. The adjutant, having assured the position of the guides of the right company, places himself two paces to the front, facing to the left, and when the last company arriving on the line is dressed, commands : 1. Guides, 2. posts. At the command guides posts, the sergeant major and guides take their posts in line, and the staff and non- commissioned staff draw sword and take their posts. The adjutant moves at a trot or gallop (if dismounted, in quick time) by the shortest line to a point midway between the major and the center of the battalion, faces the latter and halts ; then brings the battalion to the carry and present, faces about, salutes the major, and reports : Sir, the battalion is formed. The major returns the salute with the right hand, di- rects the adjutant. Take your post, sir ; draws sword, and brings the battalion to the order or carry. The adjutant faces about and returns around the right of the battalion to his post. 100 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 261. The battalion maybe formed in line on the right or left company on the same principles, the guides be- ing posted as in the left or i-ight wing. The battalion may also be assembled in column of fours. In both cases the companies are arranged in the same relative order as when the formation is on the center company. When assembled in column the adjutant re- ports to the major as soon as the last company has taken its place. Equalizing the Battalion. 262. The companies are usually equalized by trans- fers before the battalion is formed, but when this is not done the major may form column of companies and direct the adjutant, first, to equalize the companies by transferring men from the larger to the smaller com- panies ; second, to break up one company and equalize by transferring the men to other companies ; third, to form an additional company and equalize by taking men from the other companies ; also, to make the necessary assignment of officers and guides. To Open Banks. 263. Being at a halt: 1. Open ranks, 2. march, 3. FRONT. At the first command the major goes to the right of the battalion. The adjutant places himself facing to the left three paces in rear of the front rank, opposite the right of the battalion. The right guides of each company and the guide on the left of the battalion place themselves three paces in rear of the front rank, op- posite their places in line, in order to mark the new alignment of the rear rank ; they are aligned by the ad- jutant on the left guide of the battalion. The lieutenants and the other file closers take post as in open ranks in the company (Par. 190). SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 101 At the command march^ the company and staff of- ficers place themselves opposite their posts in line, three paces in advance of the front rank, dress to the right and cast their eyes to the front as soon as their alignment is verified. The front rank dresses to the right; the men in the rear rank step back a little in rear of the line traced for this rank, halt, and dress forward on the right guides, who verify the alignment of the men in their respective companies. The adjutant verifies the alignment of the file closers on the left file closer, who posts himself accurately three paces in rear of the line of guides. The color bearer remains in his place ; the other mem- bers of the color guard step back with the file closers. The sergeant major takes post one pace to the left of and in line with the front rank. The major verifies the alignment of the officers and the ranks. The band takes three paces between ranks, the align- ment being verified by the drum major. At the command front, given when the ranks are aligned, the adjutant takes post three paces to the right of the battalion, in line with the company officers; the guides and drum major return to their places in line ; and the major takes post facing to the front, twenty paces in front of the center of the battalion. Should the battalion have wheeled about by fours, the sergeant major performs the duties of adjutant. To Close Ranks. 264. 1. Close ranks, 2. march. At the command march, all the officers face about, and return to their places in line ; the rear rank closes to facing distance from the front rank ; the file closers and the two members of the color guard close to two paces from the rear rank, and the band closes its ranks. 102 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. Manual of Arms. 265. The manual of arms is executed in the bat. talion with closed or open ranks. The color guard do not execute the loadings and firings ; in rendering honors they execute all the move- ments in the manual, and on drill, except when spe- cially excused. In the loadings and firings, the post of the major is twenty paces in rear of the center of the battalion. 266. At the first command for loading or firing the captains take place as prescribed (Par. 193). After firing ceases the major commands : posts, the captains return to their posts in line. These rules are general. To Fire by Company. 267. The major designates the objective and com- mands : 1. Fire by company, 2. One {two or three) volley, 3. commence firing. At the third command, the captains of the odd-num- bered companies command : 1. (Such) company, 2. At (such an object), 3. At (so many) yards, 4. Company, 5. READY, 6. AIM, 7. FIRE, 8. LOAD. When the captain of each even-numbered company sees the pieces in the company on his right in the posi- tion of load, he gives the same commands. The cap- tains of the odd-numbered companies conform to the same rule with regard to the even-numbered companies on their left. 268. The fire by battalion and the fire at will are executed by the same commands and means as in the squad, substituting in the commands battalion for squad (Pars. 144 to 150). 269. The rests, resuming attention, stacking and taking arms, are executed as prescribed for the com- pany, substituting in the commands battalion for com- pany. SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 103 To Dismiss the Battalion. 270. Dismiss your companies. Each captain conducts his company to its parade ground, where it is dismissed as prescribed. To March in Line. 271. Being at a halt ; 1. Forward^ 2. Guide center, 3. MARCH. The left guide of the right center company is the center guide and regulates the step and direction, the guides maintaining the interval of three paces between companies ; the captains in front of the center of their companies see that they preserve a general alignment without abruptly shortening or lengthening the step ; the major superintends the march of the battalion. 272. At the command guide center, captains caution : Guide left (or right), according as they are in the right or left wing. This rule is general. 273. To make a slight change of direction, the major commands : Incline to the right (or left), and indicates the new line of direction. The guide gradually ad- vances his left shoulder, giving time for the alignment to conform to his movement. 274. If the battalion loses step, the major commands: STEP ; captains and their companies immediately take the proper step. 275. Marching considerable distances, the line forma- tion that the battalion habitually takes is the' line of columns of fours. To Face the Battalion to the Rear, and to March it to the Rear, 276. Being in line : 1. Fours right (or left) about, 2. MARCH, 3. Battalion, 4. halt ; or, 3. Guide center The battalion wheels about by fours (Par. 211) ; the color bearer turns about and takes his place in the 104 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. front rank ; the other members of the color guard dart through to their places in the line of file closers ; the command halt is given as the fours unite in line. In wheeling by fours, if the pivots cover and the fours wheel properly, no dressing is needed ; the major will direct a captain to dress his company when neces- sary. If the battalion be not halted, the major commands : Guide center as the fours unite in line. Whenever a battalion in line wheels about by fours, the adjutant and sergeant major pass around the flanks. The battalion is drilled by the same commands as Then facing in the opposite direction. 277. The battalion may be marched a few paces to the rear by the commands: 1. Battalion, 2. About, 3. FACE, 4. Forward, 5. Guide center, 6. march ; or, if in march, by the commands ; 1. To the rear, 2. march, 3. Guide center. The officers, sergeant major, and file closers, upon facing about, remain in their relative positions ; the guides step into the rear, now become the front rank, until the battalion is again faced to the front. To Oblique m Line. 278. 1. Right {oY left) oblique, 2. march. The major sees that the battalion continues parallel to its original line. To resume the direct march : 1. Forward, 2. march. Alignments. 279. Being at a halt, to rectify the alignment : Cap- tains rectify the alignment. The captains in the right wing dress their companies successively to the left, each as soon as the captain next on his left commands /ron^; the captains in the left wing dress their companies similarly to the right. The center companies are dressed first without waiting for each other. SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. m 280. To give the battalion a general alignment : 1. Guides (such) company on the line, 2. Guides on the line, 3. On the center {right or left), 4. dress, 5. Guides, 6. POSTS. At the first command the designated guides place themselves on the line facing the major, who estab^ lishes them in the direction he wishes to give the bat- talion. At the second command the guides of the other com- panies are posted as in forming the battalion (Par. 257). At the command dress the base company, if an interi- or company, dresses to the left or right according as it is in the rig*ht or left wing; if on a tiank, toward its outer flank; the others toward the base company. If the new line be oblique to or at considerable dis- tance from the battalion, the captains conduct their companies so as to arrive parallel to the line, halt, and dress them as explained. At the command posts the guides return to their posts. If the new direction of the line be such that one or more companies find themselves in advance of it, the major, before establishing the guides, causes such com- panies to be moved to the rear. To Pass Obstacles. 281. When marching in line or in column, captains will, without the command of the major, so conduct their companies as to pass obstacles with the greatest facility, and then resume the original formation. Being in Line, to March by the Flank. 282. 1. Fours right (or left), 2. march. The adjutant and sergeant major pass around the flanks to their posts in column. In column of fours the leading guide of each com- pany, except the first, marches in the trace of the rear guide of the preceding company and maintains the distance of seventy-two inches from him. 106 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 283. A battalion at a halt may be marched a short distance to the ri^ht or left in column of files by the commands: 1. Right (or left), 2. face, 3. Forward, 4. march. If tlie battalion be in march: 1. By the right (or left) flank, 2. march. All face individually, and maintain their relative posi- tions. To halt the battalion and face it to the front: 1. Bat^ talion, 2. halt, 3. left (or right), 4. face. To resume the march in line: 1. By the left (or right) flank, 2. march, 3. Guide center. To Break into Column of Fours from the Right or Left, ta March to the Left or Right. 284. Being in line at a halt: 1. Column of fours, 2. Break from the right (or left) to march to the left (or right), 3. march. The captain of the right company commands: 1. Right forward, 2. Fours right. The company moves in column of fours to the front ; the captain commands : 1. Column left, 2. march, when the leading four has advanced company distance; the guide then directs his march parallel to the front of the battalion. Each of the other companies executes the same movements in time to follow at proper dis- tance in rear of the preceding company. 285. Being in column of fours, at the commands : 1. File closers on the left (or right) flank, 2. march, the captains, guides, adjutant, sergeant major, and file closers change to the opposite flank. 286. The battalion being in column of fours, halts, advances, obliques, changes direction, marches by the flank and to the rear, forms column of twos and files, and reforms in column of twos and fours, the same as a company, substituting in the commands battalion foi company. SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. lor Being in Column of Fours, to Form Line to the Right or Left. 281. 1. Fours right (or left), 2. march, 3. Battalion, HALT. The command halt is given as the fours unite in line. If the battalion be not halted, the major commands : Guide center, as the fours unite in line. Genera! Rules for Successive Formations. 288. Successive formations include formations, either into line or column, in which the several subdivisions arrive in their places successively. (a) In all successive formations into line, except for- mations by two movements, the adjutant or sergeant- major at the head of the column or nearest the point of rest posts on the line opposite its right and left files, the- two guides of the company first to arrive. The guides^ face toward the point of rest ; if the formation be cen- tral, they are posted on the line, in front of the leading company, facing each other. (b) In all formations from a halt, the guides are posted at the preparatory command indicating the direction in which the line is to extend ; if marching, they hasten toward the point of rest at the preparatory command, and are posted at the command march. (c) In the formations on right (or left) into line, the first guide is posted company distance to the right (or left) of the head of the column. (d) In thf: formations front into line, the guides are posted company distance in front of the head of the column. (e) In the deployments, they are posted against the leading company, in front of the head of the column. (/) In changes of front, the first guide is posted com- pany distance to the right of the first or left of the fourth company , according as the change of front is to the right or left. 108 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. (0 In any formation where it is prescribed that the g*uides are to be posted company distance from the coJ- nmn or line, they may be posted at a less distance when necessary. (/i) The line is prolonged as in forming the battalion ; the guides are assured by the adjutant or sergeant major nearest the point of rest, or by both, if the for- mation be central ; the companies are halted near the line and dressed up to the guides toward the point of rest. {{) When the line is to be formed facing to the rear, the guides are so posted as to permit the leading com- pany to pass between them, after which the second guide closes to a little less than company distance from the first. The guides of the other companies follow the same rule. (Jc) When the principles of successive formations are well understood the guides may be required to post themselves. (Z) The major commands : 1. Guides, 2. posts, at the completion of all successive formations into line. (m) In successive formations, should the major de- sire to commence firing, pending the completion of the movement, he instructs the captains as to the kind of fire ; the adjutant or sergeant major at the head of the column cautions the guides not to take post marking the line. Being in Column of Fours, to Form on Right or Left, into Line. 289. Being at a halt : 1. On right (or left) into line^ 2. IVtARCH. The captains of companies in rear of the first com- mand : Forward. The first company executes on right into line (Par. 208). Each of the other captains commands : 1. On right into line, 2. march, when his leading four is nearly op- posite its place in line. SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 109 If marching, the captains of companies in rear of the first omit the command forward. Being in Column of Fours, to Form Front into Line. 390. Being at a halt : 1. Right (or left) front into line^ 2. MARCH. h At the first com- mand the captain of the first com- pany commands : 1. Right front into line, 2. Double time; the captain of the second com- pany commands : 1. Forward, 2. Col- umn right ; the other captains : 1. Forward, 2. Col- umn half right. The first com- pany executes f ! S 1 1 \ 1 i i 1 « i i 1 1 PI. 45, Par. 290. / right front into line in double time (Par. 210). The captain of the second company conducts it opposite the left of its place in line, changes direction to the left, and commands: 1. Right front into line, 2. Double time, 3. march, when at company distance from the line. The other captains conduct their com- panies to a point at twice company distance in rear of the left of their places in line, change direction half left, and when at company distance from the line conform to what is explained for the captain of the second company. If marching, the captains of companies in rear of the first omit the command /oricard. 110 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. Front into line may be executed in a direction oblique to that of the column by first causing the leading com- pany to execute a partial change of direction. The line is formed at right angles to the new direction of the leading company. The other companies are, if possi- ble, so conducted as to arrive opposite their places, at twice company distance in rear of the line. To Form Front into Line Faced to the Rear. 291. 1. Right {or left) front into line faced to the rear, 2. MARCH. Executed as ex- plained, except that each captain halts his company just beyond the line ; all the fours having arrived in line, the captain wheels his com- pany to the left about by fours, halts it, and dress- es it to the right. 292. In forming line faced to the rear the fours This wheel about toward the point of rest. rule is general. Being in Column of Fours, to Form Line by Two Movements. 293. In forming line by two movements the command march is given as the head r of a company is about to change direction. The adjutant or sergeant major at the PI. 46, Par. 291. column assures the positions SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. Ill of the guides of the rear companies, in prolongation of the line of the leading companies. 4 Part of the Column Having Changed Direction to the Right, to Form Line to the Left. 294. 1. Fours left, 2. Rear companies left front into line, 3. march. The companies that have changed direction wheel by fours to the left ; each captain halts his company as the fours unite in line. The rear companies execute left front Hnto line, as prescribed. To Form Line Faced to the Right. 295. 1. Fours right, 2. Rear companies left front into line, faced to the rear, 3. march The companies that have changed direction wheel by fours to the right and halt. The rear companies execute left front into line, faced to the rear. 296. If the column has changed direction to the left, to form line to the right : 1. Fours right, 2. Rear com- panies right front into line, 3. march. To Form Line to the Left. 297. 1. Fours left, 2. Rear companies right front into line, faced to the rear, 3. march. Being in Line, to Form Column of Companies to the Right or Left and Halt. 298. 1. Companies right {ov left), 2. march. Each company executes the turn and halt (Par. 192). Full distance in column of subdivisions is such that in forming line to the right or left the subdivisions will 112 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. have their proper intervals ; in column of companies it is company distance and three paces. Being in line, to form Column of Com- ponies without Halting, 299. 1. Companies, 2. Right (or left) turn, 3. march, 4. Forward, 5. MARCH, 6. Guide {right or left). Each company executes the turn and advance. The fifth command is given when all the companies have completed the turn. 800. In column of subdivisions the guide of the leading subdivision is charged with the step and direction; the guides in rear pre- ^ojr_ serve the trace, step, and distance. Whenever a guide is forced out of the direc- tion, he recovers it gradually; the guides in rear conform successively to his move- ments. Whenever the guide in column is changed, the adjutant and sergeant major, unless otherwise directed, pass by the most convenient line to the opposite flank. These rules are general. Being in Line, to break by the Right or Left of Companies to the R^ar into Column. ‘‘(J 301. 1. Right (or left) of companies rear into column, 2. march. Each captain commands: 1. Fours right, 2. Column right. Each captain halts on the line lately oc- Pi- 48, Par. 301. PI. 47, Par. 298. SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 113 cupied by the front rank and as his rear four passes him, forms line to the left, halts his company, and dresses it to the left. Marching in Column of Fours, to Form Com- panies Successively to the Right or Left into column at full distance. 302. 1. Column of companies ^ 2. First company, d. Fours right (or left), 4. MARCH, 5. Guide right (or left). The leading company executes fours right. The other companies continue the march in col- umn of fours ^and success! ve- fly form line to PI. 49, Par. 302. the right and move forward on the same . ground as the leading company. ^ Marching in Column of Companies at Full Dis- tance, to Form the Companies Successively to the Right or Left into Column of Fours. 303. 1. Column of fours, 2. First com- a pany, 3. Fours right (or left), 4. march. The leading company executes fours right. The other companies continue the march in column of companies and suc- ^ cessively form column of fours to the PI. 50, Par. 303. right, on the same ground as the leading company. 114 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. Being in Line, io Break by Companies from the Right or Left to March to the Left or Right. 304. Being at a halt : 1. Companies break from the right (or left) to march to the left (or right), 2. march. The captain of the first company com- mands: l.jFor- ward,2. Guide left. The right company moves for- ward, thecap- MARCH, when the PI. 51, Par. 304. tain commanding ; 1. Left turn, guide has advanced company distance ; the left guide then directs his march parallel to the front of the bat- talion. Each of the other companies executes the same move- ments in time to follow the preceding company at full distance. To March in Column at Full Distance. 305. 1. Forward, 2. Guide {right or left), 3. march. To make a slight change of direction, the major com- mands : Incline to the right (or left), and indicates the now line of direction ; the leading guide gradually ad- vances the left shoulder, his subdivision conforming to his movements. The rear subdivisions execute the change of direction on the same ground and in the same manner as the leading one. To Halt the Column. 306. 1. Battalion, 2. halt. The column halts, and the guides stand fast, although they may have lost distance and be out of the direction of the guides in front. SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 115 To Face the Column to the Rear, and to March it to the Rear. 807. 1. Fours right (or left) about, 2. march, 3. Bat- talion, 4. HALT ; or, 8. Guide {right or left). If the companies are unequal in size, each captain assists his guide to gain the trace and distance by ob- liquing his company when necessary, causing it to lengthen or shorten the step. Being in Column at Full Distance, to Change Direction. 308. Being in march : 1. Column right (or left), or, 1. V Column half right (or half left), 2. MARCH. The chief of the first subdivi- sion commands : Right turn. The leading subdivision turns to the right, the chief adding : 1. Forward, 2. march, upon its completion (see Par. 228). The other subdivisions march squarely up to the turning point and each changes direction by the same commands and means PI. 52, Par. 308. as the first. t To Put the Column in March and Change Direction at the Same Time. 809. 1. Forward, 2. Guide right (or left), 8. Column right {or left) ; or, 8. Column half right {or half left), 4. MARCH. Being in Column at Full Distance, to Form Line to the Right or Left. 310. The guides on the side toward which the move- ment is to be made covering at full distance, to form line and halt : 1. Companies right (or left), 2. march, 3. Guides, 4. posts. At the first command the left guide of the leading company places himself facing the leading guide of the column, nearly company distance in front of him, so as 116 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. to be opposite one of the left files of his company when the movement is completed ; the guide is assured in his position by the adjutant or sergeant major ; each cap- tain places himself facing to the front, on the right of his company, and verifies the alignment. At the command posts, the guides return to their posts in line. To form line and advance : 1. Companies, 2. Right (or left) turn, 3. march, 4. Guide center, 5. Forward^ 6. MARCH. The sixth command is given when all the companies have completed the turn. 311. Being in column at full distance at a halt, if the guides do not cover or have not their proper distances, to correct them the major establishes the guide of the leading' company and the guide next in rear in the desired direction, and commands : 1. Right (or left) guides, 2. cover. The right guides place themselves covering the first two, each at full distance from the guide next in front ; the adjutant and sergeant major assure their positions ; the major then commands : 1. Right (or left), 2. dress. Each captain aligns his company on the guide and commands : front. Should any company be at a considerable distance from its guide, the captain gives the preparatory com- mands for moving it into place, adding : march, at the command dress from the major. Being in Column at Full Distance, to Form on Right or Left nfo Line. 812. Being in march : 1. On right (or left) into line, 2. MARCH. The captain of the first company commands : Right turn, and when the company has advanced to the guides halts it. The other companies continue the march, each captain SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 117 giving the commands : 1. Right turn, 2. march, upon arriving opposite the right of his place in line. Being at a halt at the first command, captains of companies in rear of the first command : 1 . Forivard, 2. Guide right. Being in Column at Full Distance, to Form Front Into Line. 313. Being at a halt; 1, Right {or left) front into line, 2. march. The captain of the first com- pany com- mands; 1. Forward, 2. Guide left, the captain of the sec- ond ; 1. Right forward, 2. Fours right, the other cap- tains; 1. Fours right, 2. CoU umn half left. The first company advances to the guides, is halted and dressed to the left. The sec- ond company, vs^hen near the line, executes column right, and w^hen opposite its place, fours left; is halted and dressed to the left. PI. 54, Par. 313. 118 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. The other companies on nearing the line change direction half right and complete the movement as pre- scribed for the second company. If marching, the captain of the first company omits the command forward^ and changes the guide if necessary. 314. To form faced to the rear, the major adds /aced to the rear after front into line. Executed as above, except that the companies march just beyond the line, halt and wheel about by fours, halt, and dress toward the point of rest. To Change Front. 315. Being in line : 1. Change front on first (or fourth) company^ 2. Companies, 3. _ Right {pv left) half \ turn, 4. MARCH, 5. Guide right (or \ V left). The first com- pany executes \ right turn. 'v The other com- \ panics execute right half turn ; each cap- tain again commands: Right half tur7i, 2. march, when the right of his company is opposite its place in line. 316. The change of front effected by wheeling by fours forming front into line. 317. To change front faced to the rear, the major adds faced to the rear to the command change front on first (or may be and PL 55, Par. 315. SCHOOL OF the BATTALION. 119 fourth) company. The movement is executed as just explained, except that the companies are marched across the line, halted just beyond it, wheeled about by fours, halted, and dressed as before. 318. The major may direct the guides to be posted in an oblique direction ; the movement will be executed in the same manner, the designated company conforming to the line established by the guides. To March in Route Step and at Ease. 319. To march in the route step and at ease and to re- sume the attention are executed as prescribed in the School of the Company. When marching in column of subdivisions the guides maintain the trace and distance. In route marches the major, adjutant, and sergeant major march at the head of the column; the surgeon and hospital steward at the rear of the column ; the other staff and non-commissioned staff officers, wherever the major directs ; the band in front of the leading com- pany ; the captains at the head or rear of their com- panies, as directed by the major. Being in Line, to Advance in Line of Companies in Columns of Fours. 320. 1. Companies, 2. Bight (or left) forward, 3. Fours right (or left), 4. march, 5. Guide {right, left or tenter). Each company executes right forward, fours right; the guides preserve the interval necessary to form front into line, and march abreast of the guide indicated. 321. The line of columns of fours is put in march, halted, marched to the rear, and at the oblique by the same commands and means as the battalion in line. Marching in Line of Companies in Columns of Fours, to Gain Ground to the Right or Left and Front. 322. 1. Companies, 2. Column half right (ov half left), 3. MARCH. 120 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. /■ To resume the original direction : 1 . Companies, 2, Column half left (or half right), 3. march. The companies regulate their movements by those of the com- pany toward which the movement is made, as when ob- liquing. On resum- ing the direct march the guide is again announced. Marching in Line of Companies in Columns of Fours, h Change Direction. PL 56, Par. 322. 823. 1. Change direction to the right (or left), 2. MARCH, 3. Battalion, 4. halt; or, 3. Guide (right, left, or center). SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 121 The first company changes direction to the right; the other companies are conducted by the shortest line to their places abreast of the first. If marching in double time or in quick time and the command be double time, the captain of the first company cautions : Quick time ; the other companies execute the movement in double time, and on arriving abreast of the first company their captains command : 1. Quick time, 2. march. During the movement the guide is on the side toward which the change is made ; on its completion the major announces the guide. If the command halt be given during the execution of the movement, only those companies halt that have arrived in place ; the others successively halt upon arriving on the line. Marching in Line of Companies in Columns of Fours, to Form Line. 324. 1. Companies, 2. Right (or left) front into line, 3. MARCH. 4. Battalion, 5. halt. Each company executes right front into line. The command halt is given when the leading fours have advanced company distance. If executed in double time, the major announces the guide immediately after the command march. Marching in Column of Fours, to Form Front into Line of Com- panies in Columns of Fours. 325. 1. Right (or left) front into line of companies in columns of fours, 2. march. The captain of the first company cautions : Continue the march ; the other captains" command : Column half right ; the first company having advanced com- pany distance is halted ; when the other companies have gained full intervals they execute column half left, 122 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. .^7 and halt abreast of the first company. If at a halt, each captain gives the commands necessary for pitting his company in march. In advancing in line of columns of fours the intervals between guides at full and close interval are the same as the full and close distance in col- umn. To form at close inter- y'/ y/ val the major adds at /\/ // close interval to the first command ; the movement is executed in the same manner, except that the interval is eight paces. Marching in Column of Fours, to Form on Right or Left into Line of Companies in Columns of Fours. y/ 4 '' ri" 326. 1. On right (or left) into line of com- panies in columns of fours, 2. march. The first company executes column right, J advances company distance and twelve paces in the new direction and is halted; each P . 8, ar. 3 5. other companies marches beyond the preceding company, executes column right when oppo- site its place, and is halted abreast of the first company. If at a halt, captains give the commands necessary for putting their companies in march. Marching in Line of Companies in Columns of Fours, to March in Column of Companies to the Right or Left. 327. 1. Fours right {prleff), 2. Guide {right nr left). SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 123 Being in Column of Companies, to March in Line of Companies in Columns of Fours to the Right or Left. 328. 1. Fours right (or left)^ 2. march, 3. Guide {right, left, or center). Marching in Column of Fours, to March in Line of Companies in Columns of Fours to the Right or Left. 329. 1. Companies, 2. Column, right (or left), 3. MARCH, 4. Guide {right, left, or center). To march again in column of fours : 1. Companies, 2. Column right (or left), 3. march. Being in Column of Companies, to Form Column of Fours and to Form Again in Column of Companies. 330. 1. Companies, 2. Right (or left) forward, 3. Fours right (or left), 4. march. To form again in column : 1. Companies, 2. Right (or left) front into line, 3. march, 4. Battalion ,5. halt; or, if executed in double time, 4. Guide left (or right). The companies execute these movements simultane- ously. 331. All the movements prescribed in Pars. 319 to 330 may be executed by platoons, substituting pZafooTis for companies in the commands and explanations. Advancing in Line of Companies in Columns of Fours, to Close and Extend Intervals. 382. To close intervals : 1. On (such) company close intervals, 2. Battalion, 4. halt, or, 3. Guide {right, left, or center). The captain of the designated company cautions : Continue the march, the captains to the right command: Column half left; those to the left : Column half right. The designated company halts at the fourth com- mand ; the other companies incline toward it until they 124 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. g-ain the close interval, when by command of their cap- taiiw they change direction, half ricrht or half left, march to the front and halt on arriving abreast of the one designated. If marching in double time or in quick time and the command be double time, the captain of the designated com- pany cautions : Quick time ; the other com- panies move in double time, and when they arrive abreast o f t he des- ignated company take quick time. liitervals are extended, gaining ground to the front, on the isame principles: 1. On company extend in- tervals, 2. MARCH, 3. Battalion, 4. halt, or, 3. Guide {right, left, or center). To Close Intervals without Gaining Ground to the Front. 333. The major wheels the battalion by fours into- column of companies, the column is then closed, as in Par. 335, after which the battalion is wheeled by fours into line of columns of fours. Intervals may be extended on the same principles. The battalion is wheeled by fours into close column, and full distance taken as in Par. 336, after which the battalion is wheeled by fours into line of columns of fours. Close Column or in Mass. 334. The distance between companies in close column is eight paces. Whenever a subdivision takes its place in close column, the file closers close to one pace from the rear SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 1^5 rank, falling back to two paces whenever the full dis- tance is again taken. These rules are general, in Column of Companies at Full Distance, and at a Halt, to Form Close Column. 335. 1. Close in mass, 2, Guide right (or left), 3. march. The captain of the first company cautions: Stand fast, the other captains command: 1. Forward, 2. Guide right. The rear companies move forward; each is halted when it arrives at eight paces from the one that pre- cedes it; each captain establishes his guide and dresses his company to the right. If marching, the major omits the com- mand for the guide and the captains of the ^ ^ rear companies omit the conimands for put- ting them in march. — — ‘ At the command march,t\\e. first company --w is halted. If marching in quick time, and the com- mand be double time, the captain of the first company cautions it to advance in quick time; each of the other captains com- t: — - ' mands: 1. Quick time. 2. march, upon closing to eight paces. If marching in double time, the move- ment is executed in the same manner ; the captain of the first company commands : ^ Quick time, at the first command of the Pi. 60, Par. 335. major. To arrest the march during the execution of the movement: 1. Battalion, 2. halt. Only those companies halt that have closed to eight paces ; the other companies halt successively at the commands of their captains, upon closing to eight paces. To close the column on the rearmost company, the major wheels the battalion about by fours; the column 126 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. IS then closed as before; when closed, the battalion w a^ain wheeled about by fours. Being in Close Column, to Take Full Distance. 336. Being at a halt: 1. Take full distance, 2. Guide riaht (ov left), d. march. ,, The captain of the first company commands: i. k or- ward, 2. Guide right. _ rnrwnrd Each of the other captains commands . 1. Forwara, 2. Guide right, 3. march, when his company is at lull ^‘ifTarehing, the major omits the command for the/ ^'if^marching in quick time the captain? of the com- panies in rear of the first haltthern at the command marcA, and put them in march as abo^ explained. If marching in quick time and the command be double time, the captain of the first company corn- mands double time, the other captains caution their rmpaniesto continue the quick time, and successively command: 1 . Double tMe 2. march, when at full dis- marching in double time, the first compny ad- va^esln double time; the captains of the other com- panies command: Quick time, at the first f the major, and successively command: 1. Double nme, 2 MARCH when at full distance. ,-,11 * • To form line to or on the right or left, the majo. first causes the column to take full distance. To Ploy into Close Column. 337 Close column is always ployed with the desig “ nearest the desig- „a« cSw place. guide and assures the position of the other ^uides. SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. Being in Line, to Ploy into Close Column. 127 PI. 61, Par. 338. tvlri T^GuidJ company commands : 1. For- and^dressed halted fours Tight. ’ <^«'“Panies execute The captain of the second com- pany halts in rear of the left of the first, and when his rear four passes him, forms line company, establishes his left e-uide eight paces in rear of the left guide of the first and dresses his company to the lett. ’ The other companies incline to the right and each marches by the shortest line to a point eight paces in guide of the preceding company mclines to the left and executes '.vhat has been prescribed for the second company. ^ scuoeu roi The closed column is ployed on the fourth company £ tS"t " ““ captain of the designated company ' S"L'4Sed.' is ex^ Being in Column of Fours, to Ploy into Close Column, Faced to the Front Colu„n first company executes column right and the eading guide having advanced twelve paces in the new 125 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. direction, the captain halts and as his rear four passes him, forms line to the left, halts the company, and dresses it to the left. Each of the other companies moves forward and executes column right, so as to enter the column eight paces in rear of the preceding company, forms line to the left and is dressed to the left. If at a halt, each captain gives the commands necessary to put his com- pany in march. Close column may be formed in an ^ oblique direction on the same principles y by substituting the command : 3. CoZ- umn half inght (or half left), for 3. CoU PL 62, Par. 339. umn right (or left). 340. To form the close column faced to the rear, the major adds : Faced to the rear after close column, in his commands. The movement is executed as just explained, except that the companies in rear of the first successively enter the column beyond the point where the first changed direction, and each cap- tain forms his company in line to the right or left and dresses it to the right or left according as the company changed direction to the right or left. Being in Column of Fours, to Ploy into Close Column, Faced to the Right or Left. 341. 1. Close column, 2. First com^ pany, 3. Fours right (or left), 4. march. The first company executes fours right, the captain commands : Guide PL 63, Par. 340. right, and the company having ad- vanced eight paces in the new direction is halted an^ SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 121 ) dressed to the ti right ; the other t companies form close column as prescribed in Par. 338. PI. 64, Par. 341. If at a halt, captains give tne commands necessary for putting their companies in march. Being in Close Column, to Form Column of Fours. 342. Being at a halt : 1. Column of fours, 2. First company, 3. Bight (or left) forivard, 4. Fours right (ol left), 5. MARCH. The first company executes right forward, fours right. Each of the other companies executes the same move ment in time to follow the one preceding. The major may command : 1. Columns of fours, % First (or Fourth) company, 3. Fours right (or left), 4. MARCH. The designated company executes fours right. Each of the other companies executes fours right, or right forward, fours right, in time to follow the one preceding. Movements in Close Column. 343. A Ciose column advances, halts, obliques, marches by the flank and resumes the march in column, faces to the rear, marches to the rear, changes direction, gains ground to the right or left when marching by the flank and resumes the original direction by the same com- mands and means as a column at full distance. Being in Close Column, to Change Direction by the Flank. 344. 1. Change direction by the right {or left) flank, 2. Fours right (or left), 3. march. The captain of the first company commands ; 1. Bight forward, 2. Fours right. 130 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. The first company executes right forte ard, fours right ; the captain, as the rear four completes its wheel to the front, forms the company in line to the left, halts it and dresses it to the left. The other companies execute fours right and direct their march so as to enter the new column eight paces in rear of and parallel to the first company ; each captain halts when opposite the left guide of the preceding company and allows his company to march past him, forms it in line to the left and dresses it to the left. The first company may, by order of the major, be in- clined at any angle to the original front. By this method any direction may be given to a close column. 345. The close column marching by the flank changes direction by the same commands and means as when at full intervals (Par. 323). To Deploy the Close Column. 346. Being at a halt: 1. Deploy column, 2. Foursright (or left), 8, MARCH. . H k . The captain of ^ ^ ^ I j i I the first company 1 j I I cautions : Stand x T* ^ j I fast. ~ ^ The first com- pany is dressed to PI. 66, Par. 346. the left: the other companies execute fours right; each captain halts when three paces beyond the right of the preceding company, and as the rear of his company passes him, wheels it by fours to the left, halts it near the line and dresses it to the left. SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 131 If marching, the captain of the first company halts it at the command march; the movement is executed as before. 347. To deploy the column faced to the rear without first causing it to wheel about by fours, the major adds the command: Faced to the rear, after deploy column. The movement is executed as already explained, except that each company marches just beyond the line, halts, and then wheels about by fours, after which it is dressed toward the point of rest. Movements by Platoons. 348. The major may form the battalion in column of platoons to the right or left, form line from column of platoons to the right or left, form column of fours from column of platoons, and the reverse, by the commands and means prescribed in the School of the Company. Being m Column of Companies, at Full Distance, to Break into Column of Platoons. 349. 1. Righi (or left) hy platoons, 2. march, 3. Guide left (or right). Executed by each company as in Par. 235. 350. To reform the companies: 1. Form companies, 2. Right (or left) oblique, 3. march, 4. Battalion, 5. halt; or, 4. Guide left (or right). Executed by each company, as in Par. 236, except that when executed in quick time the chiefs of the leading platoons do not halt them till the command halt from the major. 351. Distances are taken and closed in column of pla- toons as in column of companies. Being in March in Column of Platoons, to Form on Right or Left into Line. 352. 1. On right (or left) into line, 2. march. 132 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. The first company executes on right into line (Par. 234), halting at the guides (Par. 288, a and c) ; the other companies marcli beyond the first, each captain com- manding : 1, On right into liney 2. march, upon arriving opposite his place in line. If executed from a halt, the captains of companies in rear of the first command : 1. Forward, 2. Guide right. Marching in Column of Platoons, to Form Front into Line. 353. 1. Right (or left) front into line, 2. march. The captain of the first company commands : 1. Form company, 2. Right oblique ; the other captains com- mand : Column half right. The first company is halted and dressed to the left against the guides ; each of the other companies executes column half right, advances in the new direction until the left of its first platoon is opposite its place in line, when the company changes direction half left, and when at platoon distance from the line forms company as prescribed for the first com- pany. If executed from a halt, the captains of companies in rear of the first command: 1. Forward, 2. Guideleft, 8. Column half right. To Form Line of Platoon Columns. 354. A platoon column is a company in column of platoons. The full interval between companies in line of platoon columns is platoon front and three paces ; the close in- terval is eight paces ; full interval is taken unless close is specified in the commands. 355. Advancing in line of platoon columns, intervals are closed and extended by the commands and means prescribed in Par. 332. To close intervals without gaining ground to the Vont: 1. On (such) company, close intervals, 2. march. SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 133 The designated company stands fast. Each of the other companies moves by the flank to- ward the designated company, inclining slightly to the rear, and when at twelve paces from the preceding company is wheeled by fours to the front and halted and dressed on the line of the designated company. Intervals are extended on the same principles. Being in Line to Advance in Line of Platoon Columns with Full Intervals. 356. 1. Companies, 2. Right (or left) by platoons, 3. MARCH, 4. Guide {right, left, or center). The captains ^ g announce the guide on the flank toward the base com- pany ; if the guide be cen- ter, the captain PI. 67, Par. 356. of the right center company cautions : Guide left. 357. The line of platoon columns advances, halts, faces to the rear, marches to the rear, and changes direction by the same commands and means as pre- scribed for a line of columns of fours. Being in Line of Platoon Columns, to Form Line. 358. 1. Form companies, 2. Right (or left) oblique, 3. MARCH, 4. Battalion, 5. halt, or 4. Guide center. Executed by each company as in Par. 236. If executed in double time, the major commands : Guide center, as soon as the rear platoons arrive on the line. Being in Line of Platoon Columns, to Form Column of Com-- panies to the Right or Left. 359. 1. Platoons {right ov left), 2. march. 134 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. Being in Column of Companies at Full Distance, to Form Line of Platoon Columns to the Right or Left. 360. 1. Platoons right (or left), 2. march. M archin'* in Line of Platoon Columns, to Form Column of Pla- toons to the Right or Left. 361. 1. Companies, 2. Column right (or left), 3. MARCH, 4. Guide right (or left). To march ag-ain in line of platoon columns : 1. Com- panies, 2. Column right (or left), 3. march, 4. Guide (right, left, or center). Being in Column of Platoons to Form on Right or Left into Line of Platoon Columns. 362. 1. On right (or left) into line of platoon columns, 2. MARCH. The first company changes direction to the right, and when the leading platoon has advanced company dis- tance, the captain commands : 1. Company, 2. HALT. riTTi' PI. 68, Par. 362. Each of the other companies marches beyond the preceding company, changes direction, and forms on its [^ft at the proper interval. SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 135 Being in Column of Platoons, to Form Front into Line of Platoon Columns. PI. 69, Par. 363. ; ■ • n r I 363. 1. Right (or j ; ! j left) front into p I platoon I ! i 1 columns. 2. I I I I ’ / I / I MARCH. / / / The first com^ / y' / pany advances / / company dis- / / / tance, is halted ' / / and dressed to / the left ; each / of the other com- / panies execute? y column half right, advances in the new direc' tion until the left of its first pla- toon is opposite its place in line, when the company changes direc- tion half left, and when abreast of the first company is halted and dressed to the left. To March the Line of Platoon Columns by the Flank. 364. 1. Fours right (or left), 2. MARCH, 3. Guide right (or left). To march again in line of platoon columns : 1. Fours 'tight (or left), 2. march, 3. Guide right {left, or center). Marching by the Flank, to Form Line of Companies in Columns of Fours. 365. 1. Platoons, 2. Column right (or left), 3. march* 4. Guide {right, left or center). 1S6 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. Being in Corumn of Fours, to Form Front into Line of Platoon Columns. 366. 1. Right (or left) front columns, 2. march into line of platoon 4 :-"’ i/ / PI. 70, Par. 366. The first com- pany executes pla- toons right front into Zmc (Par.243). The second com- pany executes col- I ^ j z' umn right ; when its leading- guide is opposite his place in line, column left ; and when at platoon distance from the line, pZa- toons right front into line. The other companies execute column half right, move by the shortest line to a point company plus platoon distance in rear of the left of their places in line, where they change direction half left, and at platoon distance from the line execute platoons right front into line. To Form Street Column. 367. Being in column of companies at full distance : 1. Street column, 2. march. The first company halts and stands fast ; the second forms in column of fours, four paces in rear of the right four of the first com- pany; the third forms similarly in rear of the left four of the fiTst company ; the fourth company closes upon the second and third ; all the officers, the color guard, non- commissioned staff, guides, and file closers take post SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 13 ^/ within the column, captains opposite the centers of their companies, the others near their posts in line or column. Being in column of fours : 1. Street column, 2. Right (or left) front into line, 3. march. The first and fourth companies execute right front into line, and the forma- tion is completed as prescribed. The numbers of the companies remain unchanged till column of companies or fours is again formed. If there be but three companies in the battalion, the first and second platoons of the second company exe- cute what is prescribed for the second and third com- panies, and the third company closes upon the second. With five companies, the platoons of the fourth company form in rear of the second and third com- panies, as above prescribed for the platoons of the second company, and the fifth company closes upon the fourth. With six companies, the fourth company forms col- umn of fours and follows the second, the fifth follows the third, and the sixth closes upon the fourth and fifth. The street column advances, obliques, changes direc- tion, halts, and marches by the flank and to the rear by the same commands and means as a column at full dis- tance ; in marching by the flank the flank companies oblique sufficiently to follow in rear of the flank fours of the leading company, the right or left front rank man of the leading company acts as guide, and in changing direction the rear company regulates its movements on the companies in columns of fours. To Form Square. Being in street column : 1. Form square, 2. march. The leading company halts or stands fast ; the right and left flank companies wheel by fours to the right and left, respectively, and halt ; the rear company ex- ecutes about face. 138 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. To form again in street column: 1. Street column y 2. MARCH. The company that was leading when the square was formed stands fast ; the rear company executes about face ; the right and left flank companies wheel by fours to the left and right, and halt ; they regain their posi- tions when the column marches. Being in street column, to form column of companies at full distance : 1. Column of comimnies, 2. march, 3. Guide right (or left). The first company advances, the flank companies execute front into line in double time, each when at full distance from the preceding company, and the rear company advances when at full distance. Officers, guides, etc., return to their posts. The street column forms column of fours by the com- mands prescribed in Par. 342. The designated com- pany executes the movement, the other companies take their proper places in column of fours, with file closers on the same flank as in the designated company. Officers, guides, etc., resume their posts in column. EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT. 139 EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT. 368. The regiment is supposed to consist of three battalions, but the rules prescribed are applicable to a less or greater number. The colonel is the instructor. Posts of Field Officers, Regimental Staff, Non-commissioned Staff, and Band. 369. In line, and in line of columns, the colonel is posted sixty paces in front of the line, opposite its cen- ter ; in line of masses, this distance is reduced to thirty paces ; in column, he habitually marches at the head of the regiment. 2°MAJ LT^COL « — PI. 71, Par. 369. In line, in line of columns, or in line of masses, the lieutenant-colonel is posted on a Ime with the majors, opposite the right of the first battalion ; in column, he is on the side of the guide, abreast of and twenty paces from the head ; during field movements and on the march, he is not restricted to any particular post ; he acts as an assistant to the colonel as the latter may direct. The adjutant rides on the left of the colonel ; the other staff officers ride six paces in rear of the colonel, in the order of rank, the senior on the right. Mounted trumpeters and orderlies ride three paces in rear of the staff. 140 EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT. In line, the band is posted with the left of its front rank twenty-four paces to the right of the first battalion. In the evolutions, it takes, as far as practicable, the positions prescribed in the School of the Battalion, un- less excused or a position is assigned to it by the colonel. In line, the non-commissioned staff, the sergeant major on the light, form at one pace apart, abreast of the front rank of the band, the sergeant major six paces from its left. In route marches, the colonel and staff march at the head of the column, the non-commissioned staff in their rear, or in rear of the mounted trumpeters and order- lies ; the band in rear of the non-commissioned staff. The colonel ma 3 ^ direct a surgeon to march in rear of the regiment, or if there be a sufficient number, one in rear of each battalion. The quartermaster and quarter- master sergeant are usually with the train ; the hos- pital stewards with the ambulances in rear of the regi- ment. General Rules for Commands. 370. The colonel’s commands are given orally, by the trumpet, or communicated by staff officers or orderlies. The majors, unless otherwise directed, repeat the com- mands of the colonel as soon as given ; and add such commands and cause their battalions to execute such movements as may be necessary before the general movement. Each major gives the commands necessary to insure the execution of the movements by his battalion at the proper time. After the general movement, each major adds such commands as may be necessary to complete the move- ment in his battalion, such as guides posts, etc. The colonel may preface his commands by : 1. Battal- ions, 2. ATTENTION. He ma.y permit battalions to stand at ease, while awaiting the completion of the gen- eral movement by other battalions. EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT. 141 When the regiment is in more than one line, if a movement is to be executed by one of the lines, first line, second line, or third line, is specified in the prepara- tory command of the colonel; the battalion commanders in the designated line repeat the commands of the colonel. When the formation will admit of the simultaneous execution of movements by battalions, the colonel may have them execute the movements prescribed in the School of the Battalion by prefixing the command Bat- talions to the commands therein prescribed. When the formation will admit of the simultaneous execution of movements by companies or platoons, the movements are executed as in the School of the Bat- talion, thv, colonel giving the commands prescribed for the major, except that in announcing the guide, in line and in line of columns, he commands : (Such) the base battalion. The colonel maj^ designate a battalion to execute a separate movement by prefixing the command : (Such) battalion to the commands prescribed in the School of the Battalion. Formation of the Regiment. 371. The regiment is formed by battalions, in line, in line of platoon columns, or in line of masses, at the dis- cretion of the colonel. It may also be formed in separate lines in any of the above formations. At reviews and other forms of ceremony, the battal- ions are posted from right to left, according to the rank of battalion commanders present, the senior on the right. A battalion whose major is in command of the regiment, retains its place. On other occasions the bat- talions are posted at the discretion of the colonel. The interval between battalions in line or in line of masses is twenty-four paces. In whatever direction the regiment faces, the battal- ions are designated from the right when in line, and U2 EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT. tlie head when in column, first battalion, second hat talion, and so on. If in two lines, the battalions in the first line are desig'nated from the right, first and second ; in the second line, third, and so on. To receive the regiment, the colonel takes post, fac- ing the line. The adjutant indicates to the adjutant of the base battalion the point of rest and the direction of the line, then takes post facing the line, about thirty paces in front of the center. The lieutenant-colonel and non-commissioned staff take post as the last battalion is formed. The formation completed, the adjutant commands : 1. Battalions, 2. ATTENTION, presents the regiment to the colonel as ex- plained for presenting a battalion, and takes post with the colonel, passing by his right. To Open and Close Ranks. 372. Being m line, at a halt: 1. Open ranks, 2. MARCH. To close ranks : 1. Close ranks, 2. march. Executed in each battalion (Pars. 263 and 264), regulating on the first battalion . Firings. 373. The firings are conducted by the battalion com- manders (Pars. 265 to 268) under the direction of the colonel. The colonel, lieutenant-colonel, and staff pass to the rear of the line. Rests. 374. Executed as in the School of the Battalion (Par. 269). To resume attention : 1. Battalions, 2. attention. 375. To dismiss the regiment : 1. Dismiss your baU talions. Each major conducts his battalion to its parade ground, where it is dismissed as prescribed. EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT. 143 To Advance. 376. Being in line, the colonel gives the commands prescribed in the School of the Battalion for advanc- ing in line of columns. The major of the base battalion adds : Guide center; the other majors announce the guide toward the base bat- talion, and regulate the march of their battalions upon it. To reform the line, the colonel gives the same com- mands as a battalion commander, substituting hattah ions, halt, for battalion, halt. To advance a short distance in line : 1. (Such) the base battalion, 2. Forivard, 3. march. At the command forward, each major adds : Guide center. The majors regulate the march of their battalions upon the base battalion. To Face the Line to the Rear. 377. 1. Face to the rear, 2. Fours right (or left) about, 3 MARCH. Each major halts his battalion as the fours unite in line. To March the Line to the Rear. 378. \. Fours right {ov left) about, 2. march, 3. (Such) the base battalion. The majors add: Guide center, the instant the about is completed. To Halt the Regiment, 379. 1. Battalions, 2, halt. Alignments 380. Being at a halt, to give a general alignment, the colonel selects a base company, posts its guides at the point of rest, in the desired direction and commands : 1. Guides on the line, 2, On the center {right or left), 3. DRESS. At the first command, the guides of each company 144 EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT. post themselves as in forming the battalion, taking care to preserve the intervals. At the command dress, each battalion is dressed as in Par. 280. Each major commands : 1. Guides, 2. POSTS, as soon as his battalion is dressed. If a battalion be at a considerable distance from or in front of the position it is to occupy, its major will, at Mie first command, move it to its proper position fo*faressing. Being in Line, to March by the Flank. 381. 1. Fours right {oY left), 2. march. Being in Line at a Halt, to Break into Column of Fours from the Right or Left to March to the Left or Right. 382. 1. Column of fours, 2. Break from the right (or left) to march to the left (or right), 3. march. The first battalion executes the movement (Par. 284)* the other battalions follow successively at the commands of their majors, each twenty-four paces in rear of the one preceding. 383. The regiment, in column of fours, forms line to the right or left, advances, obliques, changes direction and marches to the rear, as prescribed for the battalion. 381. The movements from column of fours are ex- plained for execution on the march, but may be exe- cuted from a halt. Successii^e Formations. 385. The adjutant or sergeant major of each battalion precedes it on the line to indicate the point of rest. The guides of the leading company of the base bat- talion are first established. The guides of the leading companies of the rear bat- talions are established facing the point of rest of the general line, the nearest guide being twenty-four paces from the flank of the battalion next preceding. Distance, when forming two or more lines or column EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT. 145 of battalions, is the front of the battalion in line and twenty-four paces. This may be increased or diminished, the colonel adding to his first command : At (so many) paces distance; or, the colonel may send orders specifying the distance to the commanders of the second and third lines, or send a staff officer to indicate the points of rest. When in two lines, the second line, in all maneuvers, preserves its position relative to the first, and con- forms to its movements. Marching in Column of Fours, to Form in Two Lines to the Right or Left. 386. 1. In two lines, 2. Fours right (or left), 3. Third (or such) battalion, second line, 4. march. PI. 72, Par. 386. The first and second battalions form line to the right ^nd halt. The third battalion inclines to the left until it gains the required distance, when it resumes the original direction, and is formed in line to the right and halted with its center in rear of the center of the first line. To March again in Column of Fours. 387. 1. Column of fours, 2. First line, 3. Fours right (or left), 4. MARCH. 146 EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT. Tiie battalion commander of the second line com- mands ; 1. Fours right, 2. march, in time to follovi' the preceding battalion at the proper distance. The battalion is marched by the shortest line to its place in column. Being in Column of Fours, to Form on Right or Left into Line. 388. 1. On right (or left) into line, 2. march. Tiie leading battalion executes on right into line ; the other battalions, at the commands of their majors, suc- cessively execute the same movement when their lead- ing fours have passed beyond the left flank of the bat- talion preceding. Being in Column of Fours, to Form in Two Lines on Right or Left 389. 1. In two lines, 2. On right (or left) into line, 3. Third (or such) battalion, second line, 4. march. The first and second battalions execute the movement as already explained. The third battalion inclines to the left until it gains its distance, when it resumes the orig- inal direction, and forms on right into line in rear of the center of the first line. Being in Column of Fours, to Form Front into Line. 390. 1. Right (or left) front into line, 2. march. At the first command, the majors of battalions in rear command : Column half right. At the command march, the first battalion executes right front into line. Each of the other majors so marches his battalion that when the head arrives opposite its point of rest it will be at least twice company distance in rear of the line when it changes direction half left, and on arriving at company distance from the line, the battalion executes right front into line. EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT. 147 Being in Column of Fours, to Form Front into Line, Faced to the Rear. 391. Right (or left) front into line faced to the rear, 2. MARCH. The first battalion executes right front into line, faced to the rear ; the others are marched toward their points of rest (Par. 390), and formed right front into line, faced to the rear. 392. Front into line and front into line faced to the rear may also be executed on the rear of the column by first wheeling about by fours and then using the means already explained. Being in Column of Fours, to Form Front into Line, on the Head of a Rear Battalion. 393. 1. On second (or such) battalion, 2. Right {or left) front into line, 3. march. At the second command, the major of the first bat- talion adds : Fours left ; the major of the third : Col- umn half right. At the command march, the second and third bat- talions execute right front into line as previously ex- plained. The first battalion marches twenty-four paces to the left, when the major forms column of fours to the left and immediately after commands : 1. Right front into line, faced to the rear, 2. march. If the third be designated, the second battalion exe- cutes the movements just prescribed for the first, the major of the first wheels his battalion about by fours, changes direction half right, and forms his battalion on the left of the line according to the principles laid down. Being in Column of Fours, to Form Front into Line in Two Lines. 394. 1. In two lines, 2. Right {ov left) front into line, 8. Third (or such) battalion, second line, 4. march. The first and second battalions execute right front 148 EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT. h y i i A A A J I /^ /f/^/ PI. 73, Par. 394. into line as already explained. The third battalion inclines to the right, and forms right front into line in rear of the center of the first line. To form three lines, the third in close col- umn of companies or in line of platoon columns, the colonel sends special in- structions to the major of the third battalion as to its formation, and gives the commands to the other bat- talions for forming in two lines. Being in Column of Fours, to Form Line by Two Move- ments. y 395. The column of fours having partly D changed direction to the right, to form line to the left : 1. Fours left, 2. Rear battalions left n front into line, 3. march. The battalions that have changed direction to PI. 74, Par. 396. EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT, 149 right form line to the left and halt ; the battalions in rear execute left front into Une, the leading fours ad- vancing only so far as to be in line with the battalions that formed line to the left. 396. To form line to the right : 1. Fours right, 2. Rear battalions left front into line, faced to the rear,d. march, ❖ The battalions \ that have changed y direction form line to the right and halt; \ the battalions in rear \ execute left front into line, \ faced to the rear. \ The column having partly \ changed directipn to the \ left, is formed to the right \ and right front into line, or \ to the left and right front into line, faced to the rear, by simi- lar commands and means. Being in Column of Fours, to Form Right and Left Front into Line. 397. 1. Right and left front into line, 2. march. The first battalion executes right front into line; the second and third are marched to the left; the second — PI. 75, Par. 397. 150 EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT. forms left front into line on the left of the first ; and the third forms left front into line on the left of the second. If the colonel commands left and right front into line, the first battalion forms left front into line, the rear battalions form right front into line on the right of the first. Being in Column of Fours, to Form Right and Left Front into Line in Two Lines. ' 398. 1. In two lines, 2. Right and left front into line, 3. Third (or such) battalion, second line, 4. march. The first battalion forms right front into line, the sec- ond forms left front into line on the left of the first ; the third forms line by two movements (Pars. 293, 294, 296), and is established in rear of the center of the first line. If the second command of the colonel be left and right front into line, the first battalion forms left front into line and the second forms right front into line on its right. 399. Being in column of fours, line of companies in columns of fours is formed according to the principles for forming line from column of fours. In executing front, or on right or left intg line of columns of fours, each major marches his battalion op- posite its point of rest, on the principles explained for forming the regiment front, or on right or left into line, and then forms into line of columns of fours, as in the School of the Battalion. All movements in line of columns of fours. School of the Battalion, may be executed by the regiment by similar commands and means, the colonel designating (such) battalion when necessary. Route Step and to March at Ease. 400. To march in route step and at ease and to resume attention are executed as prescribed for the battalion, substituting battalions for battalion. EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT. 151 Column at Full Distance. 401. The regiment being in line, forms column of companies or platoons to the right or left, or right or left of companies rear into column by the commands and means prescribed in the School of the Battalion (Par. 251). The regiment being in column at full distance, ad- vances, forms line to the right or left, and marches 1o the rear by the commands and means prescribed in the School of the Battalion. Being in Column at Full Distance, to Change Direction. 402. Being in march: 1. Column right (or left), 2 MARCH. The leading battalion changes direction to the right ; the other battalions move forward, and each at the command of its major changes direction on the same ground as the first. Being at a halt : 1. Forward, 2. Guide right (or left), 3. Column right (or left), 4. march. Being in Column at Full Distance, to Face the Column to the Rear. 403. 1. Face to the rear. 2. Fours right (or left) about, 3. MARCH. The majors add : 1. Battalion, 2. halt, as the fours unite in line. Being in Column at Full Distance, to Form on Right or Left into Line. 404. 1. On right (or left) into line, 2. march. The first battalion executes on right into line; the other battalions move forward and execute the move- ment successively, each when its leading company is twenty-tour paces beyond the left flank of the battalion preceding. 405. Being in column of companies, the movements to form in two lines, on right or left, are executed by 152 EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT. the same commands and on the same principles as from column of fours (Par. 389). Being in Column at Full Distance, to Form Front into Line. 406. 1. Right (or left) front into line, 2. mai^ch. At the first command the major of the first battalion commands : 1. Right front into line; the other majors com- mand: 1. Fours right, 2. Companies, 3. Col- , , each until its leading guides are op- / / posite the point of rest of the battal- ^ / ion when its major commands : 1. / Companies, 2. Column half right, 3. w P MARCH. 4. Guide left; and when the PI. 76, Par. 406. company is oppo- EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT. 153 site the point of rest, commands: 1. Fours left, 2. march, 3. Guide left; and when at company distance from the line, forms his battalion right front into line on the right of the preceding battalion. To Form Front into Line Faced to the Rear. The colonel adds /aced to the rear, after front into line; each major, when his battalion approaches the line, executes right front into line faced to the rear. Right and left front into line is executed by the same commands and on the same principles as from colump of fours (Par. 397). Being in Column at Full Distance, to Form Front into Line, in Two Lines. 407. The colonel gives the same commands as when in column of fours, and the movement is executed ac. cording to the same principles. Being in Column at Full Distance, to Form Line by Two Move^ ments. 408. The column at full distance having partly changed direction to the right (or left) to form line tc the left (or right). 1. Companies left (or right), 2. Rear battalions left (or right) front into line, 3. march. The battalions that have changed direction to the right form line to the left. The rear battalions exe- cute left front into line. 409. The regiment being in line, forms line of com- panies or platoons in columns of fours, by the same commands and means as in the' School of the Battalion. The guides preserve the intervals necessary to form front into line with twenty-four paces between bat- talions. At close intervals the interval between bat- talions is company front. 154 EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT. To Ploy into Column of Masses. 410. In column of masses the distance of each bat- talion from the one preceding it is equal to the front of its first company. In forming column of masses from line, the desig- nated battalion ploys into close column; the others ploy in rear of the one designated, the battalion nearest the point of rest taking precedence in the column. The rear battalions are dressed to the same flank as the designated or leading battalion. 411. Column of companies at full distance is closed in mass by the commands and means prescribed in Par. 835 ; each battalion in rear of the first is closed in mass when at company distance from the one preceding. 412. Being in column of masses, full distance is taken by the commands and means prescribed in Par. 336 ; each battalion in rear of the first takes full distance when its leading company has company distance and twenty-four paces. Being in Line, to Ploy into Column of Masses on the First Com- pany of the First Battalion, 418. 1. Column of masses, 2. On first company, first battalion, 3. march. The first battalion ploys on its first company (Par. 338); the others wheel by fours to the right, incline to the right, and each marches so that its leading com- pany may enter the column at company distance and eight paces in rear of the rear company of the preceding battalion. The second battalion ploys in rear of the first and the third in rear of the second, each as pre- scribed in the School of the Battalion (Par. 341) ; the left guides cover the left guides of the preceding bat- talion. The regiment is ployed on the fourth company, third battalion, on the same principles. EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT. 155 Being in Line to Ploy into Column of Masses on an Jnterior Battalion. 414. 1. Column of masses, 2. On first company, second battalion, 3. march. The second battalion ploys on its first company. The major of the first battalion commands : 1. Fours left, 2. MARCH, 3. Companies, 4. Column left, 5. march. 6. Guide right, and when his leading guides are oppo- site a point company distance and eight paces in reai PI. 77, Par. 414. of the second battalion, commands : 1. Comparcits. 2. Column right, 3. march, and ploys his battalion in rear of the second by the commands and means pre- scribed in Par. 341, except that the captains pass through the column, establish their left guides in rear of the left guides of the second battalion, and dress their com- panies to the left, and that the captain of the first com- pany announces guide left as his company forms line. The third battalion ploys in rear of the first on the principles explained in Par. 413. Should the command of the colonel be : 1. Column of masses, 2. On fourth company, second oattalion, 3. march, the movement is exex^uted on the same principles. The third battalion ploys in rear of the second, the first in rear of the third. 156 EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT. Being in column of Fours, to Ploy into Column of Masses Faced to the Front. 415. 1. Column of masses, 2. First company, first battalion, 3. Column right (or left), 4. march. The first battalion ploys faced to the front (Par. 339); each of the other battalions successively executes the same movement in rear of the preceding battalion. Column of masses may be formed in an oblique direc- tion on the same principles by substituting the com- mand : 3. Column half right (or half left) ; for 3. Column right (or left). Being in Column of Fours, to Ploy imo Column of Masses, Faced to the Rear. 416. 1. Column of masses faced to the rear, 2. First company, first battalion, 3. Column right (or left), 4. MARCH. The first battalion ploys faced to the rear (Par. 340) ; the other battalions move forward and successively ex- ecute the same movement, each major giving his com- mands so that his first company may enter the column at a point company distance beyond the point wher« the last company of the preceding battalion entered it. Being in Column of Fours, to Ploy into Column of Masses Faced to the Right or Left. 417. 1. Column of masses, 2. First company, first bat- talion, 3. Fours right (or left), 4. march. The first battalion plo^^s faced to the right (Par. 341); the other battalions incline to the left and successively execute the same movement, each major giving his commands so that his first company may enter the column at company distance and eight paces in the rear of the rear company of the preceding battalion. Being in column of companies or fours, column of masses is formed on the rearmost company by fU’st EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT 157 wheeling about by fours and then executing the move- ment Rs explained. The column of masses advances, halts, obliques, march£>^ by the flank, resumes the march in column, faces to the rear, marches to the rear, and changes direc- tion on the march by the same commands as when at full distance. Being in Column of Masses, to Change Direction by the Flank. 418. 1. Change direction by the righf {or left) flank, 2. MARCH. The first battalion changes direction by the right flank (Par. 344); each of the other battalions wheels by fours to the right, and is marched with the guide to the left, by two partial changes of direction to the left, to its position in the new column, ^ wheeled by fours to the left, and / ///' halted. The partial changes of direction are executed in double time. PI. 78, Par. 418. TO DEPLOY THE COLUMN OF MASSES. Being in Column of Masses, to Deploy to the Right or Left. 419. 1. Deploy column, 2. Fours right (or left), 3, MARCH. The first battalion deploys to the right (Par. 346); the second is marched in close column to its position on the line to the right of the first and then deployed in the same manner as the first; the third, in a similar man- ner, is deployed on the right Of the second. The second and third battalions may be marched in column of fours (Par. 342) to their places on the line. To deploy faced to the rear, the colonel adds : Faced' to the rear, after deploy column. 158 EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT. 420. To form line on the rear of the column, facing either to the front or to the rear, the colonel first faces the column to the rear, and then executes the move- ment as explained. Being in Column of Masses, to Deploy to the Right and Left, 421. Deploy column, 2. Fours right and left, 3. march. The first battalion deploys to the right ; the second and third deploy on the line ; the second to the left of the first ; the third to the left of the second. If the colonel commands : 2. Fours left and right, the first battalion deploys to the left ; the others de- ploy on the line, the second on the right of the firsts the third on the right of the second. Being in Column of Masses, to Deploy in Two Lines. 422. 1. In two lines, 2. Deploy column, 3. Third (or such) battalion, second line, 4. Fours right (or left), 5. MARCH, . The first battalion deploys to the right ; the second deploys on the line of the first and to its right ; the third moves in column of fours and forms, line in rear of the center of the first line. If the colonel commands : 4. Foun right and left, the A first battalion de- » If A *i 1 ploys to the right; — u , ithe second (PL 79) deploys on the line of the first and to its left ; the third deploys to the left. If the colonel commands: 4. Fours left and right, the first bat- talion deploys to "u » PI. 79, Par. 422. the left ; the second deploys on the line of ohe first and to its right ; the third deploys to the right. EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT. 159 Being in Column of Masses, to Deploy in Three Lines. 423. 1. Battalions, 2. Deploy column, 3. Fours right (or left), 4. MARCH. Being in Column of Masses, to March to the Right or Left in Line of Battalions in Columns of Fours. 424. 1. Battalions, 2. Columns of fours, 3. (Such) company, 4. Fours right (or left), 5. march, 6. (Such) the base battalion. Column of Battalions. 425. Being in line, or column of fours, the regiment ploys into column of battalions by approximating the principles for forming close column, School of the Bat- talion ; except that the leading battalion halts upon forming line. Being in Line, to Ploy into Column of Battalions. 426. 1. Column of battalions, 2. On first (or third) battalion, 3. Fours right (or left), 4. march. The first battalion stands fast. The second executes fours right, column right, marches the normal or specie tied distance (Par. 385) to the rear, changes direction to the left, and forms line to the left, in rear of and paral- lel to the first battalion. The third battalion executes fours right, column half right, and forms in rear of the second, as explained for the second. Being in Line, to Ploy mto Column of Battalion on Second Battalion. 427. 1. Column of battalions, 2. On second battalion, o. F ours left and right, 4 march. The second battalion stands fast ; the first battalion ^f^ft and forms line in rear of the second ; the third battalion executes /oi^rs right and forms line in rear of the first ; right guides cover. 160 EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT. Being in Column of Fours, to Form Column of Battalions Faced to the Right or Left. 428. 1. Column of battalions, 2. First battalion 3. Fours right (or left), 4. march. The first battalion forms line and is halted ; the others incline to the left, and each enters the column parallel to and at the prescribed distance from tbe one preced- ing, forms line as prescribed for the first ; right guides cover. Being in Column of Fours, to Form Column of Battalions Faced to the Rear. 429. 1. Column of battalions, faced to the rear, 2. First battalion, 3. Column right (or left), 4. march. The first battalion changes direction to the right and when its rear has cleared the flank of the column by twelve paces, forms line to the right and halts. The battalions in rear move forward and each, when it has passed battalion distance and twenty-four paces beyond the preceding battalion, changes direction to the right, forms line, and halts, as prescribed for the first ; right guides cover. Being in Column of Battalions, to Form Front into Line. I i 430. 1. Right (or left) front into line, 2. march. The first battalion stands fast ; the second forms line on the right of the first and the third on the right of the second. The colonel may direct the major of the third battal- ion to form it on the left (or right) of the first (PI. 80). 431. To form line faced to the rear, the colonel adds faced to the rear to the first command. The first bat- talion is faced to the rear ; the rear battalions form on die line faced to the rear. EVOLUTIONS OF THE PEGIMENT. 161 A ^ i 4 PL 80, Par. 430. Line of Masses. 432. Each major takes post twelve paces in front o# the center of his first company. In all formations into line of masses, whether by a Bimultaneous or successive movement, the adjutant of sergeant major of each battalion posts the guides of its leading company. Being in line of Masses to Extend or Close Intervals. 433. To extend intervals : 1. On (such) battalionf 2. Take deploying intervals, 3. march. The designated battalion stands fast ; the other bat- talions march by the flank, inclining slightly to the rear. EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT. 1^2 and when they have gained the inteiwal, execute fours right (or left) and are halted on the line. Intervals are closed on the same principles : 1. On (such) battalion, 2. Close intervals. 3. march. Being in Line, to Form Line of Masses on the First or Third Battalion ^ 434. Line of masses, On first company, first bat- talion, Z. MARCH. The first battalion ploys on its first company (Par. 338) ; the second and third battalions move by the right and each ploys (Par. 341) with twenty-four paces interval from the left of the preceding battalion. Line of masses on the fourth company, third battalion, is formed according to the same principles. 435. Line of masses may be formed on an interior battalion, the colonel designating the first or fourth company. PI. 81, Par. 435. The designated battalion ploys on the designated company ; the other battalions ploy on the company nearest the point of rest, first closing, if not at the proper interval. Being in Column of Fours, to Form Line of Masses, Faced to the Right or Left. 436. 1. To the right (or left) into line of masses, 2. MARCH. The first battalion ploys faced to the right (Par. 341) ; the others execute the same movement, each major commanding march when the head of his column is twenty-eight paces from the fiank of the preceding comp.'jiny. EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENf. 163 Being in Column of Fours, to Form on Right or Left into Line of Masses. 437. 1. On right (or left) into line of mass- es, 2. MARCH. The major of the first battalion com- mands : 1. Column right. The first battal- ion having advanced forty paces in the new direction, the major commands : 1. Close column, 2. First company, 3. Column left, 4. MARCH (Par. 339) ; each of the others pass- es beyond the preceding battalion and exe- cutes the same movements as explained for the first, so as to have the interval of twen- ty-four paces from the battalion on its right. Being in Column of Fours, to Form Front into Line of Masses. 438. 1. Right (or left) front into line of masses, 2. march. At the first command, the major of the first battalion commands : 1. Close column, fl. First company, 3. Column right, and the other majors command : 1. Column half right. At the command march, the first battalion ploys faced to the front (Par. 339) ; each of the others is marched to the right front and executes the same movement, so as to have the interval of twenty-four paces between it and the one next on its left. _ Right and left (or left and right) front fj into line of masses is executed on the same U principles. [1 The first battalion ploys into close column, || as in executing right front into line of mass- [1 es; the second and third battalions ploy as U in executing left front into line of masses: pi. 82, Par. w. 164 EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT. the second on the left of the first and the third on the left of the second. Being m Column of Fours, to Form Front into Line of Masses, Faced to the Rear. 439. 1. Right (or left) front into line of masses, faced to the rear, 2. march. The first battalion ploys faced to the rear (Par. 340) ; each of the other battalions is marched to the right front and executes the same movement so as to have the inter- J / val of twenty-four paces to the ! ^ left of the battalion on its right. / To Align the Line of Masses, j 440. If necessary to rectify the align- / ment, the colonel assures the guides of / the first company of one of the baittalions / in the desired direction an^ then com- / mands : Guides on the line. / The adjutant or sergeant major of each f of the other battalions posts the guides of its leading company on the line of those established by the colonel ; the majors dress their battalions toward the point of rest. The first company of each battalion is dressed up to the guides ; each of the other companies is dressed at close distance. If the new line be established at considerable distance from the battalions, each major will move his battalion to its new position before dressing it. Movements of Masses. PI. 83, Par. 439. 441. The line of masses advances, halts. EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT. 165 faces to the rear, and marches to the rear by the same commands and means as the regiment in line. Being in Line of Masses, to Change Front, 442. Being in march : 1. Change front on first (or third) battalion, 2. march. The major of the first battalion adds : Column right. At the command march, the first battalion changes direction to the right, and when the first company has advanced forty paces in the new direction the major halts the battalion ; the other battalions change direc- tion half right and are so marched that by another change of direction half right each may arrive on the line abreast of and twenty-four paces to the left of the preceding battalion. Being in Line of Masses, to March by the Flank. 443. 1. Fours right (or left), 2. march, 3. Guide {right or left). The battalions* preserve the distance of twenty -four paces. The Line of Masses, Marching by the Flank in Quick Time, to Change Direction. 444. 1. Change direction to the right (or left), 2. march. The leading battalion changes direction to the right in double time (Par. 323); the others, at the commands of their majors, change direction similarly, on the same ground as the first. The Line of Masses, Marching by the Flank, to Form Line of Masses to the Right or Left. 445. 1. Fours right (or left), 2. march, 3. Battalions 4. HALT ; or, 3. (Such) the base battalion. 166 EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT. Being in Line of Masses, to Form Column of Fours. 446. Being* at a halt: 1. Column of fours, 2. First company, first (or third) battalion, 3. Right (or left) forward, A: Fours right {or left), b. march. The first battalion executes the movement ; each of the others successively executes the movement and in- clines to the right or left, so as to follow the battalion preceding at the prescribed distance. Or, the colonel may command : 1. Column of fours, 2. First (or fourth) company, first battalion, 3. Fours right; or, 2. First {or fourth) company, third battalion, 3. Fours left, A. march. The battalion designated executes the movement; each of the others successively executes the movement in time to follow the battalion preceding at the prescribed distance. Being in Line of Masses, to Form Column of Masses to the Right or Left. 447. 1. Battalions, 2. Change direction by the left (or right) flank, 3. march. • Each battalion changes direction by the left flank (Par. 344). Being in Line of Masses, to Form Column of Masses, F aeed to the Front. 448. 1. Column of masses on first {or sach) battalion, 2. march. The first battalion stands fast or is halted ; the second is placed in close column, in rear of the first, and the third in rear of the second. If the third battalion be designated, the second takes position in I’ear of the third, the first in rear of the second. If the seco.id battalion be designated, the first takes EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT. 167 ^ ^ position in rear of the second (PL 84), = ■ ■■'■' ■ g~~ • I and the third in rear of the first. ■ F-- { Each major may maneuver his j I t battalion into position in mass or in I r I j of fours. The adjutant or Y ZIIZ.^lZZZ2 sergeant major of each battalion 1 moves in advance, to indicate the r 1->- ~ — — point where his battalion moves by ^ the flank or changes direction to PL 84, Par. 448. enter the column. 449. Being in line of masses, to form the column of masses facing to the rear, the colonel first causes the battalions to wheel about by fours, and then gives the same commands as before. Being in Column of Masses, to Form Line of Masses to the Right or Left. 450. The colonel causes the battalions to change db rection by the left or right flank (Par. 344); or com- mands: 1. Forward, 2. Battalions, S. Column right (or left), 4. MARCH, 5. Battalions, 6. halt; or, 5. (Such) the base battalion. Being in Column of Masses, to Form on Right or Left into Line of Masses. 451. Being in mardh: 1. On right (or left) into line of masses, 2. march. The major of the first battalion commands: 1. Column right, 2. Double time. At the command march, the first battalion changes direction to the right; it is halted when the first com- pany has advanced forty paces in the new direction; each of the others marches twenty-four paces beyond the. preceding one, changes direction to the right, in double time, is halted, and established abreast of the first battalion. 168 EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT. Being in Column of Masses, to Form Front into Line of M asset. 452. 1. Right (or left) front into line of masses, 2. march. The first battalion stands fast or is halted ; the second and third bat- talions are moved in masses to their places, the second on the right of the first, the third on the right of the second. The colonel may direct the major of the third battalion to form on the PI 85, Par. 452. left (or right) of the first. Being in Line, to Change Front. 453. To change front on a flank battalion, the colonel forms column of fours to the right or left and then ex- ecutes front into line or front into line, faced to the rear (Pars. 390 and 391). To change front on an interior battalion, the colonel forms column of fours to the right or left, and then ex- ecutes front into line on the head of the designated bat- talion (Par. 393). Movements by Platoons. 454. The interval between battalions in line of pla- * 00 n columns is platoon front and twenty-four paces 455. All movements (in column of platoons and line of platoon columns. School of the Battalion, may be executed by the regiment by similar commands and means; the colonel designates (Such) battalion when necessary. 456. In forming line, or line of platoon columns, each major first moves his battalion into position on the principles for forming line from column of fours, and at the proper time gives the commands for forming line, or line of platoon columns. EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT. 169 Order in Echelon. 457. Being in line at a halt, to advance in echelon : 1. Form echelon at (so many) yards, 2. (Such) the base battalion, 3. march. PI. 86. Par. 457. At the second command the major of the designated battalion commands : 1. Forward, 2. Guide center; the other majors caution; Stand fast. PI. 87, Par. 457. no EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT. At the command march, the designated battalion ad- vances ; the others take up the march, each when it has the specified distance from the one next pre- ceding. A file closer from each rear battalion marches at the specified distance directly in rear of the guide on the nearest flank of the preceding battalion. Each rear battalion marches abreast of and preserves the in- terval of twenty-four paces from the file closer thus posted. 458. The regiment in echelon advances, halts, ob- liques, marches to the rear or by the flank by the same commands as when in line. Being in Echelon of Battalions, to Form Line. 459. 1. Form line on {sach) battalion, 2, march. The designated battalion halts or stands fast ; the others form on the line of the one designated by mov- ing to the front or rear. A general alignment is given if necessary. THE BRIGADE. 171 THE BRIGADE. 460. The brigade consists of three regiments, but the rules prescribed are applicable to a less or greater num- ber ; it is commanded by a brigadier-general. 461. Regiments in line are designated right, center, and left; or, if one be in rear, right, left, and rear; in column they are designated leading, center, and rear. Unless otherwise directed by the general, the regi- ments are posted according to the rank of the colonels: in line, from right to left, the senior on the right ; in two or three lines by regiments, the senior in the first line, the junior in the rear line; in column, from head to rear, the senior at the head. 462. The interval between regiments is forty-eight paces. 463. In line, the general takes post one hundred paces in front of the center of the brigade ; in column, at the head of the brigade. The general is attended by the adjutant-general, rid- ing on his left, his aids six paces in rear. When the re- maining officers of his staff are present, they ride on the left or in rear of the aids, according as they form one or more ranks, senior on the right ; the orderlies thre( paces in rear of the staff. 464. The drill exercises should be limited to move- ments used in campaign. The regulations for the evolutions of the regiment are applicable to the brigade. In moving into position, the regiments and battalions are habitually marched in column of fours and by the shortest practicable route. 465. When the orders of the general to a regimental commander are communicated through staff officers, 172 THE BRIGADE. the name of the regimental commander or the perma- nent designation of the regiment will be mentioned. These orders should be explicit and should cover the following points : First. The maneuver to be executed by the brigade. Second. The particular formation the regiment is to take ; as, in tivo lines, line of masses, etc. When the for- jnation is not specified, the regiment forms in line. Third. When forming the brigade in two or more lines by regiment, the number of lines, the distance between the lines, the line in which the regiment is to form, and its point of rest. When necessary, staff officers are sent to indicate the point of rest for each line. Fourth. Whether the right or left of the regiment is to connect with the left or right of another regiment that precedes it on the line. Fifth. Whether the right or left flank of the regiment will be exposed. Being in Column of Fours, to Form Front into Line. 466. The general sends orders as follows : To each colonel : The brigade to form front into line ; to the leading regiment : Form right front into line ; to the center regiment : Form left front into line, your right connecting with left of leading regiment ; to the rear regiment : Form right front into line, your left connecting with right of leading regiment, right flank exposed. The colonel of the leading regiment forms it right front into line •, the colonel of the center regiment marches it forward to the line, to the left of the leading regiment, so as to have an interval of forty-eight paces, and forms it left front into line ; the colonel of the rear regiment marches it forward to the line, to the right of the leading regiment, and forms it right front into line. THE BRIGADE. 173 On the same principles the regiments may be formed front into line, in any order. Being in Column of Fours, to Form Line to the Right or Left. 467. The general sends orders : Form line to the right (or left). The colonels command : 1. Fours right (or left), 2. MARCH, 3. Battalions, 4. halt. 468. To form in two or three lines, the general sends orders : Form in two (or three) lines to the right (or left), or adds : At (so many) paces distance. The colonel of the leading regiment forms his regi- ment in two lines to the right and halts it ; the colonels of the rear regiments give the commands for forming in two lines, each when his first battalion has closed to forty-eight paces from the right flank of the first line of the regiment preceding. 469. Being in column of fours, on right or left into line, is executed on similar principles, each regiment passing beyond the one preceding. When regiments are formed in two or three lines, the first line advances far enough to allow the second or third line to clear the line of march. 470. Being in column of platoons, line is formed to the right or left, to the front and on right or left, ac- cording to the same principles. According to the same principles, the brigade maybe formed in one, two, or three lines of platoon columns, lines of masses or lines of columns of fours ; or one or two regiments may be given a designated forma- tion. To March in Line. 471. The general sends orders : Advance in line (or such formation), (such) battalion, (such) regiment, the base battalion. The orders having been communicated, and the proper 174 THE BRIGADE. dispositions having been made in each regiment, the general causes forward to be sounded. When in two or three lines, the second and third lines preserve their positions relative to the first line. To Halt 472. The general causes the halt to be sounded, which is repeated and each regiment is halted. To March to the Rear. 473. The general sends orders : March to the reary (such) hattcilion, (such) regiment, the base battalion. Each colonel causes his regiment to face to the rear and gives the preparatory commands to march in line. The general causes the forward to be sounded. The brigade being in two lines, the base battalion will be in the late second line, now the first. The desig- nation of the battalion and regiment refers to its posi- ti on ill line when marching to the rear. 474. The line of platoon columns, line of masses, oi* line of columns of fours marches according to the (game principles as when in line. To March by the Flank. 475. Being in line or line of columns, the general sends orders : March by the right (or left) flank. Each colonel commands : 1. Fours right, 2. march, 3. Battalions, 4. halt. The general then causes the forward to be sounded. When in more than one line, the lines retain their former designations; the first battalion of the first line is the base battalion ; the other line or lines maintain the same relative positions as at the beginning of the movement. 476. To re-form the line when in line of platoon THE DIVISION. 175 columns, line of masses, or line of columns of fours, the general sends orders : Re-form line. Each colonel forms line. 477. When at close interval, the general sends orders: Re form line (such) hattalion^ (such) regiment, the base battalion. The colonel of the designated regiment causes it to take deploying intervals and form line ; the other col- onels cause their regiments to move by the flank until opposite their positions, take deploying intervals, and form line. Change of Front. 478. Changes of front are usually executed by form-i ing in column of fours and then forming front into line, or front into line faced to the rear. If in two or three lines, the simplest means are used for moving the second and third lines to their new posi- tions. THE DIVISION.: 479. The division consists of three brigades of in- fantry and two or more batteries of artillery, but the rules prescribed are applicable to a less or greater n»im« Der ; it is commanded by a major-general. The principles prescribed for the evolutions of the brigade apply to the division. 48C. In line, the division commander takes post one hundred and fifty paces in front of the center of the division; in coluum, at the head of the division. 481. The brigades are designated, in \mQ, right, center, and left ; or, if one be in rear, right, left, and rear ; in column, leading, center and rear. 176 THE CORPS. Unless otherwise directed by the division commander, the brigades are posted according to the rank of brigade commanders in the manner prescribed for posting regi- ments in brigade. 482. The division is formed in one, two, or three lines, by brigade, and each brigade is given one of the forma- tions prescribed in brigade drill. The interval between brigades is seventy two paces, which is increased when interval is left for artillery. 488. The orders of the division commander are com - municated through staff officers ; the orders should cover the following points : The particular formation for each brigade and its point of rest ; the direction in which the line is to extend ; the distance between lines and the point of rest for each line ; the name of the brigade commander or the permanent number of the brigade will be mentioned. THE CORPS. 484. The corps consists of three divisions, one or more regiments of cavalry, and the corps artillery, which is in addition to the divisional artillery. The principles prescribed for the evolutions of the division apply to the corps or a larger command. SALUTE WITH THE HAND, ETC. 177 SALUTE WITH THE HAND. 485. The salute for officers is the same as in Par. 29 ; the left hand is used only when the right is engaged. Officers and men, when saluting, look toward the person saluted. Enlisted men salute with the hand farthest from the officer, giving the salute six paces before passing the officer and holding the hand at the visor until the salute is acknowledged or the officer passed. The rifle salute (Par. 95) is made six paces before pass- ing the officer, holding the hand at the shoulder until the salute is acknowledged or the officer passed. Courtesy among mihtary men is indispensable to dis- cipline ; respect to superiors will not . be confined to obedience on duty, but will be extended on all occasions. ABOUT FACE FOR OFFICERS. 486. At the command about, carry the toe of the right foot about eight inches to the rear and three inches to the left of the left heel, without changing the position of the left foot. At the command /ace, turn upon the left heel and right toe, face to the rear, and replace the right heel by the side of the left. Enlisted men out of ranks may use the about face prescribed for officers. MANUAL OF THE SWORD. 487. 1. Draw, 2. sword. At the command draw, unhook the sword with the thumb and first two fingers of the left hand, thumb on the end of the hook, fingers lifting the upper ring ; grasp the scabbard with the left hand at the upper 178 MANUAL OF THE SWORD. band, bring the hilt a little forward, seize the gripe with the right hand, and draw the blade six inches out of the scabbard, pressing the scabbard against the thigh with the left hand. At the command sword, draw the sword quickly, raising the arm to its full extent, at an angle of about forty-five degrees, the sword, edge down, in a straight line with the arm, and make a slight pause ; hook up the scabbard with the thumb and first two fingers of the left hand, thumb through the upper ring, fingers sup- porting it, and drop the left hand by the side ; at the same time drop the right hand to the side and bring the back of the blade in a vertical position against the shoulder, back of the gripe to the rear, the arm extended without con- straint, the thumb and forefinger embrac- ing the gripe, the left side of the gripe with the thumb against the thigh, the other fingers extended and joined in rear of the gripe. This is the position of carry sword. Officers mounted unhook the sword be- fore mounting, and, in the first motion of draw sword, reach with the right hand over the bridle hand, and without the aid of the bridle hand draw the sword as before ; the right hand at the carry rests on the right thigh. 488. When publishing orders, the sword is held suspended from the right wrist by the sword knot ; when the sword knot is used, it is placed on the wrist before draw- ing sword, and taken off after returning ' sword. 489. 1. Present, 2. sword (or arms). At the command present, carry the sword to the fronl:, base of the hilt as high as the chin and six inches in front of the neck. MANUAL OF THE SWORD. 179 edge to the left, point six inches further to the front than the hilt, thumb extended on the left of the gripe, all the fingers grasping the gripe. At the command sword, lower the sword, point to the front and near the ground, edge to the left, hand by the side, thumb on left of gripe, arm extended. 1. Carry, 2. sword (or arms). Resume the carry. In rendering honors with troops, officers exe- cute the first motion of the salute at the command presen i , t he second motion at the command arms; en- Pl. 89, Par. 489. listed men with the the first motion at the sword is returned to command : 1. Carry, 490. 1. Order, 2, Drop the point of front, point on or down, thumb on back At the command : (or ARMS), resume 491. When arms der, the officers and sword drawn execute 492. The sword is while marching at position ; swords are when arms are or right shoulder. PI. 91, Par. 490. PI. 90, Par. 489. sword drawn execute command arms. The the carry at the 2. ARMS. SWORD (or ARMS), the sword to the near the ground, edge of the gripe. 1. Carry, 2. sword the carry. are brought to the or- enlisted men with the order sword. held at the carry attention or changing brought to the carry brought to the carry 180 MANUAL OF THE SWORD. 493. 1. Parade, 2. rest. Being at the order, clasp the hands in front of the center of the body, left hand uppermost, point of sword on or near the ground in front of the center of the body, edge to the right. At the command attention resume the order. 494. In marching in double time the sword is carried diagonally across the breast, edge to the front ; the left hand steadies the scabbard. 495. Officers on all duties under arms draw and re- turn sword without waiting for any command. All commands to soldiers under arms are given with the sword drawn. 496. 1. Return, 2. sword. At the command return, carry the right hand oppo- site to and six inches from the left shoulder, sword vertical, edge to the left ; at the same time unhook and lower the scabbard with the left hand, and grasp it at the upper band. At the command sword, lower the blade and pass it across and along the left arm, point to the rear ; turn the head slightly to the left, fixing the eyes on the opening of the scabbard, and return the blade ; free the wrist from the sword knot (if inserted in it), turn the head to the front, and drop the right hand by the side ; at the same time hook up the sword with the left hand, and drop the left hand by the side. Officers mounted return sword without using the left hand ; the sword is hooked up on dismounting. 497. At inspection, enlisted men with the sword drawn execute the first motion of present sword., and turn the wrist to show both sides of the blade, resuming the carry when the inspector has passed. THE COLOR. 181 THE COLOR. Manual of the Color. 498. At a carry, the heel of the pike rests in the socket of the sling at the right hip ; the right hand grasps the pike at the height of the shoulder. At the order, the heel of the pike rests on the ground near the right toe, the right hand holding the pike in a vertical position. At parade rest, the heel of the pike is on the ground, as at the order ; the pike is held with both hands in front of the center of the body, left hand uppermost. The order is resumed at the command attention. The left hand assists the right when necessary. The carry is the habitual position when the troops are at a carry, right shoulder, or trail. The carry, order, and parade rest are executed with the troops. The color salute. Being at the Ccirry, slip the right hand up the pike to the height of the eye, then lower the pike by straightening the arm to the front. The- color salutes in the ceremony jEJscor^ of the Color, and when saluting an officer entitled to the honor, as prescribed in Pars. 422 to 427, Army Regulations, 1889, but in no other case. If marching, the salute is executed when at six paces from the officer entitled to the salute ; the carry is re- sumed when six paces beyond him. At a halt, the salute is executed at the command pre- sent arms, the carry is resumed at the command carry arms. Color Guard. 499. In each regiment there is a color guard, com- 182 THE COLOR. posed of one sergeant, who is the color bearer, and two experienced soldiers selected by the colonel. The color is with the battalion designated by the colonel, usually the second, or the first if there be but two battalions. When the regimental color is paraded it is carried by a sergeant selected by the colonel ; he takes his place on the left of the color bearer and conforms to his movements, remaining on his left, except when in column of fours with tlie file closers on the left flank, in which case the regimental color is on the right. The color, kept at the office or quarters of the colonel, is escorted by the color guard, marching in one rank, the color bearer in the center, to the color company on its parade ground ; and in like manner back to its place of deposit. The color guard, at the command of the color bearer, presents arms on receiving and on parting with the color ; in the latter case, the color guard returns to the carry at the command of the senior member of the guard. THE BAND. 183 THE BAND. 500. The band is formed in two or more ranks, with sufficient intervals between the men and distances be- tween the ranks to permit a free use of the instruments. The field music, when united, forms with and in rear of the band ; when the band is not present, the posts, movements, and duties of the field music are the same as prescribed for the band ; when a musician is in charge, his post is on the right of the front rank. When the battalion or regiment wheels about by fours, the band executes the counter-march ; when the bat- talion or regiment executes right, left or about face, the band faces in the same manner. In marching, the different ranks dress to the right. In executing open ranks, each rank of the band takes the distance of three paces from the rank next in front; the drum major verifies the alignment. The field music sounds the march, flourishes, or ruffles, and to the tolcr at the signal of the drum major. instructions for the Drum Major, 501. The drum major is two paces in front of the cen- ter of the front rank, and gives the signals or commands for the movements of the band as for a squad, substi- tuting in the commands band for squad. The staff is held in the right hand, hand below the chin, back to the front, head of the staff near the hand, ferrule pointing upward and to the right. After eacji signal the staff is restored to this position. Signals of the Drum Major. To play — Face toward the band and extend the right arm to its full length in the direction of the staff. 184 THE BAND. To cease playing — Extend the right arm to its full length in the direction of the staff. To march — Turn the wrist and bring the staff to the front, the ferrule pointing upward and to the front ; ex- tend the arm to its full length in the direction of the staff. To halt — Reverse the staff and hold it horizontally above the head with both hands, the arms extended ; lower the staff with both hands to a horizontal position at the height of the hips. To counter -march — Face toward the band and give the signal to march. The counter-march is executed by each front rank man to the right of the drum major turning right about, each to the left turning left about, each followed by the men covering him. The drum major passes through the center. ’ To oblique — Bring the staff to a horizontal position, the head of the staff opposite the neck, the ferrule pointing in the direction the oblique is to be made ; ex- tend the arm to its full length in the direction of the staff. ^ To march by the right flank — Extend the arm to the right, the staff vertical, ferrule upward, back of the hand to the rear. To march by the left flank — Extend the arm to the left, the staff vertical, ferrule upward, back of the hand to the front. To diminish front — Let the ferrule fall into the left hand at the height of the eyes, right hand at the height of the hip. To increase front — Let the ferrule fall into the left 4and at the height of the hip, right hand at the height of the neck. The march, flourishes, or ruffles — Bring the staff to a vertical position, hand opposite the neck, back of the hand to the front, ferrule pointing upward. The assembly — Bring the staff to a horizontal position, the band. 185 hand opposite the neck, back of the hand down, ferrule pointing to the left. To the color — Bring the staff to a horizontal position at the height of the neck, back of the hand to the rear, ferrule pointing to the left. In marching, the drum major beats the time with his staff and supports the left hand at the hip, fingers in front, thumb to the rear. The drum major, before making his report at parade, salutes by bringing his staff to a vertical position, head of the staff up and opposite the left shoulder. The drum major, marching in review, passes the staff between the right arm and the body, head of the staff to the front, and then salutes with the left hand. im GENERAL PRINCIPLES. EXTENDED ORDER. GENERAL PRINCIPLES. 509. The iquad is the basis of extended order. Men will Ije taught to regard the squad as the unit Crom whiclt they ought never to be separated; but if the squad should be broken up or the men beconie sepa- rated, they place themselves under the orders of the nearest leader and remain with his squad as if it were the one to which they originally" belonged. Officers and sergeants will give their attention to pre- serving the integrity of the squads ; they appoint new leaders to replace those disabled, organize new squads when necessary, and see that every man is placed in a squad. 503. This instruction, on account .of its importance, will be given as soon as the recruits have had a few drills in close order. The mechanism of the movements is taught on the drill ground (Pars. 115 and 116), with every attention to detail ; afterward the movements are executed on varied ground, making use of the accidents of the surface for cover, etc., and observing the condi- tions of battle. 504. In all instruction in extended order, the move- ment must be made with reference to an enemy sup- posed to be in an indicated dh’ection. 505. The enemy is said to be imaginary when his posi- tion and force are merely assumed ; outlined when his position and force are indicated by a few men only ; and represented when a body of troops acting as such has his supposed force and position. 506. Men m extended order fix their attention at the first word of command, the first note of the trumpet or LEADING THE SQUAD. 187 the first motion of the signal ; the movement com mences immediately upon the completion of the com mand, trumpet call, or signal. 507. Extended order may be taken from any forma, tion. 508. Upon arriving on the line and upon halting, men in extended order face to the front, whether in squads or as individual skirmishers. 509. No commands for dressing are given in extended order ; the general alignment is taken toward the base file ; the men stand and march at ease (see Par. 246) and pay close attention. 510. When necessary for any chief^to leave his post, lie will return to it as soon as possible. Leading the Squad. 511. In the exercise in leading, the movements are executed at signals from the corporal, and as far as possible without commands or cautions ; the object be- ing to prepare the squad for the battle exercises by training the men to cooperate with their leader and conform instantly to his wishes. 512. The movements are executed in the most direct manner, first in quick time, then in double time, and finally at a run ; they should not succeed each other so rapidly as to produce confusion. 513. The corporal is posted three paces in front of the squad, which conforms to his signals and move- ments. 514. The squad is exercised in turning, marching to the front, rear, and by the flank, obliquing, halting, assembling, etc. 515. The man in front of whom the corporal places himself is the guide of the squad, and follows in the trace of the corporal at a distance of three paces. 516. When the corporal does not wish the squad to follow him, he commands : Guide {right or left), and 188 THE SQUAD. indicates the point of direction ; if marching* by the flank, he indicates the direction. 517. When the squad is marched to the rear, the corporal takes position in front of the squad. THE SQUAD. General Rules. 518. The squad is deployed forward when it is in rear of the line to be occupied, and by the flank when it is already on that line. If the squad be at a halt, it is placed in march before deploying* forward. If the squad be in march, it is halted before deploying by the flank. 519. The normal interval between skirmishers is two paces ; when a greater or less interval is used it will be stated in the preparatory command. 520. Before giving the commands for marching, de- ploying, or assembling, or for increasing or diminishing intervals, the corporal indicates the file which is to be the base or guide, places himself three paces in front of it, and indicates the direction. On halting, the corporal places himself three paces in rear of his squad. 521. The deployment as skirmishers is made on the front rank man of the second file from the right (No. 2). The rear rank men place themselves on the alignment to the right of their file leaders, each, as soon as there is interval. 522. If the squad is to kneel or lie down upon halting, the corporal gives the cautionary command kneel (or lie dotcn)upon halting, before giving the commands for deploying. The squad will then kneel (or lie down) at each halt until otherwise directed. To Deploy as Skirmishers. 523. Forward: Marching in line : 1. As skirmishers, 2. march. THE SQUAD 189 The front rank man, second file (Par. 521) moves straight to the front or in the direction indicated by the corporal. The other men oblique to the right or left according as they are on the right or left of the second file, in- creasing the cadence, each resuming the direction and cadence of the guide when at his interval (Par. 519) and on the alignment. The rear rank men follow or pre- cede their file leaders on the line according as they gain intervals to the right or left. When the squad arrives upon the line to be occupied, the corporal halts it by the commands : 1. Squad, 2. HALT. 524. By the flank : Being in line at a halt : 1. As skirmishers, 2. march. The base (Par. 521) stands fast; ^ ^ the other men move rapidly to 5 ^ m the right or left, according as ^ they are on his right or left, ^ each man halting on the line when he has gained his interval. Pi. 92, Par. 524. To Increase and Diminish Intervals. 525. Being deployed as skirmishers, to increase or diminish intervals \ 1. To (so many) paces, extend (or dose), 2. MARCH. The skirmishers open from or close toward the guide. If marching, the movement is executed by ob- liquing and increasing the cadence ; if at a halt, the movement is executed by the flank. Marchings. 526. Being deployed and halted, to move forward : 1. Forward, 2. march. The skirmishers take the direct ion and keep their in- tervals from the side toward the guide. 527. Being deployed, at a halt or advancing, to march to the rear : 1. To the rear, 2. march. 190 THE SQUAD. The men face about and march to the rear, conform- ing to the principles of the march to the front. The corporal moves quickly in front of the guide. To march again to the front : 1. Forward, 2. march. 528. Tq march by the flank : 1. By the right (or left) dank, 2. march. At the command march, each man faces to the right and follows the man in his front. The corporal moves quickly beside the leading man to conduct him (see Par. 516). To march again in line : 1. By the left (or right) flank, 2. MARCH. 529. The squad being in march, to the front, rear, or by the flank, is halted by the commands : 1. Squad, 2. HALT. 530. The squad being deployed, to change front or direction, the corporal indicates the direction and com- mands : 1. Squad right {or left), 2. march; ov ,\. Right (or left) turn, 2. march, according as the squad is to halt or advance ; executed as in Pars. 140 and 141, th« skirmishers maintaining their intervals. To Rally. 531. The rally is used for immediate and concentrated action when there is not time to form in the normal order. The rally should be made either on the line or in advance of it. The corporal signals or commands : RALLY, The men run toward the corporal and group them- selves in single or double rank, in line, in circle, in semi- circle, or in such other formation as he directs, and fix bayonet. If the corporal continues to advance, the men form in rear of him in single or double rank as he directs, and follow him, fixing bayonet. The squad being rallied may advance or deploy (Pars. FIRE DISCIPLINE. 191 523 and 524); in deploying, the skirmishers return to their former places. The Assembly. 532. Being deployed or rallied, the corporal signals or commands: 1. Assemble, 2. march. The men move toward the corporal and form in their proper places. If the corporal continues to advance, the men move in double time, form, and follow him. Assembling when faced or marching to the rear will not be executed. 533. When the preceding movements are well under- stood, they are executed at signals. FIRE DISCIPLINE. 534. The instructor will impress upon the men the importance of the following : General Rules. 1. Never load until the moment for firing. 2. Never fire except when ordered, and then only the number of cartridges indicated. 3. Never fire after the command or signal Cease firing. 4. Never ^re except at the named objective. 5. Never fail to adjust the sight at the range named. 6. Always aim at the feet of the enemy, or, if he is hidden from view, at the lower line of smoke. 535. Notwithstanding these rules, it is allowable, especially for scouts, to fire when necessary — a. To give the alarm. b. When a good opportunity occurs to fire upon a leader of the enemy. c. In self defense. 192 FIRE DISCIPLINE. 536. Individual men who may be acting beyond the immediate control of leaders will observe the follow- ing : They will not fire at distances over — 400 yards at a man lying down. 500 yards at a man kneeling. 600 yards at a man standing. 700 yards at a horseman. 800 yards at a small squad of men or a line of skir- mishers. Sharpshooters may, when permitted by an officer, fire upon the enemy at greater distances. 537. Volleys by squads are used against troops in close order at distances not exceeding — 800 yards at a line equal to the front of a squad. 1,000 yards at a line equal to the front of a platoon. 1,200 yards at a line equal to the front of a com- pany. These limits are not invariable ; they may be ex- ceeded under favorable conditions when the range is accurately known, but should always be reduced when the men are tired or out of breath, the range uncertain, the enemy under cover, or the conditions of wind and light unfavorable. When the supply of ammunition is ample and the enemy is in large bodies, volleys may be fired at extreme ranges. 538. The fire at will and the fire with ' counted car- tridges are used at distances ranging from 800 to 400 yards. 539. The rapid fire is used at short ranges at the de- cisive moment of the action. 540. The ranges are classified as follows : 0 to 300 yards, short range. 300 to 600 yards, mid range. 600 to 1,400 yards, long range. 1,400 to 2,000 yards, extreme range. FIRINGS. 193 ^^/rings. 541. The instructor will give the closest attention to the execution of the firings, and always exact the most rigid fire discipline. 542. The firings are always executed at a halt. If the squad be in march, it halts at the preparatory com- mand for firing and loads, and kneels or lies down if so specified in the command. 543. Volley firing is executed, the squad closed or de- ployed, by the same commands and means as in close order. (Par. 146.) More than three volleys will rarely be fired without intermission ; this to allow the smoke to clear away, to steady the men, and to prevent waste of ammunition. 544. To fire at will; 1. Fire at will, or, 1. Fire at will, kneeling (or lying doivn), 2. At (such an object), 3. At (so many) yards, 4. commence firing. At the fourth command, those skirmishers who can see the'enemy aim deliberately, fire, load, and continue the firing until the command or signal : cease firing. The corporal may permit a few men only, usually the best shots, to fire; for this purpose he calls the men by name and then gives the same commands as before ; the intensity of the fire is thus regulated by varying the number of men firing. 545. To fire as skirmishers with counted cartridges : 1. Fire one {two or three) round, 2. At (such an ob- ject); 3. At (so many) yards, 4. commence firing. At the fourth command those skirmishers who can see the enemy open fire. Each man, after firing the number of cartridges indicated, executes cease firing. To fire another series; fire one (two or three) ROUND. The instructor will see that the number of cartridges indicated is never exceeded. 194 INSTRUCTION ON VARIED GROUND. 546. In the rapid fire, the mincer of cartridges is not limited ; when used in advanci^ to the attack, the in- structor orders bayonets fixed and sights laid down, and then commands : 1. Rapid fire^ 2. commence firing. The men fire straight to the front at the feet of the enemy, and continue to fire until the command or signal : cease firing. INSTRUCTION ON VARIED GROUND. 547. The instruction at first will be individual ; the movements will afterward be executed by the entire squad. 548. This instruction is directed by the company offi- cers ; it is given on ground which has been previously selected with reference to the movements to be executed. The location should be frequently changed to accustom the men to new situations, and care will be taken never to order movements at variance with the accidents of the ground. 549. Having conducted the squad to a point over- looking the vicinity, the instructor will call attention to the form of the ground and the different military pur- poses to which its features are adaptable, using and ex- plaining the military terms that apply ; he will require the men to point out the leading features of the coun- try in sight or near their position, with all that con- cerns the streams, roads, woods, inhabited places, etc. 550. He will explain how to determine the points of the compass, the points of sunrise and sunset, the posi- tion of the sun at different hours of the day, and the length of the shadows cast by objects, persons, etc. Use of Cover, 551. The instructor must impress upon the men that they must take positions from which they can best see and fire upon the enemy. INSTRUCTION ON VARIED GROUND. 195 552. The best kind of cover is that which, while it masks the skirmishers from the sight and fire of the enemy, affords favorable conditions for firing and for readily advancing and retiring. 553. In order to obtain a rest for the rifle, and at the same time expose the least part of the body while aiming, the instructor explains the following meth* ods : Take post preferably behind the right of walls, rocks, heaps of stone or earth, and in the windows and door- ways of the houses on the left side of a street ; behind a tree, rest the rifle on a limb to the right, or rest the forearm against the right side of the trunk. Behind embankments of earth, in ditches and fur- rows, kneel or lie down and rise slightly to fire ; lie down in rear of a crest or the edge of a plateau, keep- ing the slope toward the enemy in view. At the edge of a wood, where there is no ditch nor bank of earth, remain a little back from the edge, un- der the cover of the first trees. The instructor explains how to prepare the crest of a wall, and how to pierce loopholes or construct plat- forms when the wall is too high to fire over. 554. The instructor explains the circumstances under which each accident of the ground would be valuable as cover, and how to use it, both in its original condition and by modifying it, against an enemy supposed to be in a certain direction. The recruits are then required to post themselves near points indicated, so as to be under cover and in position to fire upon a point about six hundred yards distant, indicated as the position of the enemy ; each man selects his own position so as to have a good view of the objective, and sets his sight at the range indi- cated. The men then change places. The exercise is repeated on different ground and with a different objective. 196 INSTRUCTION ON VARIED GROUND. 555. A well-instructed soldier or non-commissioned officer is then placed in the position of the enemy and required to advance upon the skirmishers; the latter will carefully observe his movements and aim at him whenever he exposes himself, adjusting the sight to agree with the distance (Par. 536). 556. When the recruits have learned to post them- selves at points indicated by the instructor, they are exercised in selecting their own points, advancing from cover to cover. The instructor sends a man to a point about six hundred yards distant to represent the enemy; a recruit is then directed to advance upon him. In order to keep out of sight of tlie enemy, the recruit must make the best use of cover, but must not deviate too much from his direction ; he must stoop and even creep or crawl, but, if possible, never lose sightof the enemy ; open ground exposed to the fire of the enemy should be crossed at a run, by rushes of about thirty yards, then taking the lying position and raising the head in order to see the enemy. The rushes should not, as a rule, exceed fifty yards, else the skirmishers will be winded and unable to aim accurately. In this manner ne should advance to about 200 yards from the enemy, and nearer if the character of the ground permit. The man representing the enemy may be provided with blank cartridges and required to fire upon the skirmisher whenever he exposes himself sufficiently to afford a target (Par. 536). 557. When the recruits are well instructed in the use of cover, the movements are executed by squad. The instructor points out the position of the enemy at least 600 yards distant, and states clearly the object of the movement. The corporal, as squad leader, gives the commands necessary. INSTRUCTION ON VARIED GROUND. 197 Battle Exercises. 558. The squad executes on varied ground all the movements prescribed for close and extended order, special attention being given to the exercises in leading. Those skirmishers v^ho cannot hear or see the cor^ poral regulate themselves upon the nearest men, who may transmit the commands to them in a low tone. When the squad is proficient in the movements in ex- tended order, the enemy is either outlined or repre- sented. In general the fire is simulated ; but it is important, in these exercises, that blank cartridges should fre- quently be used. Both parties cease firing when within fifty yards of each other ; if they are deployed as skirmishers the at- tacking party may be ordered to charge ; the men in each squad pass through the intervals in the other, each man passing to the right of the man directly in his front ; both squads halt at the command of the instruc- tor. The exercise may then be continued, the squads exchanging positions. 11)8 THE PLATOON. THE PLATOON. General Rules. 559. The chief of platoon is the instructor. Before forming line of squads or deploying, he desig- nates the center squad of the firing line and indicates the point of direction to the leader of the base squad. In forming line of squads or skirmishers, the chiefs of sections, at the preparatory command, place themselves in rear of their base squads in line, or abreast of them in column ; they see that the base squads keep the line of direction. The corporals take post in front of their squads in line at the preparatory command for forming line of squads ; in deploying as skirmishers they take or keep their places in ranks, retaining supervision of their squads. One section may form the firing line, the other the support ; or the entire platoon may be placed in the firing line. The post of the chief of platoon is between the firing line and support. The chief of a section in the firing line is posted six paces in rear of the center of his section ; he must be on the alert for signals from his chief of platoon. The chief of a section in support places himself six paces in front of his section. The support halts until the firing line has advanced about 150 yards, or if the deployment be made by the flank, marches that distance to the rear, unless cover be found nearer the support. If halted, the support stands, kneels, or lies down, according to the nature of the cover ; on open ground it may deploy. Marching by the flank under fire should be avoided. THE PLATOON. im Line of Squads, I J5£C. -15 PACES 560. The normal g interval between squads i s about fif- teen paces ; when a great- er or less interval is to be taken, it will be stated in the commands. Marching in line, to form line of squads °. 1. Line of squads, 2. On (such) squad, 3. march. PI. 93, Par. 560. The corporal of the base squad leads it (Pars. 515 and 516) in the indicated direction; the corporals to the right of the base move their squads obliquely to the right, those to the left, obliquel}’’ to G s ^coHPLs the left ; each moves to the front when at his interval c.c. 0 FStc. from the squad next toward the base. When the base squad arrives on the line, the chief of platoon com- mands : 1. Platoon, 2. halt. The base squad halts ; the others are halted on arriving on the line. On halting, the corporals place themselves three paces in rear of PI. 94, Par. 560. their squads. X^C.^FSEC. 200 1HE PLATOON. If marching in double time, or in quick time and the command be double fime, the base squad advances in quick time ; the others move in double time and take the quick time on arriving on the line ; the corporals keep their places in front of their squads. If at a halt, the base squad stands fast ; the others face and march away from the base squad ; each cor- poral halts his squad when it has gained its interval. Being in Column of Fours, to Form Line of Squads. \c.Qf'PLATOOJf^' JBCiilLFS OF S£C. kCOSNX ^ 561. To the front: 1. Right (or » left) front into line of squads, 2. g MARCH, 3. Platoon, 4. halt. At T. The movement is executed as in P . 95, Par. 561. 210 ; the corporals leading their squads to their proper places in line. I ^ mdxfsec. •>co/fris y^JtC-OF PLATOON X I 562. On right or left : 1. On right (or left) into line of squads, 2. MARCH, 3. Platoon, 4. halt. PI 96, Par. 562. THE PLATOON. 201 Escecuted as in Par. 208, except that each corporal leads his squad to its proper place in line by the shortest route. To Deploy as Skirmishers. 563. Being in line of squads : 1. -4s skirmishers, 2,. . MARCH. Executed by each squad (Pars. 523 and 524.) These commands may be given at any time after the commencement of the movement to form line of squads; the squads that have their intervals deploy at once, the others when they gain their intervals. 564. In exceptional cases, the platoon may be deployed in the same manner as a squad. Being in line : 1. As skirmishers, on (such) squad, 2. MARCH. PI. 97, Par. 564. The deployment is made as in the squad (Pars. 523 and 524), number two front rank of the base squad be- ing the base skirmisher ; all the men of the line deploy on him ; the squad leaders see that the men of their squads halt or march to the front as they individually gain their intervals. To Increase and Diminish Intervals. 565. Being in line of squads : 1. On (such) squad, to (so many) j^aces, extend (or close), 2. march. 202 the platoon. The squads open from or close toward the base squad. If marching, the movement is executed obliquely ; if at a halt, by the flank. Being deployed as skirmishers : 1. On (such) squad, to (so mixny) paces, extend (or close), 2. march. The skirmishers to tne right and left of number two front rank man of the base squad extend from or close toward him (Par. 525). The Assembly. 566. The chief takes post where his platoon is to form, and signals or commands: 1. Assemble, 2. march. The squads move promptly toward him and re-form the platoon. To assemble by squads : 1, Assemble by squads, 2. MARCH. Executed by each squad (Par. 532). 567. To cause one or more squads to take a certain formation, the chief of platoon designates the squads and gives his orders. Marchings. 568. Being in line of squads or skirmishers, the chief of platoon indicates the point of direction to the leader of the base squad and commands: 1. Forward, 2. Guide right {left ov center), 3. march. The base squad marches in the given direction ; the others march abreast of the base, keeping their intervals. 569. To march to the rear : 1. To the rear, 2. march. 3. Guide right {left or center). The chief of platoon indicates the point of direction to the leader of the base squad after the line has faced to the rear. 570. To make a slight change of direction, the chief of platoon indicates the new point of direction ; the squads conform promptly to the movements of the base. To make a considerable change, the chief of platoon indicates the new point of direction and commands; 1. Change direction to the right {ov left). 2. march. THE PLATOON. 208 The right squad, which is the base, changes direction as if alone (Par. 530), and halts ; the others conform to the new alignment. 571. The platoon in line of squads or skirmishers is marched by the flank and again in line by the com- mands and means prescribed for the squad (Par. 528). Firings. 572. The platoon and section, whether closed or ex- tended, execute the firings as explained for the squad. Volley firing may be used when the front is of such extent as to be controlled by the voice. To fire by section or squad, the chief of platoon com- mands : 1. Fire by section (or squad), 2. (So many) volleys, indicates, when desirable, the objective and range, and adds : 3. commence firing. Each section or squad executes the firings as if alone. The corporals take part in the firing except when the fire is by squad. The chief of platoon may designate one or more squads to fire. 573. A section constituting the firing line executes the preceding movements by the same commands and means, under the orders of the chief of section. Line of Sections. 574. The normal interval between sections of three squads each is about forty-five paces; between sections of two squads each, about thirty paces. The platoon forms line of sections, marches in this formation, and increases and diminishes intervals be- tween sections as explained for squads, substituting section for squad in the commands and explanations. The section forms line of squads or skirmishers, ral- lies, assembles and executes the firings and all other movements in extended order as explained for the platoon. 204 THE PLATOON. To Reinforce the Firing Line. 575. When there are intervals in the firing* line, either on the outer flanks or between the groups, the reinforce- ment is placed in these intervals. This method, called the group reinforcement, will be used when practicable. Advancing or being at a halt under cover, the firing line may diminish intervals toward one flank, the support deploying and moving up into the space made vacant. Under a heavy fire, the line may be reinforced by deploying the support on the march, the men of the support placing themselves on the line between the skirmishers ; officers and non-commissioned officers take charge of their proportionate parts of the front, and the action progresses as if no mixing had taken place. This method should be used only when the emergency demands a prompt reinforcement above all other considerations. The Rally. 576. The chief of platoon moves rapidly to the squad or place selected as a rallying point, and signals or commands : RALLY. The firing line rallies as explained for the squad. The support approaches and selects a position from which it can render the most effective assistance. To rally by sections, the chief of platoon commands ; RALLY BY SECTIONS, and then joins one of the sections. The chiefs of sections hasten to place themselves in the center of their sections, signal, and repeat the command. To rally by squads : rally by squads. The squad leaders make the signal ; the chiefs of sections and platoons join the nearest squads. When, as a result of reinforcing, sections and squads are mixed, each group rallies on the chief who com- mands it at the time. As soon after rallying as practicable, the platoon is assembled or again deployed. THE COMPANY. m THE COMPANY. 577. In battle formation, when part of a battalion, the company is in two echelons, a firing line and a sup- port. In battalion, the fighting front of a company is usually twice its front in close order. Acting alone, the company is in three echelons; a firing line, a support, and a reserve. The distances between these echelons vary with the nature of the ground and the effectiveness of the enemy’s fire. 578. On the offensive, the company, acting alone, may place at first only one section in the firing line, with one in support; the other two constitute the reserve. On the defensive, two sections constitute the firing line, one the support; and one the reserve. 579. As a rule, the sections to be designated for the firing line are the center sections in line, or the lead- ing sections in column or line of columns. A platoon may be designated for the firing line. 580. The company forms line of squads or sections, deploys as skirmishers, increases and diminishes inter- vals, assembles, rallies, and executes the marchings and firings by the commands and means prescribed for the platoon. Positions and Duties of Officers. 581. The captain is the instructor. He takes post be- tween the firing line and the support, or, if the for- mation be in three echelons, near the support. He designates the sections for the firing line, support, and reserve, directs the action of the whole company, con- trols the reinforcement of the firing line, and keeps up the supply of ammunition, regulating distribution and expenditure. His orders, given by word of command, 206 THE COMPANY. signals, or delivered by orderlies, are directed to the commanders of the firing line, support, and reserve. A musician remains with the captain. The first lieutenant commands the reserve, if there foe one, otherwise, the support. The second lieutenant commands the firing line when it consists of only one section, or of one section irorn each platoon. The third lieutenant, if there be one, may be assigned by the captain ; if the formation be in three echelons, he usally commands the support. The first sergeant, if not in command of a platoon or echelon, takes post near the captain. If the firing line consist of an entire platoon, it is commanded by its own lieutenant ; the other lieuten- ant commands the reserve or support. When the whole company is in the firing line, each lieutenant commands his own platoon. The commander of the firing line is ten paces in rear, and the commanders of the support and reserve ten paces in front of the centers of their respective echelons. The commander of the reserve maintains communi- cation with the support and with the captain, sending forward men to act as messengers and repeat signals. The commanders of echelons give the commands necessary for the execution of the orders of the cap- tain ; they give their special attention to the control and direction of the fire and to maintain cohesion and concert of action. 582. Before forming for attack or defense, the com- mander of a force acting alone makes the reconnois- sance necessary to determine the best disposition to be made. Commanders of companies and larger units forming part of larger commands throw out scouts in their im- mediate vicinity. The number of scouts depends upon THE COMPANY. 207 the nature of their duties and the extent ana character of the front. The commander will give them such specific instructions as circumstances require. Scouts sent out in front of the firing line convey in- formation acquired, by means of signals previously agreed upon. These rules are general. THE OFFENSIVE. The Company in Battalion. 583. When first coming within the zone of artillery fire, the company is formed in line and advances until the artillery fire becomes effective (on open ground, about twenty-five hundred yards from the enemy). The captain then orders a few scouts sent forward (usually from the sections to be in support), designates the non-commissioned officer to command them, indi- cating the objective to him a id to the chiefs of pla- toons and sections. The scouts must advance at an increased gait, unless the company be halted. The captain then designates two sections, preferably the second and third, for the firing line ; the first and fourth for supports ; gives the necessary instructions for the extension, and when the scouts have gained about one hundred and fifty yards to the front, com- mands : 1. Formforattacky2. march. The second lieutenant places himself in rear of the center, designates the center squad and commands : Guide center. The first lieutenant commands : 1. First and fourth sections y 2. halt. The chiefs of sections designate their sections and re- peat the cautions necessary. 208 THE COMPANY. The second and third sections move forward, the SCOUTS » 1 I § g JO PACES 5*5 i I Z‘>LT CAPT MUS }STS ;*Tz.r ip PACES 4 - Pl. 98, Par. 583. corporal of the base squad advancing in the direction in- dicated. When the firing line has advanced about two hundred yards, the first lieutenant puts the support in march ; each chief of sec- tion in the support so directs his base squad as to keep his section in rear of th<' outer flank of the firing line. 584. At about fourteen hundred yards the firing line forms line of sections and continues to move forward. At about twelve hundred yards, it forms line of squads. At about nine hun dred yards, it deploys as skirmishers. To avoid the mixing of sections and squads, each, while seeking cover, should keep within the deploying limits of its proper front. 585. At eight hundred yards or less, the scouts may find it necessary to halt and await the arrival of the firing line. Firing will be delayed as long as possible, though the captain may order volleys to be fired upon bodies of the enemy that expose themselves, or individual sharpshooters may be directed to fire. When the ad- vance should no longer continue without firing, the captain directs the number of volleys to be fired at each halt (see Par. 543). 586. The commander of the firing line gives the com- mands for the volleys ; he must never exceed the num- ber directed by the captain, but may reduce the number, or omit the firing, to avoid a mere waste of ammunition. THE COMPANY. 209 587. During this portion of the advance, the firing line will close upon its center, in order to make space for the supports to come up on the outer flanks. The support has been drawing nearer to the firing line without waiting for orders, taking the formations most favorable for reinforcing, keeping under cover as far as practicable. 588. The firing line may advance from cover to cover by rushes executed by the whole line if possible, or by alternate sections. 589. The arrival of supports upon the line should usually be the signal for a rush forward. 590. When the line has approached within about five hundred yards of the enemy’s position, alternate rushes will probably be necessary ; the lieutenant gives the in- structions while the men are lying down or behind cover, and then commands : 1. Advance by rushes, 2. Third (or second) section fire two (or three) volleys, 3. Second (or third) section forward. The chief of the third section gives vhe commands for the volleys. The instant the first volley is fired the chief of the second orders his section forward at double time ; hav- ing advanced about fifteen yards, or to cover if there be any, he halts it by the commands : 1. Fire two (or three) volleys {kneeling or lying down), and completes the commands for the volleys. I The instant of the delivery of the first volley by the second section, the third moves forward at double time about fifteen yards in advance of the line occupied by the second. The third section then fires the specified num- ber of volleys, the second advances about fifteen yards beyond the third, and so on ; the attack is thus con- tinued, each section advancing under cover of the fire and smoke of the other, the base squad keeping the line of direction. 591. Volleys will be used to the last practicable mo- 210 THE COMPANY. ment. The chiefs of sections and the squad leaders assist in maintaining* the strictest fire discipline. 592. During this period of the attack, as soon as it be- comes necessary to increase the intensity of the fire, the captain sends forward the supports to reinforce the firing line. • The sections of the support reinforce the sections of their own platoons, advancing under cover of their fire and taking position so as to join in the next rush. In moving forward to join the firing line, the sup- ports move rapidly in order to avoid loss, and reinforce as in Par. 575. The first lieutenant moves forward with the first section, and each lieutenant takes command of his own platoon ; the rushes may then be made by pla- toon. In emergencies the commander of the support may reinforce without waiting for orders. 593. As the company approaches the enemy’s posi- tion the captain selects favorable ground from which to make the assault, and having attained this position commands: Rapid fire. Platoon commanders then order bayonets fixed, cau- tion the men to lay down the sights, and command : 1. Rapid fire, kneeling, 2. commence firing. If any of the supports have not been brought up, they join the line at the command rapid fire. To charge, the captain signals: cease firing, and commands: 1. To the charge, 2. march. The men rise and advance in double time. Having arrived at about thirty yards from the en- emy’s position, the captain commands : charge. The men charge bayonet, quicken the pace and ad- vance upon the enemy. Having driven the enemy from his position, the cap- tain selects ground in front favorable for firing upon the retreating enemy, or for resisting a counter attack. THE COMPANY. 211 and causes the assembly to be sounded, or if necessary, the rally. In case of repulse, the captain at once prepares to renew the attack. Relieving the Firing Line. 594. In the exceptional cases in which the firing line must be relieved, the captain notifies the firing line and gives orders to the support which is to replace it. The support deploys so as to complete the movement in rear of the line and moves up into the intervals, or passes through the firing line, which is then marched to the rear and assembled. If the line is marching to the rear, the captain orders the support to deploy ; the firing line passes through the line thus formed, is assembled and becomes the support or a part of it. The Company Acting Alone. 595. The captain determines upon the direction and character of the attack and indicates the rallying point. The attack is conducted on the principles explained for the company in battalion. The firing line makes the front attack ; the support reconnoiters and protects the fianks, and supports the front attack ; the reserve, according to circumstances, makes a flank attack or participates in the front attack. When the support is absorbed in the firing line, the reserve, which has been drawing nearer during the advance, should be about 150 yards from the firing line. The action from this stage is conducted as for the company in battalion ; the reserve reinforcing the firing line as prescribed for the support. Having driven the enemy from position, a part or even the whole of the company should be used to 212 THE COMPANY. pursue him unless pursuit would endanger advan- tages already gained. THE DEFENSIVE. The Company in Battalion. 596. When the captain is ordered to occupy a defen- sive position, he conducts his company to the point se- lected and sends forward scouts, who connect with those from the adjacent companies. The captain indicates to each subdivision the posi- tion it is to occupy and the defensive works to be con- structed, such as abatis, shelter trenches, etc. The division and formation of the company are, in general, the same as on the offensive. To secure superiority of fire, a company may have three sections in the firing line and one in the support from the beginning of the action. The first resistance of the scouts should be for the pur- pose of causing the enemy to deploy and disclose his in- tentions. The captain then orders the battle formation. Fire is opened as soon as it can be made effective. Certain subdivisions may be designated to fire upon the enemy’s supports and reserves. The firing line is reinforced as in Par. 575. When the enemy arrives at about 500 yards from the position, the support is habitually absorbed in the firing line, and the defense is continued with the assist- ance of the battalion reserve. If the enemy be repulsed, the company takes the offensive. If the enemy succeed, the company withdraws and forms at the rallying point. The Company Acting Alone. 597. Depending upon the distance of the enemy, the company arrives at the position in battle formation or in order of march. THE COMPANY. 213 In the first case, the firing line is established on the position to be defended ; the support and reserve are placed under cover ; patrols are sent out in front and upon the flanks to reconnoiter. In the second case, the advance guard halts at the position and sends scouts and small patrols out in front and upon the flanks. The captain makes his prelimi- nary dispositions as explained for the company in bat- talion ; then takes the battle formation. The captain disposes the support and reserve so as to protect the flanks of the firing line. The supports, either wholly or in part, may be placed in the firing line from the very beginning of the en- gagement, in order to secure superiority of fire and a front at least equal to that of the attack. The captain keeps a portion of his reserve in hand, to execute a counter attack at the moment the enemy reaches the position, or to cover the retreat. Advantage should be taken of every opportunity to make short and energetic counter attacks upon the weak points of the enemy’s line. When the enemy is repulsed, he should be damaged as much as possible by increased energy of fire and should be pursued un- less this would compromise the security of the posi- tion. If necessary to retreat, the captain disposes the re- mainder of his reserve in such position as to most readily hold the enemy in check, near one of the flanks, if possible ; the firing line unmasks the reserve and takes position in rear of it, the reserve protects the re- treat of the firing line and retires in turn under its pro- tection. The company thus retires from position to position ; it is assembled and placed in column of route when out of range of the enemy. Unless ordered to the contrary, a position should not be abandoned except in the last extremity. 214 THE COMPANY. Action Against Cavalry. 598. As a principle, the advance or attack of infantry should not be checked by the appearance of cavalry. The latter should be kept at a distance by means of volleys executed by subdivisions designated for this purpose. If in line, and attacked in front, the company should receive the charge without changing its formation. If attacked in flank, the company, or a part of it on the threatened dank, changes front to face the attack. If in battle formation, and cavalry attack as fora- gers or in mass, it is better to receive the attack at a halt, than to rally. Only such dispositions are made as will quickly develop the greatest intensity of fire. If attacked in front, the firing line opens fire ; the sec- tions of the support are placed in rear of the flanks to guard the latter and fire upon the horsemen who en- velop them. If attacked in flank, the sections of the support and reserve face so as to find themselves ar- ranged in echelon ready to protect the threatened flank by their fire. If attacked by echelon, the fire will not be directed upon a fraction already repulsed, but upon the one following it. In a personal encounter the foot soldier should gain the left flank of the horseman. Defense and Attack of Artillery. 599. Infantry under artillery fire, seeks to lessen its effect by appropriate formations and use of cover. Defense. 600. A commander of infantry supports the batteries in his vicinity. Artillery separated from the other arms is furnished with a special support. THE COMPANY. 215 An infantry support for artillery protects the flanks and rear of the batteries and opposes the enemy’s in- fantry or cavalry acting against them ; it is usually posted on the flanks. Attack. 601. The company is disposed as for the attack of a position, but the firing line m.ay be deplo 3 ^ed as skir- mishers at a greater distance and the front may be more extended ; the rear echelons, if need be, are also de- ployed. When artillery is in motion, the fire is directed pref- tirably upon the horses. 216 THE BATTALION. THE BATTALION. 602. The principles of instruction for the squad, platoon and company in extended order apply. 603. The battalion is formed for battle in three eche- lons; a firing line, a line of supports and a reserve. In battalion, the firing line and supports together are designated the fighting line; it may be composed of one, two or even three companies. Extension. 604. Whatever be the formation of the battalion, the major designates the company or companies to form the fighting line and those for the reserve, gives in- structions for forming line of sections or squads, or de- ploying as skirmishers, indicates the point of direction and the object of the movement, and commands : 1. Form for attack, 2. (Such) the base company, 3. march. ? - 130 ras 4 m SCOUTS 2»S£a JOSEC. y>SEO, PAQE3'’*^^ eo PACES ^LT 2^T 200'YDS yPICHTIfiSUtiS OAfT % I 1 PRESERVE PI. 99, Par. 604. THE BATTALION. 217 The captains of companies for the fighting line desig- nate the sections for supports, and cause their com- panies to advance in the given direction and take the battle formation. The firing line extends as directed by the major and according to the principles explained for the company. The extension completed, there should be in the line of skirmishers an interval of about fifteen paces between the companies, which they should presei've during the advance. The reserve is held about 300 yards in rear of the line of supports. The fighting front of a battalion in regiment should not exceed one and one-half times the front of the bat- talion in close order. The major posts himself where he can best observe and direct the progress of the action, which is usually between the line of supports and reserve ; if he quits this place, he leaves a mpn there to tell where he may be found. The senior officer with the reserve companies takes command of them when they are united in close order. Mounted officers dismount when the battalion opens fire ; the horses are taken back to the reserve of the regiment. When the color of the regiment is with a battalion that takes the battle formation, it joins the regimental reserve, whose commander either directs the color to join a certain company or detaches a guard to remain with it during the action. Marchings. 605. The oattalion in battle formation regulates its march as explained for marching in line. The base squad keeps the line of direction independently of the movements of the companies, under the supervision of 218 THE BATTALION. the squad leader and the chief of section to which this squad belongs ; if the companies for any reason are obliged to give way they regain their places as soon as possible. The supports and reserve conform to the movements of the firing line. It is important that the line of direction should be correctly determined before taking up the advance ; if, however, changes of direction become necessary they are made gradually by slightly changing the direction of the base squad from time to time. Relieving and Reinforcing the Firing Line. 606. These movements are executed on the principles explained for the company, either as ordered by the major, or, in each company, by its captain. Relieving skirmishers is, however, an exceptional movement. Assembling and Rallying. 607. When no longei* compelled to remain in ex- tended order, the major assembles the battalion. The major may order one or more, or even all the companies in the firing line, to rally. The reserve approaches and selects a favorable posi- tion for supporting the companies that have rallied. THE BATTALION. 219 THE BATTALION IN ACTION. General Rules. 608. The major regulates the progress of the action, sees that the firing line advances upon the indicated objective, hastens or delays the reinforcement by the supports, and disposes the reserve so as to guard against surprise; leaving the execution of details to his subordinates, he exercises a general contjoi, and en- deavors constantly to increase the energy of the action. When necessary, he indicates what measures are to be taken to assure the occupation of the position, but should leave to each commander the discretion neces- sary to enable him to profit by all circumstances. Each captain in the fighting line regulates the march of the line within the limits assigned him, determines the distances to be passed over in rushes, and brings his support upon the firing line, pursuant to orders, oi without orders if the necessities of the moment re- quire ; he directs the fire and regulates its intensity. THE OFFENSIVE. The Battalion in Regiment. 609. When the major receives orders to attack, ho gives his instructions (Par. 604), and commands : 1. Form for attach, 2. (Such) the base company, 3. march. The companies in the fighting line conform to what has been prescribed for the company. (Pars. 583 to 594.) The reserve conforms to the movements of the fight- ing line, and, without waiting for orders, gradually draws nearer, so as to be ready to replace the supports- when the latter have been absorbed, the reserve com- panies taking the battle formation. 220 THE BATTALION. The attack is made as prescribed for the company. When the firing- line is about 500 yards from the ene- my’s position, the first echelon of the reserve is about 100 yards and the second about 200 yards in rear of the firing line. When the major thinks necessary he places one or more platoons of the reserve in the firing line. At about 200 yards from the enemy bayonets are fixed and the rapid fire is opened ; the last of the reserve, in rear of the point at which the main effort is to be made, is held in readiness to reinforce the line. The battalion in the second line of the regiment draws nearer so as to replace the battalion reserve if necessary, and take part in the charge. If the rapid fire does not shake the enemy, the re- mainder of the battalion reserve is quickly brought up, and another rush made, followed by the rapid fire. During this fire the battalion of the second line rein- forces the firing line ; at the signal from the colonel, the field music sounds the charge and the whole line rushes upon the enemy. As soon as the position has been carried, the firing line advances until it has found a position favorable for firing upon the enemy. The parts of the reserve not in the firing line hold themselves in readiness to pursue the enemy or to resist a counter attack. The first opportunity is taken to assemble the com- panies on the captured position. The major fornls the battalion and disposes his troops so as to secure the po- sition, and to pursue the enemy, if ordered. If repulsed, the line rallies under the protection of the reserve. The Battalion Acting Alone. 610. The action is conducted on the general principles explained for the battalion in regiment ; the front may be more extended, but the major must be able to direct THE BATTALION. 221 the action and secure the increasing power of the suc- cessive efforts. If the strength of his command war- rants it, he may attack both in front and flank. He must cover his flanks and secure his line of communi- cation. The enemy having been located, the major makes his dispositions for attack. If the attack succeeds, the battalion takes position and fires upon the enemy, as explained for the battalion in regiment, and, if opportunity offers, will pursue the enemy (Par. 595). If repulsed, the rally is protected by the parts of the reserve that have not been engaged. THE DEFENSIVE. The Battalion in Regiment. 611. The reconnoissance and occupation of the posi- tion are made on the principles explained for the com- pany acting alone under the protection of the patrols commanded by one or more offlcei s ; these patrols not only endeavor to discover the enemy’s position and direction of attack, but also keep his scouts and recon- noitering parties at a distance. As a rule, the battle formation is the same as on the offensive. When it is desirable to have an extended and dense firing line from the start, the two companies in the fighting line may be directed to keep but one section each in support. The same result is obtained by placing three companies in the fighting line, each having two sections in support. The line of defense is in general determined by th© configuration of the ground ; the points that command a clear field of fire in front and afford cover should usually be strongly occupied. The different parts of the front should be able to assist each other, and should not be separated by impassable obstacles. 222 THE BATTALION. If time and circumstances permit, tVie position is strengthened by hasty entrenchments. The strong points in the line, such as woods, fences, buildings, rising ground, etc., are placed in a state of defense or strengthened by field works ; in the selection of these points the chief consideration is a clear field of fire toward the front and flanks. The strong points are connected by shelter trenches, intervals being left to facilitate counter attacks and for passing from the defensive to the offensive. The action is conducted according to the principles explained (Par. 596). The dispositions of the rear echelons of the battalion depend upon the movements of the assailant ; the de- fender uses every means to overwhelm by fire such bodies of the enemy as remain in close order ; the sup- ports are placed in the firing line in proportion to the necessities of the case. Troops in rear, firing over the heads of those in front, should use volleys only. When all the supports are in the firing line and the enemy probably within 500 yards of the position, a part of the reserve reinforces the line ; the other part is held ready either to add the effect of its fire to that of the line or to assist in the counter attack when the of- fensive is taken up. In the last stage of the action, the firing line may, if necessary, be reinforced by the entire reserve. If retreat becomes necessary, it is conducted as pre- scribed for the company. When all the battalion re- serves have been absorbed on the firing line, the troops in the second line take position and protect the bat- talion while rallying, or, by an energetic counter attack, endeavor to gain the ascendency. When, in obedience to orders, resistance is not to be carried to the last extremity , the retreat is executed by ^ echelons from position to position. the battalion, 223 The Battalion Acting Alone. 612. The general principles stated for the company acting alone apply to the battalion. The battalion should not deploy before the enemy’s position is known. The battalion takes position and prepares to receive the attack, observing the following conditions : The front must be sufficiently occupied and extended from the beginning of the action ; this will usually re- quire two companies in the fighting line ; the other two companies are held in reserve, in rear of the supports, covering the flanks and extending beyond them. When the supports have been absorbed in the firing line, they are replaced by the reserve companies, which are disposed so as to protect the flanks. When the front of the position is very strong, a rela- tively greater part of the command may be placed in the reserve to insure more decisive effect in counter pittacks. DISPOSITIONS OF A BATTALION. Operating on a Flank of a Line. 613. The special object may be to secure the flank, to envelope the enemy’s flank, or to engage the enemy at one point, while the regiment or brigade prepares and executes the principal attack at another. In these different cases the major conforms to the principles laid down for the offensive or defensive action of the bat- talion in regiment, as the case may require. As Advance Guard of a Regiment. 614. The advance guard acts offensively or defensive ly according to circumstances. Its action is subordinat to that of the main body ; it should carefully avoid be- coming so involved as to compel the latter to depart from its original purpose. The battalion as advance 224 THE BATTALION. g’uard acts on the offensive as prescribed for the bat- talion acting alone ; on the defensive it may take the battle formation with three or even four companies at the first indication of the presence of the enemy ; the strong points are occupied and the front extended as much as necessary to prevent being outflanked. If the enemy without attacking shows himself in force the battalion occupies the strong points. As Rear Guard of a Regiment. 615. The object of the rear guard is to retard the en- emy so as to enable the main body to gain time or dis- tance ; it acts chiefly on the defensive. If the battalion as rear guard be attacked, it will not carry resistance so far as to be cut off from the main body. Advantage is taken of any want of precaution on the part of the enemy to draw him into ambush or to make sudden, short and energetic offensive returns. The rear guard may sometimes take the offensive, for example : When it is guarding a defile during the passage of the main body, or when opposing the egress of the enemy at the outlet of a pass. The rear guard should not fight to extremity except to secure the safety of the main body. Against Cavalry. 616. The principles stated for the company apply to the battalion. If there be time, the major may place the companies in echelon. To this end he indicates the base company, the in- terval and distance which should separate the echelons and the relative positions of the companies. The base company stands fast ; the others are rapidly led by their captains to the places they are to occupy. THE BATTALION. 225 The echelons are formed by advancing companies on the flank farthest from the enemy’s artillery ; they are disposed in such a manner as to afford the heaviest possible fire without risk of firing into one another. DEFENSE AND ATTACK OF ARTILLERY. 617. The principles stated for the company apply to the battalion. Defense, 618. The companies are posted in front of the intervals between groups of batteries and on the flanks, so as not to hinder the fire of the artillery ; they are held ready to meet the attack. Attack. 619. The battalion is disposed as for the attack of a position ; the parts in close order advance in echelons and thin lines ; the advance is led on as rapidly as possible and the attack precipitated when within a short distance of the guns. The action is conducted according to the general principles explained for the company, and the attacks should be rnade against a flank if possible. If the artillery be supported by infantry, the major directs against the latter a sufficient force to silence its fire, and uses the remainder of his battalion against the artillery. NIGHT OPERATIONS.^ 620. To be successful, a night attack should be a sur- prise ; it should be prepared secretly, avoiding indica^ tions that might attract the attention of the enemy. Once engaged, it is necessary to act vigorously and promptly. It is essential to operate over ground known in ad- vance. 226 THE BATTALION. It is equally important that the leaders of the differ- enfunits be carefully instructed as to the parts they are to take, the field assigned them, the rallying pointe and the line of retreat. On the offensive, the troops usually operate in com- pact formation, so as to be kept in hand and to prevent misunderstandings. Under cover of darkness the assailant a.pproaches, in order and silence, and without firing, as near as possible to the enemy’s position ; he then assaults resolutely, not replying to the fire, and comes as quickly as possi- ble to the encounter, hand to hand. On the defensive, when a night attack is expected, the position is reinforced by troops or strengthened by obstacles or hasty entrenchments ; the positions to be occupied by the different units are indicated and under- stood beforehand. After the opening of the action, all movements which could produce disorder or confusion are avoided. The fire is directed particularly upon the approaches to the position. THE REGIMENT. 227 THE REGIMENT. 621. The principles explained for the battalion apply. A battalion in battle formation is said to be in the fighting line when it has any part in the firing line. This rule applies to larger commands. The regiment is formed for battle in two or three lines depending upon the extent of front to be occupied; this should not exceed the front of the regiment formed in one line in close order increased by one-half the in- terval between it and the adjacent regiments. When in two lines, two battalions constitute the fighting line ; the other is posted as reserve about six hundred yards in rear. When in three lines, one battalion forms the fighting line, one about six hundred and the other about twelve hundred yards in rear. The reserve may be posted in rear of the center, or in rear of one or both flanks. The colonel takes post near the center of the line of the battalion reserves of the fighting line ; if called elsewhere he indicates his position. He superintends the action and directs the majors of battalions in reserve when to reinforce. Unless he specifies the formations for battalions in reserve, the majors adopt the formations they deem best suited to the ground and other circumstances. 228 THE BRIGADE IN BATTLE. THE BRIGADE IN BATTLE. 622. The formation depends upon whether the bri- gade is acting alone or with other troops, and varies in each case to suit the extent and character of the front to be occupied. 623. If formed in one line, two battalions constitute the fighting line of each regiment, the third battalion of each regiment being held as a regimental reserve. In this case there is no separate brigade reserve, unless furnished by another brigade. 624. In two lines, the two leading regiments consti- tute the fighting line of the brigade and are formed as above. The rear regiment, as a second line, constitutes the brigade reserve and is posted about six hundred paces in rear of the reserve battalions of the leading regiments ; it will be given the battle formation if necessary. If the brigade approaches the fiei J of battle marching in column of fours, the general may order the leading regiments on the fighting line, without regimental re- serves, and supply a battalion from the rear regiment to each regiment in the fighting line as a reserve. This formation is open to the objection of speedily disinte- grating the rear regiment, and will be resorted to only when a rapid extension of front is of the first import- ance. 625. For a more powerful attack, the regiments may be formed side by side, each regiment in three lines. The colonels will avoid calling on their second battalions prematurely ; the third battalion should not enter ac- tion without orders from the general. 626. The general will make such changes in the fore- going formations as are rendered necessary by the char- acter of the action and the nature of the ground. THE BRIGADE IN BATTLE. 229 627. The general has no fixed portion, but will al- ways indicate where reports will be received. 628. If compelled to give an order to a battalion com* mander, the general should so inform his colonel as soon as practicable. 629. The general may direct when the troops compos- ing the first line shall pass from close to extended order, or this may be left to the discretion of the regi- mental and battalion commanders ; a reserve need not necessarily be posted in rear of the line ; frequently it may be advantageously formed in echelon with that line. This rule is general. To Withdraw the Brigade, 630. The general sends orders to the colonels : With, draw and form in one (or two) lines on (such) battalion, (such) regiment ; or, Withdi^aw and form in column on (such) battalion, (such) regiment. The general indicates the position to be occupied by the designated battalion and the colonels add the neces- sary commands. The battalions form in the same order as before the deployment, or the general mav change this order. 631. If the order be to form in column, column of fours will be understood, unless the general indicates another formation. 230 THE DIVISION IN BATTLE. THE DIVISION IN BATTLE, 632. The division may be formed with one or two bri- gades in the fighting line and the others in the reserve, or the three brigades may be placed in the fighting line; in either case, each brigade takes one of the formations prescribed for the brigade in battle. The artillery takes the positions assigned by the divi- sion commander. Officers in command of the reserves will adopt such formations as will not unnecessarily interfere with the maneuvers of the other arms. 633. The division commander conducts the action on the principles prescribed for smaller commands. 634. The officers of the reserve will be constantly on the alert to prevent any panic that may arise among the troops of the first line spreading to their own. 635. The reserve is not necessarily united ; the regi- ments and battalions composing it may be posted in rear of different parts of the first line. ADVANCE AND REAR GUARD. 331 ADVANCE AND REAR GUARD. 636. An advance guard is a body of troops thrown out in front of a marching column to cover its movements, to prevent surprise and gain information. 637. In an advance, it seizes advantageous positions and holds them until the main body comes up; or holds in check the advancing enemy until the main body can deploy and take up a position to meet him. 638. In retreat, it prepares the way for the main body, guarding and repairing roads, bridges, etc.; sweeping away any partisans or guerrillas. If hostile troops have outmarched the column and are in front of it, the ad- vance guard performs duties of the same nature as in the advance. 639. The advance guard is divided into two nearly equal parts, the vanguard and the reserve. The vanguard is subdivided into the advance party and the support. The advance party furnishes the lead- ing and flanking groups. The support furnishes its own flankers. 640. A small advance guard, consisting of a com- pany of infantry of one hundred men, may be disposed as follows : A point, or leading group, consisting of three men under a corporal; a flanking group of three men on either hand, one hundred and fifty yards distant and somewhat retired ; the remainder of the advance party, fourteen men, under a sergeant, at one hundred yards in rear of the point. The support follows at one hundred and fifty yards in rear of the advance party, throwing out, if necessary, two flanking groups of three men each, slightly in ad- vance of the support, and somewhat farther out than 232 advance and rear guard. the flankers of the advance party. The support, includ- ing its flankers, numbers twenty-five men. The com- mander of the vanguard is with the support. PI. 100, Par. 640. The reserve^ one-half of the advance guard, follows at two hundred and fifty yards in rear of the support ; the i^serve may throw out flanking detachments at from two hundred to four hundred yards, on either or both flanks, and somewhat m advance and in rear of its posi- tion. ADVANCE AND REAR GUARD. 233 The commander of the advance guard is with the re- serve. The main column follows at three hundred yards in rear of the reserve, or eight hundred yards from the point. When necessary, the support sends out one or two men to preserve communication with the advance party ; the reserve may send out men to preserve com- munication with the vanguard and with the main body. 641. Rear guards Sive corresponding bodies in rear of the column. In a forward movement they protect the rear of the column from raiding parties or detachments, arrest stragglers, prevent pillaging, etc. 642. In a retreat they cover the column, checking the enemy, and delaying him so as to insure the safety of the column. 643. The example given of the order of march of a small advance guard serves equally well as a type for a rear guard of the same strength, if it be considered as faced to the rear throughout. 644. The strength of the advance guard in a forward movement varies from one-eighth to one-fourth of the whole force ; in a very small force, one-eighth ; in a very large force, one-fourth ; and generally one- sixth. The rear guard is generally one-half the strength of the advance guard. In retreat, the proportions given above for the ad- vance guard would apply to the rear guard, and the advance guard would be half the strength of the rear guard. It should be borne in mind, however, that these pro- portions vary according to circumstances, and must de- pend upon the judgment of the commander. 645. The foregoing rules must be modified to suit the varying conditions of advance and retreat. 234 outposts. OUTPOSTS. 646. The size of the detachment for outpost duty de- pends upon the strength of the main command, the proximity of the enemy, the extent of front to be covered, the character of the country, etc.; it should not, as a rule, exceed one-sixth of the whole force. 647. The object is to guard all approaches, to obtain the earliest information of the enemy’s movements, and to obstruct and delay his advance. 648. The outposts should cover the entire front, ex- tend well beyond the flanks and toward the rear. Outposts are generally disposed as follows : First : — A line of sentinels. Second: — A line of small groups, called pickets. Third : — A line of larger groups, called supports. Fourth : — The reserve. The reserve is sometimes omitted, when the supports hold a strong defensive line. Posts in the line of sentinels are from one hundred to three hundred yards apart, and one or two men are placed on each post. The sentinels keep themselves concealed and watch the ground in their front and between them and the posts on their right and left ; at least one man on each post must always be on the alert. The picket is posted about four hundred yards in rear of the center of the line of sentinels for which it fur- nishes reliefs. The picket, when necessary, sends out patrols. The support is posted about six hundred yards in rear of the center of the line of pickets. The reserve is about one thousand yards in rear of the line of supports, and about two thousand yards in front of the main body. OUTPOSTS. 335 tea*,- T’ '•/r~ i Q ^INgOP^ PI. 101, Par. 649. The distances given «« above will be modified according to circum- stances by the com- mander of the outposts. 649. Plate No. 101 shows an outpost com- posed of an infantry battalion of four hun- dred men, covering a front of one mile. 650. The line of sentinels and the line of pickets may be replaced by a single line of posts of four men each. The posts should be about one hundred yards apart, and one man at each post should be continually on the alert. The line of small posts should not be more tha». three hundred yards in advance of the supports. As a rule, this formation should be adopted only when the outpost line is: in a close country and oc- cupies a strong position. 236 MARCHES. MARCHES. 651. Th^ average march for infantry is from fifteen to twenty miles per day. 652. When troops move in large bodies, and particu- larly in the vicinity of the enemy, the march should be conducted in several columns, in order to diminish the depth of the columns and to expedite the deployment into line of battle. 653. The order of march should state the time for each division to commence its movement, and the points where the divison or its elements should enter the main route, so as not to interfere with the march of the division preceding or following, and to prevent fatigue from keeping' men longer under arms than is necessary. 654. In route marches, regiments usually alternate in leading the brigade ; in like manner brigades alternate in divisions, and divisions in corps. 655. In large commands, the roads, if possible, are left to the artillery and trains. The order of march should state whether the troops or t’^ains should have the right of way. 656. Each brigade is provided with a corps of pio- neers under charge of a commissioned officer. The pio- neers precede the column for the purpose of removing obstacles and preparing the way for the troops. Whenever fences, hedges, walls, ditches, or small streams are encountered, a passageway is made wide enough for the column to march without obstruction. This will prevent the column from lengthening out, and also prevent the fatigue and delay of regaining distances. Pioneers, mounted or in wagons when practicable, should repair the roads for the trains. 657. When practicable, marches should begin in the morning after the men have had their breakfasts. After marching half or three-quarters of an hour, the MARCHES. 237 troops are halted for fifteen minutes to allow the men to relieve themselves and to adjust their clothing and accouterments. After the first rest there should be a halt of ten min- utes every hour. On long marches, halts of half or three-quarters of an hour should be made for meals. The halt, if practica- ble, should be made in the vicinity of wood and water. When long distances have to be overcome rapidly, it is done by changing gaits ; the most favorable ground is selected for the double time ; special care should be taken not to exhaust the troops immediately before en- , gaging the enemy. 658. No man will be permitted to leave the ranks without permission of the captain; if the absence be, for a few minutes only, the man will leave his arms and accouterments with the company till he rejoins it ; if he needs medical attendance, the captain gives him a pass to the surgeon, showing his name, company, and regi- ment ; if he is unable to return to his company, the sur- geon admits him to the ambulance, or indorses the pass, stating that he is permitted to fall rat on account of sickness. The provost guard of the brigade marches in rear of the brigade. It is the duty of all officers and non-commissioned offi- cers to suppress straggling. Men who fall out of ranks are examined by the provost guard, and if absent without authority, they are arrested and sent to their regiments. 659. Whenever delays occur in front, the brigades may fortn in column of battalions and stack arms. It is the duty of all commanders, within their commands, to investigate, personally or by means of staff officei^, every cause of delay, and staff officers should frequently be sent ahead for the purpose of gaining any informa- tion that may shorten the march and lessen the fatigue of the troops. 238 CAMPING. CAMPING. 660. In the presence of the enemy the troops bivouac in position ; if safety permit, tents may be pitched im- mediately in rear of the line of stacks ; the tents of the company officers in rear of their companies, the tents of the field and staff in rear of the center of the line of company officers. 661. When not in the presence of the enemy, each battalion usually camps in column of companies at con- venient distances. The tents of each company are ar- ranged in two lines, facing each other, or in one line, all facing in the same direction ; the tents of the com- pany officers are aranged in line parallel to the flank of the column and at a convenient distance, facing the company street, captain’s tent on the right, his lieuten- ants’ on his left. The first sergeant’s tent is on the flank of the company toward the officers’ tents. Of DDQ a ti a B D BBS a SIMM a a a a bob ucoup.itiTCifSMr OD DO po Da aa a a D a a □ aa a oa □□ nneta t rm. staff ff.d^AFF %rCHEN 00 □□ cncouFOFFicem ■ o a KITCHENS D O a MAJORS tBATT. STAFF OHirOHEF' aOFFfOERS’ SINKS PI. 102, Par. 661. The tents of the major and his staff, when practica- ble, are in line in rear of and parallel to those of the CAMPING. 239 company officers ; the major opposite the center of the column ; the adjutant is on the left of the major ; the other staff officers are on the left of the adjutant. The colonel is opposite the center of the column in rear of the line of majors, the lieutenant-colonel on his right, the adjutant on the left of the colonel, the other staff officers on the left of the adjutant. The tents of the non-commissioned staff are in rear of the tents of the staff ; they may be assigned to tents in the companies. The kitchens of the men are in line on the flank oppo- site the company officers ; they may be placed at the head or rear of the column ; the sinks for the men are outside of the line of kitchens. The kitchens of the officers are in rear of their tents ; the sinks for the officers are in rear of the line of tents of the field and staff. The positions of the color line, guard tents, field hos- pital, officers’ horses, baggage wagons, etc., are pre- scribed by the commanding officer. The width of the company streets and the streets in front of the company officers, majors and staffs, and colonel and staff, varies with the nature of the ground and the strength of the command. Ground for camping should be succeptible of good drainage, and should be near wood and water. When time will permit, all the streets are ditched ; a shallow ditch is also made around each tent. When straw, leaves, or boughs are at hand, the men should be required to raise their beds above the ground; attention to this rule, to cleanliness, and to the proper cooking of food will greatly diminish the number and frequency of camp diseases. On arriving in camp, if orders are not communicated for resuming the march the following morning, sinks should at once be dug. The sinks should be concealed 240 HONORS TO BE PAID BY TROOPS. by bushes or tents, and should be covered daily with fresh earth. In winter quarters, tents may be pitched on frames made of boards or split logs, the bunks of the men be- ing arranged one above another. HONORS TO BE PAID BY TROOPS. 662. Honors, salutes, etc., to be paid by troops are prescribed in Pars. 11, 422 to 441, inclusive, and 516 to %27, inclusive, A.R., 1889. [See Appendix.] CEREMONIES* 241 CEREMONIES. General Rules, 663. On occasions of ceremonies, except funeral es- cort, troops are arranged from right to left in line and from head to rear in column, in the following order : First, infantry ; second, light artillery ; third, cavalry. Artillery serving as infantry is posted as infantry. Dis- mounted cavalry and marines are on the left of the in- fantry. Engineer troops are on the right of the com- mand to which they are attached. In the same arm, regulars, volunteers, and militia are posted in line from right to left, or in column from head to rear, in the order named. On all other occasions troops of all classes, are posted at the discretion of the general or senior commander. 664. When forming for ceremonies, the companies of the battalion are posted according to the rank of the company commanders present, as shown in the table in Par. 253 ; the battalions of the regiment, the regiments of the brigade, the brigades of the division, and the divi- sions of the corps are posted from right to left in line, or from head to rear in column, in the order of rank of their respective commanders present, the senior on the right or at the head. 665. At parades and reviews, the field and staff are habitually mounted ; they are dismounted when there- viewing officer is dismounted. 666. A non-commissioned officer in command of his company retains his post on the right of the right guide when the battalion is in line ; he has the post of the captain when the battalion is in column. At parade, be- fore bringing his company to parade rest, he steps two paces to the front and faces to the left ; having given 242 CEREMONIES. his commands, he resumes his post and comes to parade rest. At inspection, when ranks are open, his post is on the right of the right guide. In exercises in the manual, non-commissioned officers commanding companies or platoons execute only the order and parade rest ; in rendering honors, the present and carry ; while marching, the right shoulder and carry. GENERAL RULES FOR REVIEWS. 667. The adjutanjb or adjutant-general posts men or otherwise marks the points where the column changes direction, in such manner that the right flank in passing shall be about twelve paces from the reviewing officer. He also marks a point about fifty paces to the left of the reviewing officer, where each company is brought to the carry at the command of its captain ; the companies suc- cessively resume the right shoulder about fifty paces beyond the reviewing officer. 668. The post of the reviewing officer, usually oppo- site the center of the line, is marked by a flag. The reviewing officer should be at the flag before the head of the column reaches that point ; before that time he may take any position to observe the movements of the troops. 669. The reviewing officer, his staff, and others ac- companying him salute the color by uncovering, wheth- er the color salutes or not ; the reviewing officer alone returns the salutes of commanders of battalions, bat- teries, and squadrons, and all higher units. 670. The staff of the reviewing officer is in single rank, six paces in rear of him, in the following order from right to left: Chief of staff, adjutant-general, aids, then the other members of the staff in the order of rank, the senior on the right ; the flag and orderlies place themselves three paces in rear of the staff, the flag on the right. CEREMONIES. 243 671. Officers of the same or higher grade and distin- guished personages invited to accompany the reviewing officer place themselves on his left; their staffs and order- lies place themselves on the left of the staff and orderlies of the reviewing officer; all others who accompany the reviewing officer place themselves on the left of his staff, their orderlies in rear. 672. While riding around the troops, the review- ing officer may direct his staff, flag, and orderlies to remain at the post of the reviewing officer, or that onl^' his personal staff and flag shall accompany him, 673. The staff officers, in passing around the troops, or ill review, ride in one or more ranks, according to the number. 674. Commanders of brigades and divisions take their places in the column in time to allow the commanders in front of them to take their places when at one hun- dred paces from the reviewing officer. 675. The staff, flag, and orderlies of brigade, division, and corps commanders place themselves in the order prescribed for the staff, flag, and orderlies of the review- ing officer. 676. Commanders of brigades, divisions and corps, and their staff officers draw sword when they take their places in column before passing in review ; they return sword immediately after placing themselves on the right of the reviewing officer. 677. When a commander of a corps, division, brig- ade, or regiment turns out of the column to place him- self near the reviewing officer, his post is on the right of the commanders already there ; his staff will arrange themselves in single rank on the right of the staff already there ; his flag and orderlies in rear of his staff. Each commander, when his rear company has passed, salutes the reviewing officer, and with his staff and orderlies rejoins his command. 244 CEREMONIES, 678. The brigade commander, while the reviewing officer is not in front or in rear of his brigade, may cause it to stand at ease, rest, or stack arms, and fall out, and resume attention so as not to interfere with the ceremony. 679. The colonels repeat the commands of the brig- ade commander. 680. Whenever the colonel faces the line to give com- mands the majors face at the same time ; they resume their front after seeing the movement executed. All such commands are executed when they have been re- peated by the majors. When the command repeated is present arms, the colonel’s staff salute at the com- mand of the colonel ; the colonel and majors salute after resuming their front. The same rules apply to the colonels and majors, and to the general’s and colonel’s staff when the brigade commander gives commands. 681. When the general or colonel faces the line to give commands, the staff and orderlies do not change position. 682. When the rank of the reviewing officer entitles him to the honor, each color salutes at the command present arms, given or repeated by the major of the battalion with which it is posted, and again in passing in review. 683. The band of each regiment plays while the review- ing officer is passing in front and in rear of the regiment. Each band, after passing the reviewing officer, turns out of the column and takes post in front of the review- ing officer, continues to play until its regiment has passed, then ceases playing and follows in rear of its regiment ; the band of the next following regiment then commences. While marching in review, but one band in each brig- ade plays at a time, and but one band at a time when within one hundred paces of the reviewing officer. 684. When the color salutes, in formations for re- view, the march, flourishes, or ruffles are sounded by CEREMONIES. 245 sj-U the field music ; in passing in review, by the field music with the band that is halted in front of the re- viewing officer. 685. The formation for review may be modified to suit the ground, and the present in line and the ride around the line by the reviewing officer may be dis- pensed with ; the troops march in review with the guide either right or left, according as the post of the reviewing officer is on the right or left of the column ; the officers and non-commissioned officers who have designated places on a flank of the column when the gnide is right are on the opposite flank when the guide is left ; in the latter case, commanders and their staffs turning out of the column take post as prescribed, but to the left of the reviewing officer. 686. Except in the review of a single battalion, the troops pass in review in quick time only. 687. In reviews of divisions and corps, each battalion, after its rear has passed the reviewing officer fift}^ paces, takes the double time for one hundred paces, in order not to interfere with the march of the column in rear. 688. The troops, having passed the reviewing officer, return to their camps by the most practicable route, being careful not to delay the march of the troops in rear of them. 246 BATTALION REVIEW. BATTALION REVIEW. 689. The reviewing officer takes his post. 690. The battalion being in line, at order arms, the major, in front of and facing the center, commands i 1. Prepare for review, 2. Open ranks, 3. march, 4. FRONT. Ranks being opened, the major takes post facing to the front, twenty paces in front of the center of the bat- talion. The reviewing officer moves a few paces toward the major and halts, when the major turns about and commands: 1. Carry, 2. arms, 3. Present, 4. arms. Should the rank of the reviewing officer entitle him to the honor, the color salutes as arms are presented, and the band or field music sounds the march, flour- ishes, or ruffles (Pars. 422 to 427, A. R., 1889). Arms having been presented, the major turns about and •salutes. The reviewing officer returns the salute, after which the major turns about and brings the battalion to order arms, turns again to the front, and returns sword. The reviewing officer now starts for the right of the line ; the major joins him, salutes, and, taking post on his right, accompanies him around the battalion. The re- viewing officer proceeds to the right of the band, passes in front of the company officers to the left of the line and returns to the right, passing in rear of the file closers. While the reviewing officer is going around the bat- talion, the band plays, ceasing when he leaves the right to return to his post. On leaving the right of the line, the major takes his place on the left of the reviewing officer, accompanies him a few paces, salutes, moves directly to his post in front of the battalion, faces it, draws sword, and commands : 1. Close ranks, 2. march, 3. Comjyanies right, 4. march. The staff, non-commissioned staff, and band take their places (Pars. 255 and 256). BATTALION REVIEW. 247 691. The column being formed, the major commands : 1, Pass in review^ 2. Forward, 3. Guide right, 4. march. The column moves off, the band playing ; the column changes direction, without command from the major, at the points indicated ; the major takes his post, six paces in front of the staff, immediately after the second change ; each company is brought to the carry at the point indicated ; the band having passed the reviewing officer, turns to the left out of the column, takes post in front of and facing the reviewing officer, and remains there until the review terminates. 692. The major and staff, except the adjutant, salute together when the major is at six paces from the review- ing officer, and return to the carry together when the major has marched six paces beyond him ; the other officers, the non-commissioned staff, the drum major, and non-commissioned officers in command of subdivisions, salute and return to the carry at the points prescribed for the major ; in saluting, they turn the head and look toward the reviewing officer. Staff and non-commis- sioned staff officers without swords salute with the hand. If the reviewing officer be entitled to a salute from the color, the color salutes when at six paces from him, and is raised when at six paces beyond him ; as the color salutes, the field mu^ic sounds the march, flourishes, or ruffles, the band continuing to play. The reviewing officer returns only the salute of the major and the color; he salutes the color by uncovering. 693. The major, having saluted, takes post on the right of the reviewing officer, remains there till the rear of the battalion has passed, and then rejoins his battal- ion. The band ceases to play when the column has completed its first change of direction after passing the reviewing officer. 694. When the battalion arrives at its original posi- tion in column, the major commands : 1. Double time„ 2. MARCH. 248 BATTALION REVIEW. The band plays in double time. The battalion passes in review as before, except that, in double time, there is no saluting and pieces remain at the right shoulder. The review terminates when the rear company has passed the reviewing officer ; the band then ceases to play, and, unless otherwise directed by the major, re- turns to the position it occupied before marching in re- view, or is dismissed ; the major rejoins the battalion and may order quick time. The battalion then executes such movements as the reviewing officer may have di- rected, or is marched to its parade ground and dismissed. 695. Marching past in double time may, in the dis- cretion of the reviewing officer, be omitted ; the review then terminates as before. 696. When desirable that a battalion should be re- viewed before an inspector junior in rank to the com- manding officer, the commanding officer will receive the review, and will be accompanied by the inspector. REGIMENTAL REVIEW. 249 REGIMENTAL REVIEW. 697. The regiment is formed in line, in line of pla^ toon columns at close interval, or in line of masses. In Line. 698. The regiment having been formed in line, the colonel takes his post facing to the front; the adjutant, during the review, is on the right of the staff. When the reviewing officer approaches his post, the colonel faces the regiment and commands: 1. Prepare for review, 2. Open ranks, 3. march. Ranks having been opened, the colonel faces to the front. The reviewing officer, accompanied by his staff, then approaches the colonel, halting at thirty paces in front of him. The colonel then faces the regiment, and commands: 1. Carry, 2. arms, 3. Present, 4. arms, faces to the front and salutes. The staff salute and return to the carry at the com- mand of the colonel. The reviewing officer having returned the salute, the colonel brings the regiment to order arms ; the colonel and his staff return sword ; the colonel joins the review- ing officer, salutes and places himself on his right. The colonel’s staff place themselves on the right of the staff of the reviewing officer, unless the reviewing officer ad- vances alone, in which case the colonel alone joins and accompanies him, the staffs remaining at their posts. The reviewing officer then goes to the right of the line, passes in rear of the line of majors to the left, and re- turns in rear of the fil-e closers to the right, whence he proceeds to his post. 250 REGIMENTAL REVIEW. While the reviewing officer is passing around the reg- iment, the band plays. When the reviewing officer leaves the right of the line, after passing around the regiment, the colonel sa- lutes, returns by the shortest line to his post facing the regiment, and draws sword; the colonel’s staff take post at the same time, in rear of the colonel, and draw sword. The colonel commands: 1. Close ranks, 2. march, 3. Companies right, 4. march. The column having been formed, each major takes post six paces in front of his staff ; the lieutenant- colonel six paces to the right of the column, abreast of the major of the first battalion. The colonel then commands: 1. Pass in review, 2. Forward, 3. Guide right, 4. march. The column passes in review in quick time, according to the principles prescribed for the battalion review. When the head of the column has made its second change of direction, the colonel places himself twenty- four paces in front of the band. 699. The colonel having saluted, places himself on the right of the reviewing officer. The majors do not turn out of the column after passing the reviewing of- ficer. 700. The rear of the column having passed the re- viewing officer, the battalions, unless otherwise directed, are marched to their parade grounds and dismissed. In Line of Platoon Columns, at Close Interval. 701. With the following modifications, the rules for the review of the regiment in line apply : — Ranks are not opened. The colonel commands : Pre- parefor review, and faces to the front. When the reviewing officer has passed around the regiment, the colonel commands: 1. Platoons right, 2. MARCH. The column having been formed, the colonel com- REGIMENTAL REVIEW. 251 mands: 1. Pass in review, 2. Take full distance, 3. Guide right, 4. march. The leading company moves off at the command march, followed by the others in succession when at full distance. Each major takes post six paces in front of his staff when his companies have full distance. In Line of Masses. 702. The same rules apply as for the review of the regiment in line of platoon columns at close interval, except that to form column for passing in review, the colonel commands: 1. Battalions, 2. Change direc- tion by the left flank, 3. march. ^52 BRIGADE REVIEW. BRIGADE REVIEW. 703. The brigade is formed in line of masses, with an interval of sixty paces between regiments. The brigade commander takes post thirty paces in front of the center of the line of colonels. The brigade having been formed and the reviewing officer having approached within thirty paces, the brig- ade commander faces the brigade and commands: 1. Carry, 2. arms, 3. PresentsA arms, then faces to the front and salutes. The reviewing officer having returned the salute, the brigade commander faces the brigade, commands: 1. Carry, 2. arms, 3. Order, 4. arms, then returns sword and joins the reviewing officer. The reviewing officer, accompanied by his staff and the brigade commander and his staff, then proceeds to the right of the brigade, passing in front of the colonel of the first regiment, to the right of the line, thence around the brigade, passing to the left in rear of the majors, and to the right in rear of the file closers. 704. The colonels remain at their posts facing to the front while the reviewing officer is passing around the brigade. When the reviewing officer leaves the right of the line, the brigade commander returns by the short- est line to his post, faces the brigade and commands: 1. Battalions, 2. Change direction hy the left flank, 3. MARCH. The column having been formed, the brigade con>- mander commands: 1. Pass in review, 2, Take full dis^ tance, 3. Guide right, 4. march. The column moves off as in regimental review. 705. Each colonel takes post twenty-four paces in front of the band of his regiment when the head of his regiment has made its second change of direction. BRIGADE REVIEW. 253 The brigade commander takes post twenty-four paces in front of the leading colonel when at one hundred paces from tlie reviewing officer. The brigade commander and colonels, when they have saluted the reviewing officer, turn out of the column and take post on his right. The review terminates when the last battalion has passed the reviewing officer. 254 DIVISION REVIEW. DIVISION REVIEW. 706. The division is formed in one, two, or three lines of masses. Upon the arrival of the reviewing officer, the general commanding the division joins and accompanies him, and causes the signal attention to be sounded, which is taken up in the right brigade of the first line. In One Line. 707. The reviewing officer receives the salute of each brigade when he arrives at its right, except when he approaches a brigade from its left or front, in which case he receives the salute as prescribed in the Brigade Keview. The reviewing officer receives the salute of the right brigade, passes along its front from right to left, then receives the salute of the next brigade and so on to the left of the division, thence in rear of the division to the right, and back to his post. Each brigade commander salutes, facing to the front, then faces his brigade and brings it to order arms, and remains at his post. The reviewing officer having passed around the divis- ion, the general commanding the division causes the signal attention to be sounded. The commander of the right brigade then forms his brigade in column, and, when the signal forward is sounded, gives the commands for passing in review as in the Brigade Review. Each of the other brigades is called to attention, formed in column and put in march in time to follow the next preceding at a distance of about one hundred paces. The division commander, with his staff, flag, and or* DjVISION REVIEW. 255 derlies, takes post twenty-four paces in front of the commander of the leading brigade. The review terminates as prescribed in the Brigade Review. In Two or Three Lines. 708. The reviewing officer passes around each line in succession, beginning with the right brigade of the first line. With this exception, the rules prescribed for the sin- gle line apply. CORPS REVIEW CORPS REVIEW. 709. The corps is toi’med in one, two, or three lines, with each division in a single line of masses. On the arrival of the reviewing officer, the corps com- mander causes the attention to be sounded, which is re- peated by the trumpeter of the commander of the right division of the first line, and is taken up in the right brigade of that division. The reviewing officer passes in front of the first line from right to left, receiving the salute of each brigade as prescribed in the Division Review, passes in rear of the line to its right, thence to the second line, passing around it in like manner, and so on. Each division commander, accompanied by his staff, joins the reviewing officer and corps commander as they approach his division, and accompanies them while passing in fi^nt and in rear of his division ; he then re- mains near the right of his division. The reviewing officer having passed around the troops, the corps commander causes the attention and forward to be sounded ; the march in review is con- ducted on the same principles as for the review of a division. On approaching the reviewing officer, the general commanding the corps places himself about twenty- four paces in front of the general of the first division ; his staff place themselves six paces in rear of him, the flag and orderlies three paces in rear of the staff. 710. The artillery of the corps is reviewed as pre- scribed in the Drill Regulations for Artillery. 711. The review of a command larger than a corpR is conducted on the same principles, or the troops may be marched in review in column of masses. GUARD MOUNTING. 257 GUARD MOUNTING. 712. At the assembly the men warned for duty fall in on their company parade grounds, facing to the front, non-commissioned officers and supernumeraries falling in as file closers ; each first sergeant then verifies his detail, opens ranks^ inspects the dress and general ap- pearance, replaces by a supernumerary any man unfit to march on guard, and then closes ranks. The band takes post on the parade, so that the left of its front rank shall be twelve paces to the right of the front rank of the guard when the latter is formed. 713. At adjutant' s call, the adjutant, dismounted, pro- ceeds to the parade ground and takes post so as to be twelve paces in front of and facing the center oi the guard when formed ; the sergeant major reports to the adjutant and takes post facing to the left, twelve paces to the left of the front rank of the band ; the band plays in quick or double time ; the details are marched to the parade ground by the first sergeants, with arms at the right shoulder ; the detail that arrives first is so inarched to the line that, upon halting, the breast of the right front rank man shall be near to and opposite the left arm of the sergeant major ; the first sergeant brings his piece to a carry, halts his detail, places himself in front of and facing the sergeant major, at a distance equal to or a little greater than the front of his detail ; he then commands : 1. Right, 2. dress. The detail dresses up to the line of the sergeant major and first ser- geant, the right front rank man placing his breast against the left arm of the sergeant major ; the non- commissioned officers take post two paces, and the supernumerary nine paces, in rear of the rear rank of the detail. Seeing the detail aligned, the first sergeant commands; front, salutes, and then reports: Thede-' 258 GUARD MOUNTING tail is correct ; or, (so many) sergeants, corporals, or privates are absent ; the sergeant major or acting sergeant major returns the salute with the right hand after the report is made; the first sergeant then passes by the right of the guard and takes post three paces in rear of his supernumerary, at the order. Each of the other details is formed in like manner on the left of the one preceding; the men, non-commis- sioned officers, supernumerary, and first sergeant of each detail dress on those of the preceding details in the same rank or line; each first sergeant closes the rear i^ank to the right and fills blank files, as far as prac- ticable, with men from his front rank. The company details alternate in taking the right of the line. 714. When the last detail has formed, the sergeant major draws sword, verifies the detail, causes the guard to count fours, completing the left four, if necessary, as in the School of the Company, and if there be more than three fours, divides the guard into two platoons, after which he commands : 1. Open ranks, 2. march. At the command march, the rear rank steps back and halts three paces in rear of the front rank ; the non- commissioned officers three paces in rear of the rear rank ; all dress to the right. The sergeant major veri- fies the alignment of the ranks, file closers, super- numeraries, and first sergeants, and then returns to the right of the front rank, faces to the left, commands : 3. FRONT, passes to a point midway between the adjutant and the center of the guard, halts facing the adjutant, salutes and reports : Sir, the details are correct ; or. Sir, (so many) sergeants, corporals, ov privates are absent; the adjutant returns the salute, directs the sergeant major : Take your post, and then draws sword; the sergeant major faces about and takes post facing to the front, three paces to the left of the front rank. When the sergeant major has reported, the officer of the GUARD MOUNTING. 259 guard tai^es post, facing to the front, three paces in front of the center of the guard, and draws sword. 715. The adjutant then commands : 1. Officer (or of- ficers) and non-commissioned officers, front and center, 2. MARCH. The officer advances and halts three paces from the adjutant ; the non-commissioned officers carry arms, pass by the flanks, and moving by the shortest line form in the order of rank, from right to left, three paces in rear of the officer ; the adj utant then assigns the officer and non-commissioned officers according' to rank, as follows : Commander of the guard, chief of first platoon, chief of second platoon, right guide of first platoon, left guide of second platoon, left guide of first platoon, right guide of second platoon and file closers. The adjutant then commands : 1. Non-commissioned officers ; or, 1. Officer and non-commissioned officers, 2. POSTS, 3. MARCH. At the command march, all, except the officer com- manding the guard, face about and take the posts prescribed in the School of the Company with open ranks, and order arms. The adjutant then directs : In- spect your guard, sir; at which the officer commanding the guard faces about, commands : 1. Inspection, 2. ARMS, returns sword and inspects the guard. 716. During the inspection the band plays. The adjutant, during the inspection, returns sword, observes the general condition of the guard, and re- places by the supernumerary an}^ man who does not present a creditable appearance. He also, when so di- rected, selects an orderly for the commanding officer, and notifies the commander of the guard of his selec- tion. 717. If there be a supernumerary officer of the guard, he takes post facing to the front, three paces in front of the center of the first platoon ; in going to the front and center he closes on the senior and is assigned as chief of 260 GUARD MOUNTING. the first platoon ; he may be directed by the commander of the guard to assist in inspecting the guard. 718. If there be no officer of the guard the adjutant inspects the guard. The non-commissioned officer com- manding the guard takes post on the right of the right guide, when the guard is in line ; and takes the post of the officer commanding the guard, when in column or passing in review. 719. The inspection ended, the adjutant places him- self about thirty paces in front of and facing the center of the guard, and draws sword ; the officers of the day take post in front of and facing the guard, about thirty paces from the adjutant ; the old officer of the day three paces to the right of and one pace to the rear of the new officer of the day ; the officer commanding the guard takes post three paces in front of its center, and draws sword ; thereafter he takes the same relative positions as a captain of a company. The adjutant then commands : 1 Parade, 2. rest, 3. SOUND OFF. The band, playing, passes in front of the officer of the guard to the left of the line, and back to its post on the right, when it ceases playing. The adjutant then commands : 1. Guard, 2. atten- tion, 3. Carry, 4. arms, 5 Close ranks, 6. march. The ranks are closed as in the School of the Company. 720. The adjutant then commands : 1. Present, 2. arms, faces toward the new officer of the day, salutes, and then reports : Sir, the guard is formed. The new officer of the day, after the adjutant has reported, re- turns the salute with the hand and directs the adju- tant : March the guard in review, sir. The adjutant faces about, brings the guard to a carry, and commands : 1. Platoons right, 2. march. The platoons execute the movement ; the band turns to the right and places itself twelve paces in front of the first platoon. GUARD MOUNTING. S61 The adjutant places himself abreast of the first pla^ toon and six paces from its left flank ; the sergeant ma- jor, six paces from the left flank of the second platoon. The adjutant then brings the guard to the right shoulder and commands : 1. Pass in review, 2. For^ ivard, 3. Guide right, 4. march. The guard marches in quick time past the officer of the day, according to the principles of review, and is brought to the carry at the proper time by the commander of the guard; the adjutant, commander of the guard, chiefs of platoons, sergeant major, and drum major salute. The band, having passed the officer of the day, turns to the left out of the column, places itself opposite and facing them, and ceases to play when the rear of the col- umn has passed ; the field music detaches itself from the band when the latter turns out of the column, and, remaining in front of the guard, commences to play when the band ceases. In the absence of the band, the field music does not turn out of the column but con- tinues in front of the guard. The guard having passed the officer of the day, the adjutant halts ; the sergeant major halts abreast of the adjutant and one pace to his left ; they then return sword and retire. 721. The commander of the guard forms it into col- umn of fours, without halting, and marches it to its post. 722. The officers of the day face toward each other and salute, the old officer of the day turning over the orders to the new officer of the day. While the band is sounding off, and while the guard is marching in review, the officers of the day stand at parade rest with arms folded, and come to attention be- fore the guard is to be presented, and again as the head of the column approaches. The new officer of the day returns only the salute of the commander of the guard and the adjutant, making one salute with the hand. 262 GUARD MOUNTING. 723. The first sergeants and supernumeraries come to parade rest and attention with the guard ; they re- main at order arms wliile the guard is being presented and formed into column. The senior first sergeant commands: 1. Parade, 2. rest, at the command march for passing in review, and : 1. Sujyernumeraries, 2. at- tention, when the officers of the day come to attention. The first sergeants come to parade rest, and to atten- tion with the supernumeraries. The rear of the column having passed the officers of the day, each first sergeant marches his supernumerary to the company parade and dismisses him. 724. If the guard be not divided into platoons, the ad- jutant commands: 1. Guard right, 2. march, and it passes in review as above ; the commander of the guard is two paces in front of its center ; ti c; adjutant is six paces from and abreast of its left flank ; the sergeant major covers the adjutant on a line with the file closers. 725. The officer of the day may direct the adjutant: March the guard to its post, sir. The adjutant faces about and commands: 1. Guard to its post, 2. Fours right, 3. march ; or, 3. Double time, 4. march. The guard wheels by fours to the right; the field music takes post in front ; the adjutant and sergeant major return sword and retire; the first sergeants march off their supernumeraries ; the officers of the day salute each other, and the band retires. 726. As the new guard approaches the guard house, the old guard is formed in line at the carry, with its field music two paces to its right ; and, when the field music at the head of the new guard arrives opposite its left, the commander of the old guard commands : 1. Present, 2. arms; and commands: 1. Carry, 2. arms, when the new guard has passed. The new guard marches in quick time past the old guard, arms at a carry, commanders of both guards sa- luting. GUARD MOUNTING. 263 The field music having* marched three paces beyond the field music of the old guard, changes direction to the right, and, followed by the guard, changes direc- tion to the left, when on a line with the old guard ; the changes of direction are without command. The senior officer of the guard halts on the line of the front rank of the old guard, allows his guard to march past him, and, when its rear approaches, wheels it by fours to the left, halts it, estabiishes the left guide three paces to the right of the field music. of the old guard, and on a line with the front rank, and then dresses his guard to the left ; the field music with the new guard is two paces to the right of its front rank. The new guard being dressed, the commander of each guard, in front of and facing its center, commands : 1. Present, 2. arms, resumes his front and salutes. The commanders having saluted, face their guards and command: 1. Carry, 2. arms, 3. Order, 4. arms. 727. Should a guard be commanded by a non-com- missioned officer, he presents arms with his guard, standing on the right or left of the front rank, accord^ ing as he commands the old or new guard. 728. The detachments and sentinels of the old guard are relieved, and, as they come in, form on its left; both guards are brought to a carry; the commander of the old guard then marches it, with the guide right, six paces to the front, when he commands: 1. Fours right, 2. march. The guard wheels by fours to the right, the field music begins to play and the guard marches in quick time past the new guard, whicn stands at present arms, commanders of both guards saluting. 729. On arriving on the regimental, post, or camp parade, the commander of the old guard forms it in line and halts it, opens chamber (Par. 83), orders suc- cessively the company details two paces to the front, and sends each, under charge of a non-commissioned officer or private, to its company. m GUARD MOUNTING. 730. In bad weather, at night, or after long marches, the music may be dispensed with, or the field music may take the place of the band and sound off, standing on the right of the guard, and the review be omitted. 731. When dismounted cavalry and infantry are united for guard mounting, the cavalry details retain their single rank formation. The cavalry non-commis- sioned officers and supernumaries place themselves in line with those of the infantry. 732. For detailed instructions not hei'ein prescribed, •ee Manual of Guard Duty. BATTALION PARADE 2G5 BATTALION PARADE. 733. At the assembly, the companies form under arms on their respective parade grounds, and are inspected by their captains ; the inspection being completed, adju- tanVs call is sounded, at which the line is formed on the battalion parade ground. The major takes post at a convenient distance in front of the center, facing the line. At the command guides posts, the sergeant major takes post as in open ranks. The adjutant, having commanded : Guides posts, directs the first captain to bring his company to parade rest. The captains, commencing on the right, succes- sively face about and command : 1. (Such) Company, 2. Parade, 3. rest, resume their front, and take the po- sition of parade rest ; the adjutant takes post three paces to the right of the battalion, in line with the cap- tains, commands : sound off, and. if dismounted, takes the position of parade rest. The band, playing in quick time, passes in front of the captains, to the left of the line, and back to its post on the right, when it ceases playing. At evening parade., when the band ceases playing, retreat is sounded by the field music. The major, if dismounted, stands at parade rest with arms folded while the band is playing, and resumes attentiya when arms are about to be presented. When the music ceases, the adjutant faces to the left, and commands: 1. Battalion, 2 . attention, 3. Open ranks. He aligns the guides for the rear rank, returns to the line of captains, faces to the left, and commands: 4. MARCH. He verifies the alignment of the officers, the ranks and the file closers, returns to the line of captains, faces 266 BATTALION PARADE. to the left, commands : front, then moves at a trot or gallop (if dismounted, in quick time) by the shortest line to a point midway between the major and the center of the battalion, halts, faces the battalion and commands: 1. Carry, 2. arms, 3. Present, 4. arms. He then turns about, salutes the major, and reports : Sir, the jmrade is formed. The major returns the salute and directs the adjutant: Take your post, sir. The adjutant moves at a trot or gallop (if dismounted, in quick time), passes by the major’s right, and takes post facing the battalion, three paces to the left of the major and one pace less advanced. The adjutant having taken his post, the major draws sword, commands : 1. Carry, 2. arms, and adds such exercises in the manual of arms as he may desire, con- cluding with order arms. The officers and color guard, having once executed order arms, remain in that posi- tion during the exercise in the manual. The major then directs the adjutant : Receive the reports, sir, and returns sword. The adjutant, passing by the major’s left, advances at a trot or gallop (if dis- mounted, in quick time) toward the center of the line, halts midway between it and the major, and commands . 1. First sergeants, 2. Front and center, 3. march ; or, Double time, 4. march. At the first command, the first sergeants carry arms. At the second command, each marches two paces in front of and opposite the right of his company and facesj toward the center ; the drum major at the same time faces to the left. At the command march, the first sergeants and drum major march to the center, and successively face to the front ; the adjutant then commands : Report. The drum major and the first sergeants, commencing on the right, successively salute and report : the drum major, band and field music present or accounted for; or, (so many) musicians or field musicians absent; the BATTALION PARADE. 267 first sergeants, Company (“A,” etc.) present or ac- counted for; or, (so many) corporals, ov pri- vates absent. The reports having been made, the adjutant com- mands : 1. First sergeants, 2. Posts, 3. march; or, 3. Double time, 4. march. At the command posts, the first sergeants and drum major face outward. ^ At the command march, they resume their posts and order arms; each first sergeant passes around the right flank of his company. The adjutant l^en turns about, salutes, and reports: Sir, all are present or accounted for ; or. Sir, (so many) officers or enlisted men are absent. The major returns the salute and directs: Publish the orders, sir. The adjutant turns about and commands: Attention to orders; he then reads the orders, and commands: 1. Officers, 2. Center, 3. march. At the command officers, all the officers except the adjutant return sword. At the command center, the company officers face to the center. At the command march, the company officers close to the center and face to the front; the adjutant returns sword, turns about and takes post with the major as previously prescribed ; the staff officers ride toward the major at a trot and take post one pace to the left of the adjutant, facing the battalion one pace apart, in the order of rank from right to left, senior on the right ; if dismounted, they face and close in with the company officers. The officers having closed and faced to the front, the senior company officer commands: 1. Forward, 2. Guide center, 3. march. The officers advance, the band play- ing; the left officer of the right wing is the guide, and marches on the major; at six paces from the major the senior company officer commands : 1. Officers, 2. halt* 268 BATTALION PARADE. The music ceases; the officers halt and salute, keep the hand at the visor till the salute is returned, and drop it at the same time with the major. The major then gives such instructions as he may deem necessary, and this concludes the cei^emony. As the officers disperse, the music is resumed ; each first sergeant moves in front of his company, closes ranks, marches it to its parade ground and dismisses it; the band plays till the companies leaves the parade ground. 734. The commanding officer may direct that the first sergeants march their companies, in line, or in col- umn of platoons, around the parade ground, changing direction and saluting as in passing in review; after passing the major, they march them to their company parade grounds and dismiss them. Or, he may direct that the companies move off in echelon, and march to their parade grounds. In these cases the officers remain with the major until all the companies have passed. REGIMENTAL PARADE. 269 REGIMENTAL PARADE. 735. The regiment is formed inline, in line of platoon columns at close interval, or in line of masses. In Line. 736. At the assembly, the companies are formed and inspected. At adjutant’s call, each battalion is formed in line ; the battalion adjutant having taken his post in front of the center, before presenting the battalion to the major, receives the reports of the first sergeants as pre- scribed in battalion parade. 737. When the battalions are formed, adjutant’ s call is again sounded ; the regiment is then formed in line, each major opening ranks in his battalion as soon as it is formed on the line, regulating on the base battalion. The adjutant, after indicating the position of the point of rest, takes post facing to the left, six paces to the right of the post of the lieutenant-colonel (Par. 369) ; when the line is formed, he directs the first major to bring his battalion to parade rest. The majors, in succession, bring their battalions to parade rest. The adjutant then turns to his left and commands ; SOUND OFF, and takes post, facing to the front, six paces to the right of the post of the lieutenant-colonel. The band, playing in quick time, passes in front of the adjutant and field officers, to the left of the regi- ment, and back to its post on the right, when it ceases playing. The adjutant then moves by the shortest line, at a trot or gallop, to a point midway between the colonel 270 REGIMENTAL PARADE, and the center of the regiment, faces the reginient, and commands: 1. Battalions, 2. attention, 3. Carry, 4. ARMS, 5. Present, 6. arms, faces the colonel, salutes, and reports : Sir, the j^ci'i^cide is formed. The colonel returns the salute and directs the ad- jutant: Take yonr jjost, sir. The adjutant takes his post three paces to the left of the colonel and one pace less advanced, passing by his right and rear. The colonel and staff officers draw sword ; the colonel then commands : 1. Carry, 2. arms, and adds such ex- ercises in the manual as he may desire, concluding with order arms. The colonel then directs the adjutant to receive the reports and returns sword ; his staff return sword at the same time. The adjutant advances by the left of the colonel toward the line, halts midway between the colonel and the center of the regiment, and commands : 1. Ad- jutants, 2. Front and center, 3. march; or, 3. Trot, 4. MARCH. Al the command march, the battalion adjutants move six paces in front of the line of company officers, close to the center and face to the front. The adjutant then commands : Report, when the battalion adjutants, commencing on the right, salute and report : (Such) battalion present or accounted for ; or, (Such) battalion (so many) officers and enlisted men are absent. The adjutant then commands : 1. Adjutants, 2. Post, 3. MARCH ; or, 3. Trot, 4. march. The battalion adjutants, moving by the shortest lines, then take post in the line of field officers, each three paces to the left of the major of his battalion. The adjutant then faces the colonel, salutes and reports : Sir, all are present or ac- counted for; or. Sir, (so many) officers and enlisted men are absent. The colonel returns the salute and directs : Publish the orders, sir. The adjutant faces the regi- ment, and, after publishing the orders, commands : REGIMENTAL PARADE. 271 1. Officers f 2, Center, 3. march, returns sword and takes post on the left of the lieutenant-colonel. At the command officers, all the officers, except the adjutant, return sword. At the command center, the company officers face to- ward the center. At the command march, the company officers close to the center and face to the front. The field officers and adjutants moving to the right and left, on their own line, uncover the line of company officers and form in the following order from right to left The lieutenant-colonel, adjutant, major of the fii’st battalion and his adjutant, six paces to the right of the line of company officers ; the major of the second battalion, his adjutant, the major of the third battalion and his adjutant, six paces to the left of the company officers. The company officers having closed and faced to the front, the senior captain commands : 1. Forward, 2. Guide center, 3. march. The company officers advance, the band playing ; the left officer of the right wing of the second battalion, or the left officer, first battalion, if there be but two battalions, is the guide and marches on the colonel. When the company officers have advanced six paces beyond the line of field officers, the field officers and adjutants advance, thus forming in echelon on the right and left of the company officers. The lieutenant-colonel commands : 1. Officers, 2. HALT, when the company officers are six paces from the colonel ; the ceremony concludes as in the battalion parade. The lieutenant-colonel and adjutant join the colonel ; all the other officers rejoin their battalions ; the battal- ions are marched to their parade grounds and dis- missed. REGIMENTAL PARADE. 'ZTZ In fjne of Platoon Columns or in Line of Masses. 738. The line is formed as prescribed in the Evolu- tions of the Regiment. Ranks are not opened. After publishing the orders the adjutant commands : 1. Field officers, 2. Center, 3. march. The field officers and adjutants return swords, close on the second major, face to the front, and the lieuten- ant colonel commands : 1. Forward, 2. Guide center, 3. MARCH. The second major is the guide and marches on the colonel. The company officers remain at their posts with their companies. With these exceptions the same rules apply as in the regimental parade in line. BATTALION INSPECTION. 273 BATTALION INSPECTION. 739. If there be both inspection and review, the in- spection may either precede or follow the review. The battalion being in column of companies at full distance, all officers dismounted, the major commands : 1. Prepare for inspection, 2. march. At the first command, each captain commands : Open ranks. At the command march, the ranks are opened in each company, as explained in the School of the Company. The field musicians join their companies. The drum major conducts the band, if not already there, to its position in rear of the column, and opens ranks. The staff officers form a line equal to the front of the column, fifteen paces in front of the leading company, the adjutant on the right, the others in the order of rank from right to left, the senior next to the adjutant ; the non-commissioned staff form in a similar manner, three paces in rear of the staff officers, the sergeant major on the right ; the color guard in one rank marches to the front and takes post three paces in rear of the center of the line of non-commissioned staff. The major takes post in front of the center of the col- umn, six paces in front of the staff. 740. Field and staff officers senior in rank to the in- spector do not take post in front of the column, but accompany him. After inspecting the major and staff officers, the in- spector, accompanied by these officers, passes down the open column, looking at the front and rear of each rank. The major and staff return sword as soon as inspected. The major now commands: rest. 274 BATTALION INSPECTION. 741. The inspector, commencing at the head of the column, makes a minute inspection of the non-commis- sioned staff, color guard, and the arms, accouterments, dress and ammunition of each soldier of the several companies in succession, and inspects the band. The adjutant gives the necessary commands for the inspection of the non-commissioned staff, color guard and band. The non-commissioned staff and color guard may be dismissed as soon as inspected. 742. As the inspector approaches each company, its captain commands : 1. Compani/, 2. attention, 3. In- spectioUf 4. ARMS, and faces to the front ; as soon as in- spected, he returns sword and accompanies the in- spector. At the command arnns, the lieutenants carry sword, and, when the inspector begms the inspection of the front rank, face about and stand at ease, swords at the order ; upon the completion of the inspection of arms and ammunition, they come to attention, carry sword, face about and order sword. The company then closes ranks (the captain may direct the lieutenants to retain their places in front of the company), stacks arms and open ranks. The captain then commands : 1. Unsling, 2. knapsack, 3. Open, 4. knapsack. The first and second commands are executed as in Par. 98, except that the rear rank stands fast and each man places his knapsack on the ground at his feet. At the fourth command the knapsacks are opened. The inspection completed, the captain commands : 1. Close, 2. KNAPSACK, 3. Sling, 4. knapsack. At the second command, each man repacks and closes his knapsack and then stands erect, leaving the knap- sack on the ground. At the fourth command, knapsacks are slung as in Par. 98, the rear rank standing fast. BATTALION INSPECTION. 275 Ranks are closed, arms taken, and, on intimation from the inspector, the captain marches the company to its quarters and dismisses it. In a long column, some of the rearmost companies, after the inspection of dress and general appearance, may be permitted to stack arms and fall out ; before the inspector approaches, they take arms and resume their positions. The band plays during the inspection of the com- panies. 743. When the inspector approaches the band, the adjutant commands : 1. Inspection, 2. instruments. Each man as the inspector approaches him raises his instrument in front of the body, reverses it so as to show both sides, and then ^'eturns it to its former posi- tion, 744. The inspection of dress and general appearance may be dispensed with on intimation of the inspector, the battalion being brought to a rest as soon as the major and staff have been inspected. 745. At inspection of quarters, the inspector is ac- companied by all the officers, or by such of them as he may designate ; the men, without accouterments, stand uncovered in front of their respective bunks ; in camp, they stand, covered, without accouterments, in front of their tents ; the senior non-commissioned officer, upon the approach of the inspector, commands : 1. Com- pany {or squad), 2. attention. The men come to attention and do not salute ; in camp, the non-commissioned officer salutes. 276 COMPANY INSPECTION. COMPANY INSPECTION. 746. Captains inspecting their companies on their own parade grounds, use the commands and means pre- scribed for the company at battalion inspection. INSPECTION OF A COMPANY ON ITS OWN PA- RADE. 747. Should the inspector be other than the captain, the captain opens ranks, takes his post in front of the right of the company, and, when the inspector ap- proaches, salutes. The inspection is made as before (Par. 742). REGIMENTAL INSPECTION. 277 REGIMENTAL INSPECTION. 748. The commands and means are the same as pre- scribed for a battalion. The staff officers of the colonel form a line equal to the front of the column, fifteen paces in front of the major of the first battalion, the adjutant on the right, the others in the order of rank from right to left, the senior next the adjutant; the non-commissioned staff form in a similar manner three paces in rear of the staff officers, the sergeant major on the right; the color guard takes post three paces in rear of the center of the line of non-commissioned staff. The colonel takes post opposite the center of the column, six paces in front of his staff, the lieutenant- colonel four paces to his left. The colonel, lieutenant- colonel, and staff officers, as soon as inspected, return sword and accompany the inspector, who inspects the dress and general appearance of the regiment. The adjutant brings the non-commissioned staff and color guard to rest as soon as the inspector passes them. 749. Each major remaining at his post, brings his battalion to a rest as soon as the inspector leaves it. The inspector, after passing to the rear of the regi- ment, commences again at the head of the column and minutely inspects the non-commissioned staff, the color guard, and the non-commissioned staff and companies of each battalion. 750. Each major, with his staff officers, accompanies the inspector through his battalion, after which lie marches his battalion to its parade ground and dis- misses it, unless otherwise directed. 378 MUSTER. REGIMENTAL OR BATTALION MUSTER. 751. Muster is preceded by an inspection, and, when practicable, by a review. The adjutant is provided with the muster roll of the field, staff, and band, the surgeon with the hospital roll, and each captain with the roll of his company. A list of absentees, alphabetically arranged, showing cause I and place of absence, accompanies each roll. Being in column of companies at open ranks, each captain, as the mustering officer approaches, brings his company to right shoulder arms, and commands: At- tention to muster. The mustering officer or captain then calls the names on the roll; each man, as his name is called, answers ‘‘Here,” and brings his piece to order arms. 752. After muster, the mustering officer, accompanied by the company commanders and such other officers as he may designate, verifies the presence of the men re- ported in hospital, on guard, etc. 753. A company may be mustered in the same man- ner on its own parade ground, the muster to follow the inspection prescribed in Par. 747. ESCORT TO THE COLOR. 279 ESCORT OF THE COLOR. 754. The regiment being in line, the colonel details a company, other than the color company, to receive and escort the color to its place in line. The escort is formed in column of platoons, the band in front, the color bearer between the platoons. The escort then marches, without music, to the colonel’s of- fice or quarters, is formed in line facing the entrance and halted, the band on the right, the color bearer in the line of file closers. ^ The color bearer, preceded by the first lieutenant and followed by a sergeant of the escort, then goes to receive the color. When the color bearer comes out, followed by the lieu- tenant and sergeant, he halts before the entrance, facing the escort ; the lieutenant places himself on the right, the sergeant on the left of the color bearer ; the escort presents arms, and the field music sounds to the color. Arms are brought to the carrjq the lieutenant and sergeant return to their posts ; the company executes platoons right, the band taking post in front of the col- umn ; the color bearer places himself between the pla- toons ; arms are then brought to the right shoulder, and the escort marches in quick time, with guide left, back to the regiment, the band playing ; the march is so conducted that when the escort arrives at fifty paces in front of the right of the regiment, the direction of the march shall be parallel to its front ; when the color ar- rives opposite its place in line, the escort is formed in line to the left and halted ; the color bearer, passing be- tween the platoons, advances and halts twelve paces in front of the colonel. The color bearer having halted, the colonel, who has taken post thirty paces in front of the center of his reg- 280 ESCORT TO THE COLOR. iment, faces about, commands : 1. Carry, 2. arms, 3. Present, 4. arms, resumes his front and salutes; the field music sounds to the color, and the color bearer re- turns the color salute. The colonel then faces about, brings the regiment to a carry, after which the color bearer takes his post with the color company ; the regiment is then brought to order arms. 755. The escort presents and carries arms with the regiment, at the command of the colonel, after which the captain forms it again in column of platoons, and, preceded by the band, marches it at right shoulder al’ms to its place in line, passing around the left flank of the regiment. 756. The band plays until the escort passes the left of the line, when it ceases playing and returns to its post on the right, passing in rear of the regiment. The regiment may be brought to a rest when the es- cort passes the left of the line. 757. The color is escorted from the parade ground oi the color company to the colonel’s office or quarters by the color guard. ESCORTS OF HONOR. 281 ESCORTS OF HONOR. 758. Escorts of honor are detailed for the purpose of receiving* and escorting personages of high rank, civil or military. The troops for this purpose are selected for their soldierly appearance and superior discipline. The escort forms in line, opposite the place where the personage presents himself, the band on the flank of the escort toward which it will march. On the appearance of the personage, he is received with the honors due to his rank. The escort is formed into column of com- panies, platoons, or fours, and takes up the march, the personage and his staff or retinue taking position in rear of the column. On leaving the escort, line is formed and the same honors are paid as before. When the position of the escort is at a considerable distance from the point where the personage is to be re- ceived, as, for instance, where a courtyard or wharf in- tervenes, a double line of sentinels is posted from that point to the escort, facing inward ; the sentinels success sively salute as he passes, a.nd are then relieved and join the escort. An officer is appointed to attend him, to bear such communications as he may have to make to the com- mander of the escort. m FUNERAL ESCORT. FUNERAL ESCORT. 75(f. coinposition and strength of the escort are prescribed iii I'ars. 474, 475, and 476, A. R., 1889. [See Appendix.] The escort is formed opposite the tent or quarters of the deceased ; the band on that flank of the escort toward which it is to march. Upon the appearance of the coffin the commander commands: 1. Carry, 2. arms, 3. Present, 4. arms; and the band plays an appropriate air; arms are then carried, after which the coffin is taken to the flank of the escort opposite the music. 760. The escort is next formed into column of com- E anies, platoons, or fours. If the escort be small, it may e marcned in line. The procession is formed in the fol- lowing order : 1. Music, 2. Escort, 3. Clergy, 4. Coffin anri pallbearers, 5. Mourners, 6. Members of the for- mer command of the deceased, 7. Other officers and enr listed men, 8. D istinguished persons, 9. Delegations, 10. Societies, 11. Civilians. Officers and enlisted men (Nos. 6 and 7) are with side arms in the order of rank, seniors in front. The procession being formed, the commander of the escort puts it in march, arms at the right shoulder. 761. The escort marches slowly to solemn music; the column having arrived opposite the grave, line is formed facing it. The coffin is then carried along the front of the escort to the grave, arms are presented, the music plays an ap- propriate air ; the coffin having been placed over the grave, the music ceases and arms are brought to the order. 762. The commander next commands : 1. Parade, 2. REST. The escort executes parade rest, officers and men inclining the head to the front. FUNERAL ESCORT. 283 When the funeral services are completed and the cof- fin lowered into the grave the commander causes the escort to resume attention and fire three rounds of blank cartridges, the muzzles of the pieces being elevated. A trumpeter then sounds taps. The escort is then formed into column, marched in quick time to the point where it was assembled, and dis- missed. The band does not play until it has left the in- closure. 763. When the distance to the place of interment is considerable, the escort, after having left the camp or garrison, may march at ease until it approaches the burial ground, when it is called to attention. The music does not play while at ease. In all funeral ceremonies, six pallbeartiS may be se- lected from the grade of the deceased, or the grades next above or below. If a commissioned officer, the cof- fin is borne by six non-commissioned officers : if a non- commissioned officer or private, by six privates. 764. At the funeral of a general officer, the comman- der of the escort, in forming column, gives the ap- propriate commands for the cavalry, artillery, and in- fantry, which form in column, from front to rear, in the order named. The field music sounds the march, flourishes, or ruffles, according to the rank of the de- ceased, whenever arms are presented, after which the band plays an appropriate air. In marching to the cemetery, the trumpeters of the artillery and cavalry may alternate in playing with the band of the in- fantry. 765. At the funeral of a mounted officer or en- listed man, ‘his horse, in mourning caparison, follovrs the hearse. 766. Should the entrance to the cemetery prevent the hearse from accompanying the escort till the latter halts at the grave, the column is halted at the en- ^4 FUNERAL ESCORT, trance long enough to take the coffin from the hearse, when the column is again put in march. The cav- alry and artillery, when unable to enter the inclosure, wheel out of the column, face to the column, and salute the remains as they pass. 767. When necessary to escort the remains from the quarters of the deceased to the church before the funeral service, arms are presented upon receiving the remains at the quarters, and also as they are borne into the church. 768. The commander of the escort, previous to the funeral, gives the clergyman and pallbearers all need- ful directions. TRUMPET CALLS, ETC. 285 TRUMPET CALLS, ETC. WARNING CALLS. 769. First cally guard mounting, full dress, overcoats, drill, stable, water, and hoots and saddles ; they pre- cede the assembly by such interval as may be prescribed by the commanding officer. Mess, church, and fatigue, classed as service calls, may also be used as warning calls. First call is the first signal for formation for roll call and for all ceremonies except guard mounting. Guard mounting is the first signal for guard mount- ing. The field music assemble at first call and guard mounting. In a mixed command, boots and saddles is the signal to mounted troops that their formation is to be mounted ; for mounted guard mounting or mounted drill it imme- diately follows the signal guard mounting or drill. When full dress or overcoats are to be worn, the full dress or overcoat call immediatelv follows first call, guard mounting, or boot>r js.i. saadles. FORMATION CALLS. Assembly : the signal for the companies or details to form on their company parade grounds. Adjutant's call : the signal for the companies or guard details to assemble on the camp or garrison parade ground ; it follows the assembly at such interval as may be prescribed by the commanding officer. ALARM CALLS. Fire call: the signal for the men to fall in, without arms, to extinguish fire. 286 TRUMPET CALLS. ETC. To arms: the signal for the men to fall in, under arms, on their company parade grounds as quickly as possible. To horse : the signal for mounted men to proceed un- der arms to their horses, saddle, mount, and assemble at a designated place as quickly as possible. SERVICE CALLS. Taps, mess, sick, church, recall, issu^, officer^ s, first sergeant' s, fatigue, school, and the general. The general is the signal for striking tents and load- ing wagons preparatory to marching. Reveille and tattoo precede the assembly for roll call ; retreat follows the assembly, the interval between being only that required for formation and roll call, except when there is parade. Assembly, reveille, retreat, adjutant's call, to the color, the flourishes, rufiles, and the inarches are sounded by all the field music united ; the other calls, as a rule, are sounded by the trumpeter of the guard or orderly trumpeter ; he may also sound the assembly when the trumpeters are not united. The morning gun is fired at the first note of reveille, or, if marches be played before reveille, it is fired at the commencement of the first march. The evening gun is fired at the last note of retreat. The drill signals include both the preparatory com- mands and the commands of execution ; the last note is the command of execution. When a command is given by the trumpet, the chiefs of subdivisions give the proper commands orally. The memorizing of these signals will be facilitated by observing that all movements to the right are on the ascending chord, that the corresponding movements to the left are corresponding signals on the descending chord ; and that the changes of gait are all upon the same note. TRUMPET CALLS, &c, i To economise space, the music is written an octave higher than the trumpet scale, and is adjusted to the scale of the bugle. 1. First Call. Quick. 3 '^SSSr^ "=i: 2. Guard Mounting. Quick. r m . ^ p?. pp « ^ 1 -It f ^ F r # 3 ■ ■ p , ' .JL._ r m 1 1 (t F F F F F 1 F -^— 1 - 4-1 — ! — ^ — r-#H p T“ •j ' — 287 Vt> 288 TRUMPET CALUS ETC. 3. Full Dress. Quick, 4. Overcoats. i Quick. 5. Drill. ■^— 4 ^ =iE^P=p: — I — I- -#-^- -f-7- 0 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 00 - rrm TRUMPET CALLS, ETC, 28 ^ Juick, 7. Water 0 0 r 'J ^ _m T- P y P P ■ 1 r # r r r T # r 1 '^1 Llli TA 1. J ^ 1 J (ill 8. Boots and Saddles. 9. Assembly. Moderate. r-G- -1— _ ^ "i!fc — \ ' T P-* p * ^ ^ p * p -P-^-^P-^-^—^ ^-i-P- - -i #-i 1 — ^ 1— J — :|i ^ (\ 0 - , <7\ f 1 I* • - 1 i' 1 r vW 1 I* 1 1 P P * P P 1 ' "TSp ^ 0-0 :4: LJ:_i 1 1 0. ADJUTANT'S Call. 290 •RUMPET CALLS, ETC. 11. Fire. "r "yT |i r ^ /I ^ [ •f • -^ • 1 1 I ^ ^ f?w ^ ^ ^ * m bt= — — Ld^t 0 -^ - r ^ W ? ^ ^ . (• r p -1 JL ! H 1 # • 1 i • • 1 • • r r # 1 fm — 7^ ^ ^ y ^ 1 1 h— — »— r ^ 1 1 r J ^ 1 t ^ f 1 1 0' * t Repeat at will. ^ * !' r VL- ^ • 1 1 • 1 - 1 ^ 1- h #- --I — 1 1 #-■!-. — _i 0 — I ^_i_ 1. — ! — » — ! — -1 — ! — ■! — ! — -1 — I_1 ^ f ^ f L i Quick ^ 12. To Arms. -h- “I- -#H — I — #H — (- Repeat at will. i Presto. 13. To Horse. — ^j»Ui-i " h ^ — 4-+-P-#- TRUMPET CALLS, ETC. 291 1 5. Retreat. 292 TRUMPET CALLS, ETC. R ET R E AT — C onclud^ . M 1 j r n r — ^ ■ ill ^ ' m J ^ -! 'j . r-- rr —2~ hr -J ir - r i n # m # # m m \ m ] IP T 1 m • m "W- r • n I ^ ii r T r _r~ ~l ^ 1 rh ■ 'h it ^ V' U 1 |J ■IM I ' 1 ■ 1 1 1 J _l J_ _ 1 ^ • m - ^ I n 1 1 1 M 1 - - Pvi 1 ■ \m J 1 — I — ! — ! r 1 ^ J TRUMPET CALLS, ETC- 293 16 . Tattoo. 5 ^ 1 ^--r -fnr — '"^1 rTTZi — T“ iw'r* p 1 -. m. L L ■ 0 t ^ t • ^ » 0 0 — u.: _ L ' 1 « # 1 r r j _ j_ _ "j _ r . p.. ^ J J*_J - J 1 1 ' J All ~n ! "T 1 1* i 1* 1 1 ^ ' i f5T> 1. y 1 J J J L ■■J ’~J - J J — d ” K w w -j r j ^ j — « J" « L # jLZ # L . 1 \» ^ . ■■ P ' or ^ ^ C Crook: jJir-G- m ^ ^ r ly • iy T -•-fcai— h-p-»-- _J T ^-p " -4 End* i f' /t 0C-4: ^ t— •-v - 4 314 TRUMPET CALLS, ETC. ^ ^ ^ ^ L ^ ^ • ji L ^ 1 — ^ — 1 ^■— j ■ H-f—l ^ « %.. %.... jii c L -H kyd: Da Capo, 'y P-* f-*- r^— -U, 1 C 1 iL 1 r [_ h-^H ,#. ^ gg.-* _ Z it— t 1 i_j h-p •^ ” • - 1 U L __ L_L_# _L -i- u L_^ m — *1- *T^ 1 .1 IL L DRUM AND FIFE SIGNALS. EXPLANATIONS. Ihe Mset:!ibly, repea*ted several times, is the fire alarm, roll is the signal to arms. t indicates tap ; f, flam ; d, drag ; r, roll. The figures under tba rolls indicate the niunber of strokes in each roll. Continuous foil, 1, The General. 80=rjffff r fff f — r T k — r — T'~f~ _(* ^ p ■ p p m If If I r — T — T r _ j LL \j \j 1 f f f f f r-6- 4 f r f f f f f f i).a « M m' m m’ _ '\j V r 7 — p- r — "—7“ - fi — j/ — ..tr : 315 316 DRUM AND FIFE SIGNALS. Fife. 80 — J 3. To THE Color. i m rjzzt I r - ^ - f r- f f i — f — ^ -W — 4. The Long Roll, or To Arms. r r r r — 1 7 1 a ^ 1 I t ^ 1 ^ Fife. 140 =r J 1: 5. Reveille. -n It Drum, t r ■^-e- -F—F — 7 7 7 7 DRUM AND FIFE SIGNALS. Sli R E VE I L L E‘— Co mtinued. i-6-|— !— nn — T" f f f* * i ! 1 rr^ r_ -f-TZCC r 1 'Pv • W J • L. ' LT T • 1 « rr^t w ^ L \^TZ ^ ' Ll L r r ^ j“ r r r r r r r r P — r — r — f-5-r- ^ L -4— J— 1— Bfcirt: t 4- -1 — u -L - U -U L L # p fl # -1 |H— tn rq- r 1 ^ 1 r J •f p -# -1 1 r Y ^ ™ -hL L 1 # 7 r — # ^ 1 r r -€ r r iP^ r r r r r r iW P P P P 1# p p p n r r 7 p W — 1 w I 1 4: t ■ -tr t— : n W ---5 / -tt 1 P r • 1 f ¥5 . . . . p r # • • J 7 . • f ^ 1 1 I r r r r t 1 P *1 h . ?zr - « If 90t 1 * ■-* r T 7 W- ^==- 1 — 1 >Sf?ow7 Scotch. , fe— -H rj-H^- —O O 0 1— 0 #-* _ T — r r t ±± 9 f— ^ pz p; 9 318 ORUM AND FIFE SIGNALa \Ke\/^\LLE— C ontinued. 140= J Hessian, 1# 0 ^ ^ 0 5- " 9 P M i 0 ^ ^ m ^ r ^ ! 1 _i ^ W 1 xnz ^ 1 * . . I H . 1 . H 1 1^, ^ Doub LE Drag. d d d d 1 d d &c. d d W' 9 •f ^ p f p — /*■ ■ ^ - — ; r r 1 - y p i t—Lt ■ - — 1- L L| — -1 — t Dkum i UrW. DRUM AND FIFE SIGNALS. 819 Reveille— Concluded, 160 — J Quich Scotch. J # — or 1 Im IT ^ « m \ m m 1 p p 1^ r m r r^r ^ r ^ ^ — r r r r &c. iL 9 I* • m L 1 1 F- F ^ (= P tzzrizz — — 1 -- ZL, D, C. the first pari of the Beveille. ^20 DRUM AND FIFE SIGNALS. T ROOP— Concluded. ir-ffT— i — 1 « 1 1 ^ ^ f : /L ^ o JL# . ( -f--^ [_ L4- ^ z m 1— i # It z viz o . . r t . L . r L 1 t- • .. ^ ^ t ft tfdtr 7 *> r i w *1 ^ ^ ^ \ P P P - ^ ^ ^ III P 7 p P ■»• Lr ; - U— i 4i=4r 1 U U- L_l^ ^ L 7, Retreat. -o-S "" /W /W /W p A — J-. *1 i*^ ’ ■ 2 • P ^ # 1 1“ ■ t- t h 1 VU 1 ' I: B T •j /TN Drum, r n r r 7-- 1 1 1 ,2 • J t 2 • _z^zr : ± ^ iP« ^ t ^ . 1 110= J tip : #-r-- ^ — TW^ A h fcj -!■ -j j 1 d t t « A « d t t m m m d t t -x r- - -w- P P -‘-p P P It — 1—4=^ DRUM AND FIFE SIGNALS. 321 Retreat — Continued. j h r-r — r — 1- 1 •J - trf — .A N.* V ] ^ Ilff5 Tl ' ' 1 • a IS z. r ■ r ^ - r r W — t — 1 t 1 = t 1=!= : 1 1= = DRUM AND FIFE SIGNALS. £22 R ETR E AT— Concluded. AV KM AV - '1 1 1 1 Bn- * ^ • 7^ . 1 - - -\ 1 ' 32 25 J 2 1 L ^ I j. Fife. 80 = J 8. Tattoo. tzziiti „Drum. d f t (I I r f t t=t I I-— i zMut Ific Etid. Play an Air in Quick time — after it, begin the Doubling. Then an Air in Common time — after it, repeat the Doubling, Then an Air in Slow time — and repeat the Doubling. Finally an Air in Double time, followed by three Rolls DRUM AND FIFE SIGNALS. 323 T ATTOO — Concluded. AV -MA M/ riV /Tn After the three RoSIs repeat Doubling to the end. 9. Recall. DRUM AND FIFE SIGNALS. 1 1 . First Sergeant»s Call. ? ?=: 3-S-1 P— P 1- ■■ 1 -i: — n 12. Cease Firing. ^ r r r r r APPEE'DIX. The following are the sections of the ^‘Army Regulations, 1889,” referred to in the text of the Drill Regulations. ARTICLE III. RANK AND PRECEDENCE OF OFFICERS [EXTRACT]. 11. The relative rank between officers of the Navy and Army is as follows, lineal rank only being considered : Admiral with General (when office exists). Vice-Admiral with Lieutenant-General (when office exists). Rear Admiral with Major-General. Commodore with Brigadier-General. Captain with Colonel. Commander with Lieutenant-Colonel. Lieutenant-Commander with Major. Lieutenant with Captain. Lieutenant (junior grade), with First Lieutenant. Ensign with Second Lieutenant.. ARTICLE XLVII. , HONORS, SALUTES, OFFICIAL VISITS, CEREMONIES. 422. The following officers will be received with standards and colors dropping, officers and troops saluting, and the bands and field music playing as below : The President — The band playing ^‘The President’s March.” The General — The band playing “ The General’s March.” The Lieutenant-General or Major-General commanding — Trumpets sounding three flourishes or drums beating three ruffles. A Major-General — Two flourishes and two ruffles. A Brigadier- General — One flourish or one ruffle. 423. The Vice-President, the members of the Cabinee, the Chief Justice, the President of the Senate, the Speaker o.** the House of Representatives, and Governors within their respective States and Territories, receive the same honors as are paid to a General Commanding-in -Chief. 424. American or foreign envoys or ministers are received with the honors due to a Lieutenant-General. ii APPENDIX. 425. Officers of the Navy arc received with the honors due their assimilated rank. 426. Officers of Marines, and or the Volunteers and Militia, when in the service of the United States, receive the honors due to like grades in the regular service. 427. Officers of a foreign service are received with the honors due to their rank. 428. The national or regimental colors passing guard or other armed body, will be saluted, the trumpets sounding, and the drums beating a march. Officers or enlisted men passing the colors will give the pre- scribed salute whether with or without arms. 429. No honors are paid by troops when on the march or in trenches and no salute is rendered when marching in double time, or at the trot or gallop. 430. The commanding officer is saluted by all commissioned officers in command of troops or detachments. If troops are armed, arms will be brought to a carry ” before the salute is tendered. 431. All officers salute each other on meeting, and in making or receiving official reports. When under arms the salute is made with the sword or saber, if drawn ; otherwise with the hand. A mounted officer dismounts before addressing a superior not mounted. In all cases the junior salutes first. 432. On official occasions, officers when indoors and under arms do not uncover, but salute with the sword, if drawn ; otherwise with the hand. If not under arms, they uncover and stand at attention, but do not- salute. 433. When an enlisted man without arms passes an officer he salutes him, using the hand farthest from the officer. If mounted he salutes with the right hand. 434. An enlisted man armed with the saber, when out of ranks, salutes all officers with the saber, if drawn ; if not he salutes with the hand. If on foot, and armed with a rifle or car bine, he salutes as prescribed for a sergeant. A mounted soldier dismounts before addressing an officer^'not mounted. 435. A non-commissioned officer, or private in command of a detachment without arms, salutes all officers with the hand. If the detachment be on foot, and armed with the rifle or carbine, be brings his piece to carry, and salutes as prescribed for a sergeant. If armed with a saber, he salutes with the saber- APPENDIX. lU 436. An enlisted man being seated, rises on the approach of an officer, faces towards him and salutes. If standing he faces the officer for the same purpose. If the parties remain in the same place, or on the same ground, such compliments need not be repeated. Soldiers actually at work do not cease it to salute an officer unless addressed by him. 437. An enlisted man makes the prescribed salute with the weapon he is armed with ; or, if unarmed, with the hand, before addressing an officer. He also makes the same salute after receiving a reply. 438. Indoors, a non-commissioned officers or soldier, when unarmed, uncovers and stands at attention upon the approach of an officer, but does not salute ; in all other cases he salutes as heretofore prescribed, without uncovering. 439. When an officer enters the room where there are soldiers, the word “ Attention ” is given by some one who perceives him, when all rise and remain standing in the position of a soldier until the officer leaves the room. Soldiers at meals do not rise. Officers in citizens’ dress are saluted in the same manner as when in uniform. 440. Soldiers at all times and In all situations, pay the same compliments to officers of the Army, Navy and Marines, and to officers of the Volunteers and Militia in the service of the United States, as to offieers of their own particular regiments and corps. 441. Officers will at all times, acknowledge the courtesies of enlisted men by returning salutes given, saluting as prescribed in the drill regulations. When several officers in company are saluted, all who are entitled to salute return it. ARTICLE XLVII. FUNERAL HONORS [EXTRACT]. 474. The funeral escort of the Secretary of War or General-in- Chief shall consist of a regiment of infantry, a battalion of cavalry, and two batteries of artillery ; of the lieutenant-general or the major-general commanding, a regiment of infantry, a battalion of cavalry, and a battery of artillery ; of a major- general, a regiment of infantry, two companies of cavalry, and a battery of artillery ; of a brigadier-general, a regiment of infantry, a company of cavalry, and a platoon of artillery ; of a colonel, a regiment; lieutenant-colonel, six companies; a major, four companies ; a captain, one company ; a subaltern, half a company. * Iv APPENDIX. 475. The funeral escort of an officer will be commanded by an officer of the same grade as the deceased; if none such be present, by one of the next inferior grade. The form of escorting a corpse to the grave is prescribed in the drill regulations of the several arms of service. 476. The funeral escort of a non-commissioned staff officer shall consist of sixteen rank and file, commanded by a sergeant ; of a sergeant, of fourteen rank and file, commanded by a sergeant ; of a corporal, of twelve rank and file, commanded by a corporal ; and of a private, of e%ht rank and file, commanded by a corporal. ARTICLE XLVIII. COMPLIMENTS FROM GUARDS AND SENTINELS. 516. During the day, the guard of a camp or garrison turns out and presents arms to a general officer, the commander of the post or camp, and the officer of the day. 517. Guards will turn out and present arms to officers entitled to the compliment as often as they pass. The personal guards of general officers will turn out to the general whose guards they are, and to his superiors in rank. 518. All guards will turn out under arms when armed parties approach their posts ; to parties commanded by commissioned officers they will present arms, officers saluting. 519. The National or regimental colors passing a guard will be saluted, the trumpets or field music sounding a march. 520. When an officer entitled to a salute passes guards in the act of relieving, both will salute at the word of command from the senior officer. If he passes in rear of a guard it does not salute, but stands at a carry.” 521. The sentinel at the post of the guard, on the approach of a body of troops or officer entitled to the compliment, will cry, Turn out the guard,” and announce who approaches. 522. Guards do not turn out as a matter of compliment after sunset, nor will any compliments be paid by them between retreat and reveille. 523. Between reveille and retreat, sentinels will salute all officers by presenting arms. 524. Mounted sentinels, armed with the saber and with sabers drawn, will salute all officers by presenting saber; if armed with the carbine only, they will, on the approach of an officer, take the position of advance carbine. In challenging, and APPENDIX. V folding communications, they will take the position of advance carbine, raise pistol, or guard, accordingly as they are armed with the carbine, pistol or saber. 525. A sentinel in a sentry box, upon the approach of an officer, will stand at a carry, and, if armed with the rifle or car- bine will present arms as the officer passes. 526. Between retreat and reveille, except when challenging, a sentinel (not in a sentry box) will, when an officer approaches, face outward, and stand at a carry until the officer has passed. 527. All guards and sentinels will pay the same compliments to civil officers of the Government ; to officers in the military or civil service of foi’eign powers ; to officers of the Navy and Marine Corps, and to officers of volunteers and militia when in the service of the United States, that are directed to be paid to^ officers of he army of corresponding rank. HISTORY OF THE DRILL REGULATIONS. The American troops were drilled by the English Tactics dur- ing the eai ly part of the war of the Revolution. In 1779 Con- gress adopted Baron de Steuben’s abridgement of the Prussian Tactics. These were used by the United States Army until the commencement of the war of 1812 and by the Militia until 1820. In 1812 a very imperfect abridgement of the French Tactics of 1791, by General Alexander Smyth, was published under the sanction of the War Department {Itegtement Concer^iant V Exercise €t les Mamxuvres de V Infanterie ; du lerAout., 1791). In 1813 Lieut, Colonel William Duane of the Rifles, an ex-editor, pro- duced a handbook of instruction for the squad and company, which was used to some extent in the army. In this year Con- gress requested the President to have prepared for its approval “a military S3^stem of discipline for the Infantry of the Army nnd Militia of the United States.” This resolution was not acted upon owing to the occupation of the officers with fleld service, and during the war of 1812 tactical instruction was in a state of chaos, every officer in this matter being a law unto himself. De Lacroix had published in Boston a bad translation by Mac- donald of the French tactics, and with this and a copy of the original French, General Scott at the camp in Buffalo in 1814 personally instructed two brigades of Brown’s division. This was the first introduction here of the French system entire. With some modifications, it was adopted by the War Depart- ment and is known as ‘‘the system of 1815.” Its use by the militia was made compulsory in 1820. The “ system of 1825” was adapted from the French by a board consisting of Scott, Brady, Fenwick, Thayer and Worth. It was originally taken by the French from the Prussian system of Frederick the Great and was used throughout the Revolutionary and Napoleonic wars of France. Under authority of Congress, General Scott in 1834 prepared the adaptation of the Prussian system known by his name. The improvement in firearms finally compelled a change from the formal movements of Scott, and Hardee’s translation of the French system for their Chasseurs d pied was adopted as far as the school of the Battalion. From its peculiar double quick step, it was familiarly known as the “ Shanghai Drill.” Casey’s Revivdon of Hardee’s system was authorized during the Civil War and continued in use until superseded August 1, 1867, by Upton’s Tactics, which now in their turn give place to these Drill Regulations.” Editor Army and Navy Journal. Qiicj^tioiis as to tlie interpretation of tliese Drill Regiilalions will be answered in tlie ^*Artny and Navy Journal A ^ 13Sr DEX IJfFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. Details under each subject are arranged alphabetically. An Index to Intervals and Distances, and to all General Rules and Rules of General Application is added. ORDER OF Pars. Close order 10-484 School of the soldier 10-178 School of the company. 179-248 School of the battalion. 249-367 Evolutions of the regi- ment 368-459 The brigade 460^78 The division 479-483 The corps 484 Extended order 502-635 General principles 502-510 Leading the squad 511-517 The sqmad 518-558 CLOSE SCHOOL OF 1 Adjustments of sight 91, 92 Alignments 112, 121-126 Aim 85, 88, 90-92 At ease 22, 59 Attention 21 Attention, to resume 23, ^ Back step 39, 40, 112 Backward, march 129 Battle exercises, manual and firings 113 Bayonet exercise 151-178 SUBJECTS. Par». Extended order -Cont’d. The platoon 559-576 The company 577-601 The battalion 602-620 The regiment 621 The brigade in battle . . . 622-631 The division in battle . . . 632-635 Ceremonies 663-768 Trumpet calls, etc 769 Miscellaneous subjects, pages 3-7 and 1-9, 485-501, 636-662 ORDER. ^HE SOLDIER. Blows with butt 172-174 By the numbers 48 By the right or left flank, march 131, 132 Cadence of motions 47 Cadence of steps 31, 34 Carry, from charge bayo- net 67 Carry, from fix bayonet. . 62 Carry, from guard 158 Carry, from order 5J 325 326 INDEX-CLOSE ORDER SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER-Continued. Pars. •Carry, from port 57 Carry, from present 53 Carry, from right shoulder 55 Carry, from uiiflx bayonet. 63 Carry, position of 50 Cartridges, when used 93, 94 Cease bring 147 d 49 Change direction 133 Change step 41 Charge bayonet, from carry 67 Charge bayonet, from or- der 68 Close boxes 79, 96, 97 Close chamber 8^3 Close ranks, at order 112 Column of bles 117, 131, ^15 Combination of parries, points, etc 175-178 Commence bring 150 Covering and marching on points 42, 43 Dismiss the squad 25, 61 Distance between ranks 98, 118 Distance between ranks before lying down 73 Distance in column of bles. 131 Distances and intervals, bayonet exercise 152-156 Double time, from halt or quick time. 5, 34, 35, 112, 138, 139 Draw cartridge 84 Eyes right or left 26 Facings 27, 28, 112 Fall in 19, 20, 45, 120 Fall out 22, 59 Fire 86, 88 Firings 142-150 Fix bayonet, from carry ... 62 Fix bayonet, from order. . . 63 Fix bayonet, marching 66 Fix bayonet, with rod bayo- net 65 Forming the squad 120 Forward, march 127 (General rules : cease bring 148 firings 146 Pars. General rules— Continued, guide in oblique march- ing 136 hammer at safety notch 49, 70 manual of arms 49 manual of arms in bat- tle exercises 113 ^ :*nual of arms, march- inp; and halting 112 maiiual of arms, when marchings, etc., are understood 112 open chambers 46 Guard 157 Guide in oblique marching, general rules 136 Halt 33, 112 Hammer at safety notch. . . 49, 70 Individual instruction with arms 44-113 Individual instruction with- out arms 18-43 Inspection of cartridge box- es and arms 96, 97 Instructors 13, 14, 111, 115 Intervals and distances, bayonet exercise 1 52-1 56 Intervals in ranks 19, 122 Knapsacks, to unsling and sling 98 Kneel and lie down 69-76 Kneel, from lying down 76 Kneel, from order 71 Left shoulder 108 Length of steps. 31., 34, 37-39 Lie down, from order kneel- ing, and order 73, 75 Load and fire, with and without cartridges 93, 94 Load, from carry or order, 77, 112 Load, from fire 87, 88 Load, knealing or lying down 78 Manual of arms • 49-113 Manual of arms, marching and halting 112 INDEX-CLOSE ORDER, 327 Marching with arms, re- cruits Marchings Mark time Oblique march Open boxes Open chamber Open ranks at order. Order, from carry. . . Order, from charge bayo- net Order, from guard Order, from load or ready . Order, from port Order, from right shoul- der Order, from unfix bayo- net Order, kneeling Order, on halting Order, position of 50 Parade rest 24, 60 Parries 165-169 Points 170, 171 Port, from right shoulder. . 58 Port, from carry or order. . 57 Position of the soldier 21 Positions of piece for ex- tended order and route marches 106 Present, from carry 53 Quick time 31-33, 139 Ready 80, 81 Recover (from aim) 89 Rest 22, .59 Rests 22-24, .59’ 60 Rifie salute 95, 485 Pars. Right shoulder, from carry or order 54 Right shoulder, from port . 58 Right shoulder, when taken 112 Rise, from order kneeling. . 72 Rise, from position lying down 74 Route marches, positions of piece 106 Salute with hand 29, 485 Salute with rifie 95, 485 Secure 110 Setting-up exercises 30 Short step 37, 40, 135 Side step 38, 40, 112 Sizing and forming the squad 119, 120 Sling arms 109 Squad leader 115 Stack arms 99-105 Step, when lost 128 Steps 31-41 Steps, bayonet exercise. . .157-164, 171 Take arms 102, 104 The squad 114-150 Thrusts 170, 171 To the rear, march 130 Trail 107, 112 Turnings 140, 141 Unfix bayonet, from carry. 63 Unfix bayonet, from order. 63 Unfix bayonet, from port. . 64 Unfix bayonet, marching. . 66 Unfix bayonet with rod bayonet 65 Volley firing 145, 146 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER-Continued. Pars. 111 127-141 36, 40, 135 134-137 96 46, as 112 52 68 158 82 57 56 63 71 112 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. Alignments 189 At ease, marching 246 Attention, to resume. .192, 245, 246 Captain in column of fours, twos, etc., general rule.. . 197 Captain in column of pla- toons 223 Captain, in firings, general rule Captain, in turn and halt ... Captain, guides, etc., in all wheels by fours, general rule 193 192 197 328 INDEX-CLOSE ORDER. Change of direction in col- umn of fours Change of direction, slight. Change of flanks and center of company Cliange of guides to line of file closers and reverse. . . Close ranks Column of files from col- umn of fours or twos Column of fours or twos, from column of twos or files 218, 219 Column of fours, to the front, from column of platoons 242 Column of fours, to the front, from line 203 Column of fours, to the right or left, from line. . .196, 198 Column of fours, to the right or left, from line of platoons in columns of fours 241 Column of fours, twos, or files, faced to the flank or rear 217 Column of platoons, change direction 227-229 Column of platoons, face and march to the rear. . . 230 Column of platoons, halts, obliques, m ai ches 224 Column of platoons, to the front, from columns of fours 243 Column of platoons, to the front, from line 235 Column of platoons, to the right or left, from line . .221, 226 Column of platoons, to the right or left, froiP line of platoons in columns of fours 237 Column of twos or files, from column of fotirs or twos 214, 215 Part. Column of twos or files. Commands of chiefs of pla- toons, general rule 220 Company movements exe- cuted as in squad 192 Count fours 186 Detachments, details, etc. . . 192 Dismiss the company 194 Distance leading four, sub- division, etc., advances before halting, general rule 209 Dress, in column of fours general rule J99 Enlisted men in line of file closers, general rule 193 Face and march to the rear, from line 211, 212 Fall in 19, 20, 120, 187, 188 File closers, column of fours, twos, etc., general rule 197 File closers, duties and re- sponsibility of. .page 4. . . 248 File closers, in loadings and firings 193 File closers, to change flank 204 First sergeant, position of. . 247 Forming the company 187, 188 Forward march taken upon completion of wheel by fours 199 Fours right or left 196, 207, 237 Fours right or left about, in column of fours 206 General rules : announcement of guide in changing direc- tion 228 captain, in alignments. . 189 captain' in column of fours, twos, etc 197 captain in firings 193. 266 captain in turn and halt 192 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY— Continued. Pars. 200-202 195 247 247 191 215 INDEX-CLOSE ORDER. 329 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY-Continued. Pars. General rules— Continued, captains, guides, etc., in all wheels by fours . 197 chief of subdivision in column, alignments. . 189 chief of subdivision in column takes post, when 220 commands by chiefs of platoons 220 distance leading four, subdivision, etc., moves to front before halting 209 dress in column of fours 199 enlisted men in line of file closers 193 file closers, column of fours, twos, etc 197 guide of second or rear platoon in column 226 guides, in column of fours, twos, etc ^97 guides, manual of arms for 193 guides take post, when . 189 march taken up on com- pletion of wheel by fours 199 non-commissioned offi- cer commanding de- tachment, etc., posi- tion of rifle 193 pivot, fixed in wheels by fours 197 Guide, forming line from column of platoons 231 Guide, in turn and halt * 192 Guides of platoons 222 Guides take post at com- mand “front’’ 189 Instruction of officers, etc. . 185 Leading four or subdivis- ion, when halted 209 Line, from column of fours 207-210 Pars. Line, from column of pla- toons 231-234, 236 Line of platoons in columns of fours, on right or left, from column of fours 2^10 Line of platoons in columns of fours, to the front, from column of fours 239 Line of platoons in columns of fours, to the front, from line 238 Line of platoons in columns of fours, to the right or left, from column of fours 244 Line of platoons in columns of fours, to the right or left, from column of pla- toons 237 Line, on right or left, from column of fours 208 Line, on right or left, from column of platoons 234 Line, to the front, from col- umn of fours 210 Line, to the front, from col- umn of platoons 236 Line, to the front, from line of platoons in columns of fours 238 Line, to the right or left, from column of fours 207 Line, to the right or left, from column of pla- toons 231-233 Manual of arms, guides, etc., general rule 193 March at ease 246 March by the flank, from column of platoons 2.37 March by the flank, from line 196 March taken upon comple- . tion of wheel by fours, general rule 199 March to th^ rear, from line 211, 212 330 INDEX-CLOSE ORDER. SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY— Contimied. Pars. Ma)-oh to the rear in col- of fours 206 Movements executed as in s^uad 192 N on - commissioned officer commanding detach- ment, etc., position of rifle, general rule 193 Oblique, in column of fours 205 Obstacles 213 Officers marching at ease or route step, position of sword 246 Open ranks 190 Pars. Pivot, fixed and mov- able 196, 197, 200 Platoons 179-ia3, 192 Platoons, movements by.,^J0-244 Posts of officers, etc 184 Right or left forward, fours right or left 203 Route step, and at ease . . .245, 246 Sections 179-183 Sizing the company 186 Squad leader 180, 183 Squads 179-ia3 Subdivisions of company. .179-183 Swing of arms 192 To the rear, from line 211, 212 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. Adjutant auv^ sergeant-ma- jor post guides for close column 337 Adjutant, etc., when guide is changed, general rule. . 300 Alignments 279, 280 Arrangement of companies, table 253 Arrangement of fractions of different regiments 253 Attention, resuming 269 Band and field music, post of 256 Band takes its position in line, when 260 Captains required to drill battalion 252 diange direction by the flank in close column 344 Change front 315-318 Change of direction in col- umn of companies. .305, 308, 309 Change of direction in line, slight 273 Changing file closers to op- posite flank 285 Close column 334-347 Close column, change direc- tion by the flank 344 Close column, deployments of 346, 347 Close column, designated company in front 337 Close column, faced to the front, from column of fours 339 Close column, faced to the rear, from column of fours 346 Close column, faced to the right or left, from column of fours 341 Close column, from col- umn of companies 335 Close column, from line 338 Close column, in oblique direction 339 Close column, movements of 343, 345 Close ranks 264 Color and guard. .254, 265, 498, 499 Column of companies face and march to the rear . . . 307 Column of companies from close column 336 Column of companies from right or left to march to left or right 304 INDEX-CLOSE ORDER 331 Column of companies, from street column Column of companies, halt. Colunm of companies, suc- cessively, from column of fours Column of companies, to the front, from column of fours Column of companies, to the front, from column of platoons C)lumn of companies, to the rear, from line Column of companies, to the right or left, from line 298, 299 Column of companies, to the right or left, from line of columns of fours 327 Column of companies, to the right or left, from line of platoon columns 359 Column of fours, from close column 342 Column of fours, from col- umn of companies 330 Column of fours, from col- umn of platoons 348 Column of fours from right or left, to march to left or right 284 Column of fours, from line 282, 284 Column of fours, from street column 367 Column of fours, movement same as in company 286 Column of fours, succes- sively, from column of companies 303 Column of platoons, from column of companies 349 Column of platoons, from column of fours 348 Column of platoons, from line 348 Pars. Column of platoons, from line of platoon col- umns 361 Column of platoons, take and close distances 351 Command of major after firings, general rule 266 Commands repeated or given by captains 250 Deployments of close col- umn 346, 347 Designations of companies and wings 253 Dismiss the battalion 270 Distance between com- panies in column of fours 282 Distance in close column, general rule 334 Distance in column of sub- divisions 298 Equalizing companies and the battalion 253, 262 Face and march to the rear m line 276, 277 Field and staff, posts of 255 File closers in close col- umn, general rule 334 File closers, to change 285 Fire at will 268 Fire by battalion 268 Fire by company 267 Formation, advancing con- siderable distances 275 Formation of battalion 253 Forming the battalion 257-261 Fractions of different regi- ments. positions of 253 Full distance, from close column 336 General rules : ad j utant, etc. , when guide is changed 300 captain at command guide center 272 captain dressing com- Dany 258* SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— Continued. Pai s. 367 306 302 330 350 301 332 INDEX-CLOSE ORDER. SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— Continued. Pars. General rules— Continued, captain in loadings and firings 193, 266 command of major after firings 266 distance in close col- umn a34 file closers in close col- umn 334 guides of subdivisions in column 300 successive formations. . 288 Guide, announcement of . . . 251 Guides, cover 311 Guides marching at route step and at ease 319 Habitual formation ad- vancing considerable dis- tances 275 In mass 334-347 Instruction of officers 252 Intervals in line 257 Intervals in line of columns of fours 325, 332. 333 Intervals in line of platoon columns 354 Line by two movemtrts, from column of fours . . .^3-297 Line, from close column. .346, 347 Line from column of com- panies 310, 312-314 Line from line of Compa- nies in columns of fours . Line from line of platoon columns Line of columns of fours, movements like battal- ion in line Line of companies in col- umns of fours at close in- tervals Line of companies in col- umns of fours, change direction . .*. Line of companies in col- umns of fours, close and extend intervals 332, 333 324 358 321 325 323 Pars. Line of companies in col- umns of fours, from col- umn of companies 32& Line of companies in col- umns of fours, from line of platoon columns marching by the flank ... 365 Line of companies in col- umns of fours, gain ground toward flank and front 322 Line of companies in col- umns of fours, on right or left, from column of fours 326 Line of companies in col- umns of fours, to the front, from column of fours 325 Line of companies in col- umns of fours, tothefront, from line 320 Line of companies in col- umns of fours, to the * right or left, from col- umn of fours 329 Line of platoon columns, close and extend intervals 355 Line of platoon columns. formations. 356, 360, 362, 363, 366 Line of platoon columns, intervals 354 Line of platoon columns, march by the flank 364 Line of platoon columns, movements same as in line of columns of fours. . 357 Line of platoon columns, on right or left, from col- umn of platoons 362 Line of platoon columns, to the front, from line 356 Line of platoon columns, to the front, from column of fours 366 Line of platoon columns, to the front, from column of platoons 363 INDEX-CLOSE ORDER 333 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— Continued. Pars. Line of platoon columns, to the right or left, from column of companies 360 Line of platoon columns, to the right or left, from column of platoons 361 Line, on right or left, from column of companies 312 Line, on right or left, from column of fours 289 Line, on right or left, from column of platoons 352 Line, to or on right or left, from close column 336 Line, to the front, from col- umn of companies 313, 314 Line, to the front, from col- umn of fours 290, 291 Line, to the front, from col- umn of platoons 353 Line, to the front, from line of columns of fours 324 Line, to the front, from line of platoon columns 358 Line, to the right or left, from column of compa- nies 310 Line, to the right or left, from column of fours 287 Line, to the right or left, from column of platoons. 348 Loadings and firings 265, 266 Losing step 274 Manual of arms 265 March at ease, and route step 319 March by the flank 282, 283 EVOLUTIONS OF Advance in line, line of col- umns or line of masses. . . 376 Alignments 380. 440 Band, posts of 369 Battalions awaiting com pletio'-i of mo’^’ement , . . . 370 Change front, line 453 Pars. March in line 271 March, and face to the rear 276, 277 Mounted officers 255 Movements by pla- Movements in close col- umn 343-345 Movements in line of col- umns of fours 321 N on - commissioned officer commanding company, post of 259 Oblique by heads of col- umns 322 Oblique change of front 318 Oblique in line 278 Obstacles 281 Open ranks 263 Platoon column, defined. . . 354 Ployments in close col- Post of band and field music 256 Post of non-commissioned officer commanding com- pany 259 Posts of field and staff 255, 319 Rests 269 Route marches 319 Simultaneous movements by companies, etc 251 Square from street column 367 Stack and take arms 269 Staff and non-commissioned staff take post, when 260 Street column, formation and movements of 367 THE REGIMENT. Change front, line of masses 442 Color and color guard 254, 265, 498, 499 Column at full distance 401 Column at full distance, change direction 402 334 INDEX-CLOSE ORDER, Column at full distance, face to the rear Column at full distance, from column of masses . . Column at full distance, movements same as in battalion Column of battalions, from line of column of fours 425-4?^> Column of battalions, on flank and interior battal- ion from line 4“^^, 427 Column of companies or platoons from line 401 Column of fours, from line of masses 446 Column of fours from right or left to march to left or right 382 Column of fours from two lines 387 Column of fours, move- ments explained from march 384 Column of fours, move- ments same as in battal- ion 383 Column of masses, change direction by the flank 418 Column of masses, dis- tances 410 Column of masses faced to the front, from column of fours 415 Column of masses faced to the front, from line of masses 448 Column of masses faced to the rear, from column of fours 416 Column of masses faced to the rear, from line of masses 449 Column of masses faced to the right or left, from column of fours 417 Para. Column of masses from column at full d i s - tance 411 Column of masses from line, etc., duties of adju- tant 448 Column of masses, from line, rule for ployment ... 410 Column of masses in ob- lique direction, from col- umn of fours 415 Column of masses, move- ments same as at full dis- tance ’. . 417 Column of masses on flank and interior battalion from line 413, 414 Column of masses, princi- ples for forming 410 Column of masses to the right or left, from line of masses ; 447 Column of platoons from line 401 Commands, general rules. . . 370 Deployments of column of masses 419-423 Designation of battalions. . . 371 Dismiss the regiment 375 Distance, column of battal- ions 385 Distance, column of fours, between battalions 382 Distance, column of masses 410 Distance, in two or more lines 385 Distances, column of subdi- visions 298 Distances, in echelon 457 Echelon 457-459 Echelon, movements same as in line 4.58 Face to the rear, line 377 Firings 373 Forming the regiment 371 General rules for com- mands 370 EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT-Continned. Pars. 403 412 401 INDEX-CLOSE ORDER, 885 Halt Intervals in line Intervals, line of companies or platoons in columns of fours Intervals, line of masses Intervals, line of platoon columns In two lines, on right or left, from column at full dis- tance In two lines, on right or left, from column of fours In two lines, position and movements of second line In two lines to the front, from column at full dis- tance In two lines to the front, from column of fours . . . 394, 398 In two lines to the right or left, from column of fours 386 Tn two or three lines, from column of masses 422, 423 \.ine by two movements, from column at full dis- tance 408 Line by two movements, from column of fours. . .395, 396 Line, from echelon of bat- talions 459 Line, from line of col- umns 376 Line of battalions in col- umns of fours, from col- umn of masses 424 Line of companies in col- umns of fours from col- umn of fours 399 Line of companies in col- umns of fours from line. . 409 Line of masses 432-452 Line of masses, adjutant and sergeant-major 432 Line of masses, alignment . 440 Pars. Line of masses, change front 442 Line of masses, extend and close intervals 433 Line of masses faced to the right or left, from column of fours 436 Line of masses, from line of masses marching by the flank 445 Line of masses, major 432 Line of masses, march by the flank 443 Line of masses marching by the flank, change di- rection 444 Line of masses, movements same as in line 441 Line of masses on flank and interior battalion, from line 434, 435 Line of masses, on right or left, from column of fours 437 Line of masses, on right or left, from column of masses 451 Line of masses, posting guides 432 Line of masses, to the front from column of fours. . .438, 439 Line of masses, to the front from column of masses 452 Line of masses to the right or left, from column of masses 450 Line of platoons in columns of fours from line 409 Line, on right or left, from column at full distance. . . 404 Line, on right or left, from column of fours 388 Line to the front, from col- umn at full distance 406 Line to the front, from col- umn of battalions 430, 431 EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT— Continued. Pars. 379 371 409 371 454 405 389 385 407 336 INDEX-CLOSE ORDER. EVOLUTIONS OF THE Pars. Line to the front, from col- umn of fours 390-393, 397 Line, to the right and left, from column of masses 419-421 Line, to the right or left, from column of fours 383 March to the rear, line 378 March by the flank, from line 381 Movements by battalions, simultaneous and sepa- rate 370 Movements by platoons . . .454-456 Movements in echelon 458, 459 Movements in line of col- umns of fours 399 THE BI Change of front 478 Composition of the brigade . 460 Distances between lines 465 Designated formation for each regiment 470 Designations of regiments. . 461 Drill exercises 464 Habitual formation moving into position 464 Halt 472 Interval between r e g i - ments 462 In two or more lines, from column of fours 468 Line, from column of fours 467-469 Line, from column of pla- toons 470 Line, from line of columns of fours 476, 477 Line, from line of masses. 476, 477 Line, from line of platoon columns 476, 477 Line, march to the rear 473 Line of columns of fours, marchings 474 REGIMENT— Continued. Pars. Movements of column ot masses 417 Movements of masses 441-452 Open and close ranks 372 Orderlies and tinimpeters, mounted .369 Ployrnents into column of masses 410-417 Posts of fleld, staff, and band ,369 Regiment, composition .368 Rests ,374 Route marches 1^9 Route step and at ease 400 Successive formations 385 Trumpeters and orderlies mounted 369 Line of masses, marchings. 474 Line of platoon columns, marchings 474 Line, on right or left, from column of fours 469 Lines of columns of fours. . 470 Lines of masses 470 Lines of platoon columns . . 470 Line to the front, from col- . umn of fours 466 Line to the right or left, from column of fours 467 March by the flank 475 March in line 471 March to the rear, line 473 Movements of regiments and battalions 464 Orders of brigade com- mander 465 Posts of brigade command- ers, staff, etc 463 Posts of regiments 461 Re-form line from line of columns of fours, line of masses, or line of platoon columns 476, 477 INDEX-EXTENDED ORDER. 337 THE DIVISION. Pars. Composition 479 Designations of brigades. . . 481 Distances between lines 483 Evolutions 479 Interval between brigades. . 482 Number of lines and forma- tion of each 482 THE CORPS. Pars. Orders of division com- mander 483 Post of division command- er 480 Posts of brigades 481 484 EXTENDED ORDER. GENERAL PRINCIPLES. Alignments 509 Attention fixed, signal 506 Basis 502 Chief, leaving post 510 Commencement of instruc- tion 503 Dressing, without c o m - mand 509 Duties of officers and ser- geants 502 Enemy, imaginary, out- lined or represented, defi- nition 505 Extended order from any formation 507 Face to the front on halttng 508 Instruction, when com menced 503 Maintenance of squad 502 March and stand at ease . . . 509 Movement commenced, sig- nal 506 Movements always made with reference to an en- emy 504 Position of piece 106, 113 Post of chief 510 Signals, application 506 Squad, when broken up 502 Stand and march at ease. . . 509 LEADING THE SQUAD. Corporal, posts of 510, 513, 517 | Execution of movements. Execution of movements manner 5K at signa’ i 511 Exercises of squad 514 I Guide 515, 516 THE SQUAD. Advance, from rally 531 Assembly 532 As skirmishers, forward 523 Base file or skirmisher . . .515, 516. 520 Battle exercises 558 Change direction or front . . 530 Corporal, pos*^« of 510, 513, 517, Departures from general rules of fire discipline .535 Deploy as skirmishers, for- ward and bj: the fiank. .523, 524 Deploy from rally 531 Deployment as skirmishers, general rule 521 Deployments forward and by the fiank, general ruK 518 338 INDEX-EXTENDED ORDER. THE SQUAiD-Continued. Pars. Execution of movements at signals 533 Fire as skirmishers with counted cartridges 538, 545 Fire at will, and with count- ed cartridges 538, 544 Fire discipline 534-540 Firings 541-546 General rules : base file, skirmisher or guide 515, 516, 520, 521 deployment as skirmish- ers 521 deployment forward and by the flank 518 interval between skir- mishers 519 kneel or lie down 522 of fire discipline 534 of fire discipline, de- partures from 535 posts of squad leader. . . 510 513, 517, 520, 527, 528 Instruction on varied ground 547-557 Pars. Intensity of fire, how regu- lated 544 Interval between skirmish- ers, general rule 519 Intervals, increase and di- minish 525 Kneel or lie down, general rule 522 Line of skirmishers, from line 523, 524 Marchings 526-530 Number of cartridges to be fired 545 Rally 531 Ranges, classification 540 Rapid fire . 539, 546 Regulating intensity of fire. 544 Rushes 556 Scouts, to fire 535 Sharpshooters, and individ- ual men, firing 536 Signals, use of page 7. . . 533 Skirmishers, assemble 532 Use of cover 551. 557 Volley firing 537, 543 Assemble. Change direction or front. . Chief of platoon, post and duties, general rule .559 Corporal, posts.. 510, 513, 517, 520, 527, 528, 559, 572 Deploy skirmishers, from line and line of squads. .563, 564 Deploy platoon as skir- mishers 564 Designation of center squad and point of direc- tion 559 Different formations for squads 567 Firing line, composition, general rule 559 Firings 572, '573 General rules : composition of firing- line 559 designation of center squad 559 designation of point of direction 559 marching by flank un- der fire 559 movements of support. . 559 posts and duties of chief of platoon 559 posts and duties of chiefs of sections 559 posts and duties of cor- porals. 510, 513, 517, 520, 527, 528, 559, 572 support 559 THE PLATOON. .566, 576 570 INDEX-EXTENDED ORDER. 339 THE PLATOON-Continued. Pars. Intervals, increase and di- minish 565 Intervals in line of sections 574 Intervals in line of squads. . 560 Line of sections, move- ments same as line of squads 574 Line of skirmishers, from line of squads 563 Line of skirmishers, from platoons in line 564 Line of squads, from line. . 560 Line of squads, on rig^ht or left, from column of fours 562 Pars. Line of squads, to the front, from column of fours 561 Marchings ,568-571 Rally 576 Re-enforcement of firing line 575 Section constituting firing line 573 Section, movements of, like platoon 574 Signals for execution of movements page 7 . 533 Support, general rule 559 THE COMPANY. Advance 2,500 yards to enemy’s position, offen- sive 583-593 Arrival at position, defen- sive 597 Arrival of supports on firing line, offensive 589 Artillery, defense and at- tack of 599-601 Assembly 580 Attack 583-593, 595 Battalion reserve, defen- sive Battle formation Battle formation defen- sive Cavalry, action against Charge Closing of firing line, offen- sive Commanders of compa- nies, duties of, respect- ing use of scouts Company alone, defen- sive 578, 597 Company alone, offen- sive f.578, 595 Company in battalion, de- fensive .596 596 577 596 598 593 587 582 Company in battalion. Composition of firing line, defensive 596 Counter attacks, defensive. 597 Defensive dispositions 596, 597 Deployment 580 Designation of sections for firing line and support, offensive 583 Echelons 577 Extension, offensive 583 Fighting front, company in battalion 577 Fire discipline, how main- tained 591 Firing line, sections for 579 Firings 580 First volleys, offensive 585 Form for attack, offensive . 583 General rule : reconnoissances and use of scouts 582 Infantry under artillery fire 599 Intervals, increase and di- minish 580 Line of squads or sections. . .580 Marchings 580 840 INDEX-EXTENDED ORDER. THE COMPANY— Continued. Pars. Movements following charge, offensive 59.3 Movements same as pla- toon .580 Offensive 583-595 Positions and duties of offi- cers, etc 581 Pursuit 595 Rally 580 Rapid fire, offensive 593 Recon noissances, general rule 582 Re-enforcing firing line, de- fensive and offensive. . . .592, 596 Pars. Relieving the firing line, of- fensive 594 Retiring from position, de- fensive 597 Rushes 556, 588, 590, 692 Scouts, use and duties of.. 582, 583, .585, 596, .597 Sections for firing line 579 Sections for firing line and support, offensive 583 Supports all in firing line, offensive 593 Volleys, offensive 586-591 Advance guard of a regi ment Against cavalry Assembling and rallying . . Artillery, defense and at tack of Battalion alone, defensive. Battalion alone, offensive. . . Battalion in action, general rules Battalion in regiment, de- fensive Battalion in regiment, of- fensive Color, in action Defensive Designation of companies, etc., for fighting line and reserve Direction of advance Discretion of commanders. . Dispositions after assault, offensive 609 Dispositions of a battal- ion 613—620 Echelons 603 Extension 604 Fighting front 604 Fighting line 603 Firing line 603 Formation for attack 604, 609 General rulec 608 Intervals between c o m - panies in line of skirmish- ers 604 Intrenchments 611 Marchings 605 Mounted officers 604 Night operations 620 Offensive 609, 610 Operating on flank 613 Patrols, defensive 611 Position of reserve 604 Post of major 604 Principles of instruction 602 Rallying 607 Rear guard of a regi- ment. 615 Relieving and re enforcing firing line 606 621 THE BATTALION. 614 616 607 617-619 612 610 608 611 609 604 611, 612 604 605 608 THE REGIMENT INDEX-CEREMONIES. 341 THE BRIGADE IN BATTLE. Pars. Discretion of commanders . 626, 629 Fighting line, without regi- mental reserves 624 Formations 622-626 One line 623 Order from brigade to bat- talion commander 628 Passing from close to ex- tended order, general rule. 629 THE DIVISION IN BATTLE... Pars. Place of reserve, general rule 629 Position of brigade com- mander 627 Reserve formed in eche- lon 629 Two or three lines 624, 625 Withdrawing the bri- gade 630-631 632-635 CEREMONIES. (Battalion inspection 739-745 Battalion parade 733,734 Battalion review 689-696 Brigade review 703-705 Company inspection 746 Corps review 709,710 Division review 706-708 Details, at guard mounting, alternate in position 713 Escort of the color 754r-757 Escorts of honor 758 Field and staff senior to in- specting officer 740 Funeral escort 759-768 General rules for ceremo- nies 663-666 arrangement of troops of different arms 663 field and staff, when mounted 665 non-commissioned offi- cer commanding com- pany or platoon 666 posting of companies, battalions, etc 664 General rules for reviews.. 667-688 after passing reviewing officer 687, 688 bands, play, turn out of column, etc 683 brigades at ease, etc 678 changing direction, pass- ing in review 667 General rules for reviews— Continued. colonels and majors fac- ing line to give com- mands 680 colonels and majors sa- lute after resuming front 680 color salutes 498, 682 column passing review- ing officer, distance . . 667 commanders draw and return sword, when . . 676 commanders take post in column, when 674 commanders turning out of column 677 commands given or re- peated by colonels and majors 679, 680 companies brought to carry and right shoul- der 667 execution of commands repeated by majors . . 680 field music sounds march, flourishes, or ruffles 684 flag and orderlies of re- viewing officer 670 marking points where column changes di- rection, etc 667 342 INDEX-CEREMONIES. CEREMONIES-Continued. Pars. Qeneral rules for reviews— Continued. modifications of forma- tion for review 685 officers and others ac- companying review- ing officer 669, 671 orderlies of reviewing officer 670 pass in review in quick time 6®^ points where companies execute carr}" and right shoulder 667 repetition of commands by colonels 679 review by inspector junior to command- ing officer 696 reviewing officer, post of 668 reviewing officer riding around troops, who accompany 672 reviewing officer, sa- lutes 669 review of command larger than corps 711 salute by color 498, 682 salute to color 669 salutes returned by re- viewing officer 669 sounding march, flour- ishes, ruffles 684 staff and orderlies when commander faces line to give commands 681 staff, etc., of command- ers 675 staff, etc., of command- ers turning out of col- umn 677 staff, etc., of reviewing officer 669, 670 staff, etc., passing around troops 673 Pars. General rules for reviews — Continued. staff officers draw and return sw'ord, when . . 676 staff salute at command 680 Guard mounting 712-732 Guard mounting, cavalry and infantry united 731 Guard mounting, in bad weather, etc 730 Guard mounting, interval between old and new guard 726 Guard mounting, without review 725 Inspection, band 743 Inspection, battalion 739-745 Inspection, enlisted men with sword drawm 497 Inspection of a company. 742, 746, 747 Inspection, regimental 748-750 Muster 751-753 Non-commissioned officer commanding guard 718, 727 Officer of the guard, super- numerary 717 Officers of the day 722 Parade, battalion 733, 734 Parade, regimental 735-738 Points where companies execute carry and right shoulder 667 Regimental inspection 748-750 Regimental parade 735-738 Regimental review 697-702 Review, battalion 689-696 Review, brigade 703-705 Review by inspector junior to commanding officer . . . 696 Review, corps 709, 710 Review, division 70^708 Review of command larger than corps 711 INDEX-MISCELLANEOUS. 343 TRUMPET CALLS, ETC., pages 285-324, par. 769. MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS, pages 3-7 and pars. 1-9, 485-501, 63&-662. Pars. Pars. About face for officers 486 Adyance guard 614, 636-640, 644, 645 Definition page 5 . . 636 Modifications of rules. . . 645 Strength 644 Band 256, 260, 369, 500, 501 Drum major, instruc- tions for 501 Field music, posts and duties 256, 500 Formation 500 Inspection 743 Marches, fiourishes, ruf fles, and to the coloi sounded by field mu- sic, when 50u, o84 Movements of band. . .500, 683 Open ranks 500 Posts of 256, 369 Takes post, when 260 Camping 660, 661 Color and color guard. . .254, 265, 498, 499, 604 Color, escorted to and from color company . 499 Color guard 499 Color guard, manual of arms 265 Color in action 604 Color, regimental, post of bearer 499 Color, with battalion designated by colonel 499 Manual of the color 498 Regimental color-bear- er, post of 499 Salute of color, when rendered 498, 682 Courtesy among military men 485 Definitions pages 3-6. Drill signals page 7. Drum major, instructions for 501 Enlisted men using about face for officers 486 Field music, posts and duties General principles. Infantry Drill Regulations 1-9 Commands 6, 7 Formation for infant- ry 1 Guide (right or left) 3 Movements from halt or marching 4 Movements in double time 5 Movements toward either flank, how ex- plained 2 Posts of officers and in- structors 9 Signals and trumpet calls, use of, in in- struction 8 Honors to be paid by troops 662 Carry sword, when used 492 Enlisted men with sword drawn, at in- spection 497 Enlisted men with sword drawn, carry sword (or arms), from present 489 Enlisted men with sword drawn, order sword (or arms), from carry 491 Enlisted men with sword drawn, present sword (or arms) 489 Officers draw and re- turn sword without command 495 344 INDEX-DISTANCES. MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS— Continued. Pars. Manual of sword— Cont’d. Officers mounted, draw' and return sword . . .487, 496 Order sword, when exe- cuted 491 Position of sword at double time 494 Position of sword marching at ease and at route step 246 Position of sw'ord w'hile marching, etc 492 Sword, while publishing orders 488 Pars. Marches Outposts 64H-65() Hear guard 616, 641-646 Defined page 5.. 641 Modifications of rules 64r) Strength 644 Respect to superiors 486 Rifle salute 96, 48.5 Salute with hand 29, 48» Signals for drill inove- nients page 7. . Use hy enlisted men of about face for oflicers 486 DISTANCES. Definition page 3. Band, between ranks. 500 Band in column 256, 369 Band, open ranks 263, .500 Classification of ranges ^ Close column ' Column, band Column of battalions 385 Column of companies, full distance 298 Column of files 131, 215 Column of fours, between battalions 382 Column of fours, between companies 282 Column of fours, between ranks 196 Column of masses, between battalions 410 Column of platoons, be- tween platoons 226 Column of subdivisions 298 Column of twos 214 Company in extended or- der, betw'een echelons 577 Corporal in front and rear, extended order 520 Drum major in front of band 501 Echelon, betw'een battal- ions 4.57 Firings 536-539 Forming line, between guides 257 Guides, posting of, succes- sive formations 288 In mass 3.34 File closers pago 4. . .3.34 Open ranks 190, 26.3 Platoon, between firing line and support 5.59 Ranges, classification 540 Reserve in rear of supports, battalion 604 Route step, between ranks. 245 Saluting distance 485 Successive formations, guides from fiank or head of column 288 Two or more lines, be- tween lines, brigade 465 Two or more lines, be- tween lines, division 483 Two or more lines, be- tween lines, regiment 385 Unsling and sling knap- sacks 98 INDEX-GENERAL RULES, ETC. 345 INTERYALS. Pars. Definition page 5. Band, battalion in line 256 Band, between files 500 Band, regiment in line 369 Bayonet exercise 152-156 Column of fours, twos, or files, file closers 197 Color bearer, from flank of color company 254 Guard mounting, between old and new guard 726 In ranks 19, 122, 189 Line, band 256, 369 Line, between battalions ... 371 Line, between brigades 482 Line, between companies . . 257 Line, between regiments . . . 462 Line of columns, band 256 Line of columns of fours, be- tween companies 320 Pars. Line of companies or pla- toons in columns of fours. 409 Line of masses, between battalions 371 Line of platoon columns, between battalions 454 Line of platoon columns, close and full 354 Line of platoons in columns of fours, between pla- toons 237 Line of sections, between sections 574 Line of skirmishers, be- tween companies 604 Line of skirmishers, be- tween skirmishers 519 Line of squads, between squads 560 GENERAL RULES AND RULES OF GENERAL AF- PLICATION. About face for officers, use of, by enlisted men 486 Adjust sight, before aim- ing 534 Adjutant and sergeant- major assure guides for close column 337 Adjutant and sergeant- major, when guide in column is changed 300 Advance guard 614, 636-640, 644, 645 After passing reviewing officer 667, 687, 688 Aim 534 Alignments 112, 122, 189, 279, 280, 380, 509 Alignments in extended or- der 509 Announcement of guide, changing direction, col- umn of subdivisions 228 Arrangement of troops of different arms, etc 663 “As you were” 17 Attention, in extended or- der 506 Back step from order 112 Band and field music, posts of 256, 260, 369 Bands play, turn out of col- umn, etc., at review 683 Band takes post in line, when 260 Base company, extended order 604, 609 Base file, skirmisher, or guide, extended order. .515, 516, 520, 521 Base squad, extended or- der 559. 583 Basis of extended order .... 502 Battalion awaiting comple- tion of movement 370 346 INDEX-GENERAL RULES, ETC. GENERAL RULES, ETC.— Continued. Pars. Battalion in action. . . .602, 603, 608 Battalion in fighting line ... 621 Battle exercises 113, 558 Blank cartridges in battle exercises 558 Boxes closed after execut- ing order or order kneel- ing 79 Brigades at ease at review . 678 By the numbers 48 Cadence of motions in manual 47 Captain, at command “ guide center ” 272 Captain, dressing company in line 258 Captain, in alignments 189 Captain, in column of fours, twos, or files 197 Captain, in loadings and Captain, in turn and halt. . . 192 Cartridges, use of 94 “ Cease firing, load,” use of. 149 Cease firing, when com- mand may be given 148 Center of company changed to flanks 247 Ceremonies (see general rules, under c e r e m o - nies) 663-66b Change of guides to line of file closers and reverse . . . 247 Changing direction, passing in review 667 Chief leaving post in ex- tended order 510 Chief of platoon in ex- tended order 559 Chief of sections, forming line of squads or skir- mishers 559 Chief of subdivision in col- umn, alignments 189 Chief of subdivision in col- umn, takes post when. . . . 220 Pars. Close column, deploy- ments 346, 347 Close column, distance be- tween companies 334 Close column, file closers. . ^4 Close column, leading or designated company in front 337 Close column, movements same as in column at full distance 343, 345 Close column, ployments. . . 337 Close ranks from order 112 Colonels and majors, facing line to give commands at review 680 Colonels and majors salute at review, when 680 Color escorted to and from color company 499 Color guard in loadings and firings 265 Color, in extended order . . . 604 Color salutes, w^hen 498, 682 Column of battalions, dis- tance 385 Column of files 117, 131, 215 Column of fours in regi- ment, movements ex- plained from march 384 Column of masses, distances and ployment 410 Column of subdivisions, full distance 298 Commanders draw and re- turn sword at review . 676 Commanders, in extended order, use of scouts 582 Commanders take places in column at reviews, when 674 Commanders turning out of column at review 677 Command “fire,” when given 146 Commands .6, 250, 370 INDEX-GENERAL RULES. ETC. 'm Commands, by chiefs of platoons Commands for firings Commands given by trum- pet repeated orally Commands, intervals be- tween, in firings Commands repeated at reviews 679, 680 Commencement of instruc- tion, extended order 503 Commencement of instruc- tion with arms 44 Companies brought to carry and right shoulder at review 667 Company, extended or- der, 577-580 Composition of firing line, extended order 559 Corporal, as squad leader . . 115 Corporal, in extended or- der 115, 510, 513, 515-517, 520, 522, 527, 528, 559, 572 Correction of errors 17 Courtesy among military men 485 Departures from general rules for fire discipline . . . 535 Deployment as skirmish- ers 521 Deployments forward and by the flank, extended order 518 Deployments of close col- umn 346, 347 Deployments of column of masses 419-423 Designation of base com- pany, extended order 604 Designation of center squad and point of direc- tion 559, 583 Detachments, . details, etc., movements of 192 Discretion of command- ers 608, 621, 629 P^rrk Disengaged hand at double time .... 11^ Distance between ranks.73, 98. 110 Distance leading four, sub- division, etc., advances before halting 209 Distances in close column. . 334 Distances in column of sub- divisions 298 Double rank, habitual for- mation, for infantry 1 Double time taken by bat- . talion, after passing re- viewing officer 687 Dress, in column of fours . . 199 Dressing in extended or- der 509 Echelon, definition and use of term page 4. .577, 603 Enemy imaginary, outlined, represented 505 Enlisted men in line of file- closers, manual of arms. . 193 Evening gun page 286. . 769 Execution of movements at signals, extended order. 511, 512 Exercise of squad, in ex- tended order 514 Explanations made for double rank 114 Extended order from any formation 507 Extended order, positions of piece 106 Face to the front in ex- tended order, when 508 Facings, from order 112 Fall in 19, 20, 120, 187 Field and staff at cere- monies, when mounted, etc 665 Field and staff officers, mounted 255 Field music sounds march, flourishes, ruffles, and to the color 500, 684 Fighting line 603, 62i GENERAL RULES, ETC. -Continued. Pars. 220 143 769 146 348 INDEX-GENERAL RULES, ETC. File closers, duties and re- sponsibility page 4.. File closers, in close col- umn File closers, in column of fours, etc File closers, manual of arms Fire, at objective Fire at will Fire discipline. Fire discipline, how main- tained in extended order. Fire, when Fire with counted car- tridges Firing line Firing, pending comple- tion of successive forma- tion 288 (m) Firings 142-144, 146,641-546 Firings by battalion, etc 268 Firings, executed at halt. . . 542 Firings, extended order, duties of instructor 541 Firings, extended order, volleys 543 Firings, in regiment 373 First sergeant, position of. . 247 Flag and orderlies of re- viewing ofidcer 670 Flanks of company changed to center 247 Formation, advancing con- siderable distances 275 Forming line by two movements, command “march” 293 Forward march, on com- pletion of wheel by fours. 199 Four 180, 181 Fours wheel about toward point of rest, forming line faced to the rear 292 Full distance, column of subdivisions 298 .'ars. General principles, extend- ed order 502-510 General principles. Infantry Drill Regulations 1-9 Grouping of company into squads 179 Grouping of recruits 16, 115 Guard mounting 712-732 Guard mounting, cavalry and infantry united 731 Guard mounting in bad weather, etc 730 Guard mounting, interval between old and new guard 726 Guard mounting, open ranks 714 Guard mounting, supernu- meraries 71^ Guard mounting, without review 725 Guide, announcement of 136, 228, 251 Guide, forming line from column of platoons 231 Guide, in oblique marching 130 Guide, in turn and halt 192 Guide of second or rear platoon in column 220 Guide of squad, in extended order .515, 510 Guides and enlisted men in line of file closers, manual of arms 193 Guides, in alignments 189 Guides, in column of fours, twos, or files 197 Guides, in column of subdi- visions, duties of 3(X> Guides, in forming close column, how assured 337 Guides in front marking line 193 Guides, in successive for- mations, when firing is to coram^^nce .288(m) GENERAL RULES, ETC.-Continued. Pars. 248 3;34 197 193 534 538 534, 535 591 534 538 559 INDEX-GENERAL RULES, ETC. 349 Guides, manual of arms Guides marching at route step and at ease Guides of platoons or sub- divisions, at command “ front ” Guides of rear companies, forming line by two move- ments Guides of subdivisions in column Guides, position of piece . . . Guides, posting of, by them- selves Guides, posting of, dis- tance Guides, posting of, forma- tions front into line Guides, posting of, forma- tions into line Guides, posting of, forma- tions into line faced to the rear Guides, posting of, forma- tions on right or left into line Guides, posting of, in changes of front Guides, posting of, in de- ployments Guides, posting of, in form- ing line of masses Guides, posting of, prolong- ing line Guides, posting of, succes- sive formations of regi- ment 385 Guides, posting of, time of . 288(b) Guides, recovering direc- tion 300 Guides take post 189 Habitual formation ad- vancing considerable dis- tances 275 Habitual formation for in- fantry 1 Pars, iments and battalions moving into position 4f;4 Halting leading subdivision at less than prescribed dis- tance 209 Hammer at safety notch 49, 70 Honors to be paid by troops 662 Indication of objective and range 146 Individual men and sharp- shooters, ranges 536 Inspection, band 743 Inspection of quarters 745 Instruction in extended order, to commence, when 503 Instruction of officers, etc. 185, 252 Intensity of fire, how regu- lated 544 Interval and distance, in Interval in line, how taught 19, 122 Intervals between battal- ions 371 Intervals between battal- xons, full and close 409 Intervals between brigades . 482 Intervals between compa- nies in battalion 257 Intervals between compa- nies in line of skirmish- ers 604 Intervals between regiments in brigade 462 Intervals between skirmish- ers 519 Intervals in line of platoon Intervals in line of sec- tions 574 Intervals in line of squads. . 560 In two lines, position and movements of second line 385 GENERAL RULES, ETC.-Continued. Pars. 193, 319 189 293 189, 300 193 288(k) 288(g) 288(d) 288(a) 288(i) 288(c) 288(f) 288(e) 432 288(h) 350 INDEX-GENERAL RULES, ETC. GENERAL RULES, ETC. -Continued. Pars. Kneel or lie down, extended order 522 Leading four or subdivision, where halted 209 Length of drills 11 Length of steps 31, 34, 37-39 Line of masses 432 Line of platoon columns, movements 355, 357, 364 Load, when 534 Loose pieces 100 Maintenance of squad, ex- tended order 502 Major commands “guides posts” on completion of successive formations into line 288(1) Majors, forming line of col- umns of fours, in regi- ment 399 Major, in loadings and fir- ings 265, 266 Manual of arms : battle exercises 113 color guard 265 guides and enlisted men in line of file clos- ers 193 hammer at safety notch 49, 70 marching and halting. . 112 open chambers 46 piece in front of body . . 49 position of thumb 49 resume carry, last mo- tion 49 when marchings, etc., are understood 112 March and stand at ease. .246, 509 March at ease and route step 246, 319 Marching, by the fiank un- der fire 559 Marching with arms, re- cruits Ill March in review at quick time only, except for sin- gle battalion 686 Pars. March taken up on com- pletion of wheel by fours 199 Marking points where col- umn changes direction, etc., in reviews 667 Measuring distances and intervals, pages 3 and 5. . . Memorizing drill signals, page 286, 769 Modifications of formation for review 685 Morning gun page 286, 769 Mounted officers, about 255 Mounted officers, draw and return sword 487, 496 Mounted officers, in extend- ed order 604 Mounted trumpeters and or- derlies 369, 463 Movements by battalions, simultaneous and sepa- rate 370 Movements by companies or platoons, simultane- ous 251 Movements by platoons in battalion 348, 351 Movements by platoons in regiment 454-456 Movements by platoons same as by companies 331 Movements executed at sig- nals, extended order 511 Movements executed by company as in School of the Soldier 192 Movements executed by pla- toons, etc., as in School of the Soldier 192 Movements executed from halt or marching 4 Movements in double time. . 5 Movements in extended or- der, commence when 506 Movements in extended or- der, first instruction. 503 351 INDEX-GENERAL RULES, ETC. GENERAL RULES, ETC.— Continued. Movements in extended or- der made with reference to enemy Movements in line of col- umns of fours in regi- ment Movements in single rank for instruction Movements in which guide may be either right or left 3 Movements of battalion like company 269-286 Movements of brigade on same principles as regi- ment 464 Mo\ements of column of masses like column at full distance 417 Movements of column of platoons 224 Movements of company like squad Movements of division on same principles as bri- gade 479 Movements of line of pla- toon columns 357 Movements of line of sections like line of squads 574 Movements of masses like regiment in line 441 Movements of regiment in column of fours explained from march 384 Movements of regiment in column of fours like bat- talion 383 Movements of regiment like Movements of second line in regiment 385 Movements of support, ex- tended order 559 Movements toward either flank 2 Pars. Non - commissioned officer commanding company at ceremonies 666 Non - commissioned officer commanding detachment, etc., position of rifle 193 Non - commissioned officer commanding company, post of 259 Non - commissioned officer, commanding guard 718, 727 Objective, firings 142, 146 Object of bayonet exer- cise 151 Officer of the guard, super- numerary 717 Officers and others accom- pany reviewing officer . .669, 671 Officers of the day 722 Open chambers 46 Open ranks, at order 112 Order from brigade to bat- talion commander 628 Orderlies and trumpeters mounted 369, 463 Orderlies of reviewing offi- cer 670 Order of arrangement of troops 663 Order of instruction. School of the Soldier 15 Orders of brigade com- mander 465 Orders of division com- mander 483 Order, upon halting 112 Passing from close to ex- tended order, the brigade 629 Pass in review in quick time 686 Piece in front of body 49 Pivot, fixed and movable . 196, 197, 200 Place of captain dressing company 258 Place of reserve 629 Platoons 179-183, 192 Pars. 504 399 114 INDEX-GENERAL RULES, ETC. 352 GENERAL RULES, Pars. Platoon column 354 Platoon column, full and close intervals 354, 355 Platoon, extended order 559 Ployment of column of masses 410 Ployments of close col- umn 334-341 Points where companies execute, carry and right- shoulder, at review 667 i Position of the soldier 21 Position of thumb, manual of arms 49 Positions of piece for ex- tended Older and route marches 106, 113 Positions of piece, re- cruits Ill Posting of companies, bat- talions, etc., for ceremo- nies 664 Posts of officers, etc., as in- structors 9 Practice in giving com- mands 7 Precedence of troops 663 Principles of extended or- der 502-510 Ranges, classified 540 Rapid fire 539, 546 Rear guard 615, 641-645 Rear rank close, loading and firing 77, 144 Reconnoissances and use of scouts 582, 611 Regulation of progress of action 608 Re-enforcement of firing line 575, 592, 596, 609 Relieving the firing line 594 Repetition of commands . . . 250 Repetition of commands given by trumpet, page 286, 769 Reserve, posting of 629 Respect to superiors 485 ETC.— Continued. Pars, Review by inspector junior to commanding officer . . . 696 Reviewing officer, post of . . 668 Reviewing officer, riding around troops, who ac- company 672 Review of command larger than corps 711 Reviews (see general rules for reviews, under cere- monies) 667-688 Rifle salute 95, 485 Right shoulder, at com- mand ‘ • double time ” 112 Riding around troops, staff, etc., of reviewing offi- cer 672, 673 Route marches, positions of piece 106 Rushes .556, .588-590, .592 Salute by color 498, 682 I Salute color by uncovering. 669 i Salutes returned by review- ing officer 669 Salute to the color, in re- views 669 Salute with hand 29, 485 Salute with rifle 95, 485 School of the soldier : correction of errors 17 grouping of recruits 16 instructors 12, 14 length of drills 11 object 10 order of instruction 15 Scouts, use and duties of 582, 583, 585, 596 Sections 179-183 Section constituting firing line, extended order 573 Sharpshooters, firing in ex- tended order 536 Side step from order 112 Signals and trumpet calls, practice 8 Signals, use of page 7. .506, 533 INDEX-GENERAL RULES, ETC. 353 GENERAL RULES, ETC.-Continued. Pars. Simultaneous movements by battalions 370 Simultaneous movements by companies or platoons 251 Single rank, used in first in- struction 114 Sounding calls page 286, 769 Sounding of march, fiour- ishes or ruffles at review. . 684 Squad, extended order 518-522 Squad leader. 115, 510, 513, 515-517 520, 522, 527, 528, 559, 572 Squad leaders, how re- placed 502 Squads, when broken up. . . 502 Stacks to be made with stacking swivel 99 Staff, etc., of commanders, at review 675 Staff, etc., of commanders turning out of column at review 677 Staff, etc., of reviewing offi- cer 669, 670 Staff, etc., riding around troops at review 673 Staff, etc., when command- er faces line 681 Pars. Staff of colonel, brigade commander, etc., salute at review, when 680 Staff officers draw and re- turn sword, when 676 Staff officers of brigade commander 463 Staff officers of colonel 369 Staff salute at command . . . 680 Stand and march at ease, in extended order 509 Successive formations 288, 385 Support, extended order 559 Swing of arms 192 Sword, position of, march- ing, etc 492 Sword, position of, at double time 494 Sword, when drawn and re- turned by officers 495 Sword, while publishing or- ders 488 Troops return to camp, etc., after review 667, 687, 688 Two or more lines, in regi- ment, distance 385 Volleys, use of 537, 543, 591 Wheels by fours on fixed pivot 197 V ? ( rj;i t JUi/T ...1 ii . Un" : ;i{ I V '■ \i- in'.O'i . ,y . . ■• •' '• < ■ • . hr .' 'DU , - I v7 ' I . ‘r, ' !D X ' . . .-A,. V '• •*•■■ i J' ' ‘ , I :..C. K ■ / - . T . To this edition of the urill Regulations have been added the sections of ** Official Regulations for the Army of tne United States, 1889,” referred to in the text. With this exception this is an exact reproduction of the edition of the Regulations printed for the War Depart- ment at the Government Printing Office. Heretofore, on the adoption of new tactics, numerous questions as to their interpretation have arisen. Those relating to the interpretation of Casey’s Tactics were answered through the Army and Navy Journal by General Casey, on whose staff the Editor of the Journal served during the War of the Rebellion. When Upton’s Tao tics were adopted questions concerning them were answered through the Journal by General Upton during his lifetime. Since his death such questions have, when necessary, been referred by the Editor of the Journal to the proper authorities for official determination. This practice will be continued by the Army and Navy Journal in the case of such questions concerning the interpretation of these Drill Regulations as appear to require official interpretation to settle disputes. f ^Y.(p.‘jyifiib;i*.>-«,,*;/,,^rv . *,'>:*> 1 'iJt .••) r>,i.i 1 ^i ' '•» .. M W .■.»•• ^ r. ; V . '.'t'/, '.tl ’!,{ I , ■ .t'' ’i-.J iOi\>'; I *. .*• ... ) . ■ , : ■ .' .. J:-’ .»ii:/n*>ri . - fa ..ianfHM'r. - :S .. •' 1 r ■•■■* /Ni)i .t ^ M,.. • . • •- 10.4 ■ ’ ---V .7 ’it.i noi ,-rj , ■. . ' .. '•|^X>’i;i^a a/ y.y. .:‘jf. • ir J ; •;,,* fr, :vv .a,;,-;] J- 1 iVi/. mri itto LO, ' ''■ ■ ' ■ • 'ul • .- v,' ! ' ; ' 'r'" r: i” ■/"Oltff,, ., (.0 '!< > w ;■'" I ' I I i f ; 5 • < 'XHfcyf - a f ji! , .V y I n,; ,^;v. ' ' r«'.‘vn^v 'iv-; '*>?{>■ a > f, i -T HE- 1 ARMY AND NAVY JOURNAL Publishes weekly official orders and other information of immediate interest as well as of historical value concerning the military services which can be found nowhere else, including a professional account of the movements of our own and foreign armies and navies, and a description of the experiments and discoveries illustrative of military and naval science. To this edition of the Drill Regulations have been added the sections of “Official Regulations for the Army of the United States, 1889,” referred to in the text. With this exception this is an exact reproduc- tion of the edition of the Regulations printed for the War Department at the Government Printing Office. Heretofore, on the adoption of new tactics, numerous questions as to their interpretation have arisen. Those relating to the interpretation of Casey’s Tactics were answered through the Army and Navy J ournal by General Casey, on whose staff the Editor of the Journal served daring the War of the Rebellion. When Upton’s Tactics were adopted questions concerning them were answered through the Journal by General Upton during his lifetime. Since his death such questions have, when necessary, been referred by the Editor of the Journal to the proper authorities for official deter- mination. This practice will be continued by the Army and Navy Journal in the case of such questions concerning the interpretation of these Drill Regulations as appear to require official interpretation to settle disputes. The list of contributors to the Journal, past and present, contains the names of such distinguished soldiers and sailors as Gtenerals Sherman, Sheridan, McClellan, Hancock, Gilmore, Terry, Upton, Barry, Hazen, Hunt, Casey; Admirals Porter, Ammen, Almy, Walker, Jenkins, and Lord Wolseley and Lord Alcester of the British service, besides a host of others, scarcely less well known. For sale by newsdealers, or can be ordered from VI. C. & F. P. CHURCH, Publishers. New York. Subscriptions: 60 cents a month; $3.00 six months; $6.00 a year* lAUral termi to club$. NEW I The War Deparl Arms for the UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOIS-URBANA 3 0112 000839479 It has oeen puoiisnea ujf ' ARMY AND NAVY JOURNAL In a small pamphlet, uniform with the Drill Regu- lations. It will be sent by mail, prepaid for 10c. NEW ARMY REGULATIONS, GOVERNMENT EDITION. Sent Postage Prepaid on Beceipt of Price, $1.(111. ARMY AND NAVY JOURNAL Bennett Building, 93-101 Nassau St., New York.